First Digital Edition

January 2011

Published by:

Delirium Books

P.O. Box 338

North Webster, IN 46555

sales@deliriumbooks.com

www.deliriumbooks.com

Back From The Dead © 2011 by J. F. Gonzalez

Cover Artwork © 2011 by Daniele Serra

Foil Stamp Design © 2011 by Greg Posey

All Rights Reserved.

This book is a work of fiction. Names, characters, places and incidents are either a product of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual events, locales or persons, living or dead, is entirely coincidental.

To the memory of two dear friends

who left this mortal coil way too soon

Donald Beck

and

Buddy Martinez

I miss you both

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

A number of people need to be thanked for their contributions (however small) to the writing of Back From the Dead.

First and foremost, thanks to my corral of editors who bought other projects, coaxed this one into existence, and/or assisted me in various other book projects while this bad boy was being written: Don D'Auria, Shane Ryan Staley, Larry Roberts, David Marty, Steve Souza, Paul Goblirsch, Tom and Billie Moran, Bob Strauss, Jamie LaChance, and Tod Clark.

Mike Lombardo gets credit for helping me bridge the generation gap.

Friends and colleagues get a shout-out: Ken Atkins, Jeremiah Brown, Brian Keene, Cassi Keene, Bob Ford, Kelli Owen, Del and Sue Howison, Mike Hawthorne, Trish and Tim Chervenak, Jesus and Glenda Gonzalez, Mike Harrell, Chuck Preston, Bart & Leah Robley, Richard Christian Matheson, Michael Lansu, Tim Deal, Brian Yount, Gary Braunbeck, John Everson, Chet Williamson, Gary Zimmerman, Dori Miller, David Nordhaus, and a whole host of folks I can't remember right now.

As usual, Cathy and Hannah Gonzalez get their own paragraph, because they're special.

The town of Spring Valley, PA is a creation of the author’s imagination, but the area and county it resides in is very much real. More disturbing, and very much real, are the pervading prejudices and attitudes held by many residents of such towns toward those perceived as “different.” The characters in this novel were inspired by these small-minded attitudes. It is very likely that those who hold such views will never read this novel, but that’s okay. But if they do read this novel, and find themselves offended, well, too bad.

What, you gonna cry now? Complain? Tell me I’m a big meanie? Tell all my neighbors I’m a crazed Satanist? I hope you do. I’ll actually like that.

Prologue

June 7, 1971

When they dragged the young couple out of the car, Tom Bradfield was panting with excitement. Harry Eckman had slugged the guy a few times in the face to make him shut up so Victor Beck could get some quality time with the hippie’s girlfriend, and now Tom was primed and ready to go. He grabbed a fistful of the hippie’s long blonde hair and hauled him out of the backseat of the Chevy Nova. “Get your stinkin’ ass out!”

The girl’s screaming had dwindled to moaning sobs. Victor was laughing drunkenly in the backseat. “Look at them titties! Man I got to have me some of that!”

Harry was standing near the hood of the Chevy. He took a swig of beer, crushed the can and dropped it on the ground. Tom barked at him. “Pick that up! What the hell’s wrong with you?”

Harry grinned. “That commercial about littering finally getting to you, Tom?”

Tom bristled and turned away. They’d talked about the television commercial for days; it was the one that showed an American Indian man looking out at a vast, smog-filled city, litter at his feet. As the Indian turns to the camera, a tear is seen rolling down his cheek.

The hippie was getting to his feet. His shoulder-length blonde hair fell across his bloodied face. He was wearing a T-shirt with the words Grand Funk Railroad—1971 US

Tour emblazoned on it. He was wearing bell-bottom blue jeans and scruffy tennis shoes.

He looked at Harry and Tom with a sense of wariness as he stood up and Tom could tell he was going to bolt the minute he had a chance.

“Not so fast,” Tom said, striding forward. He shoved the hippie back to the ground and Harry kicked him in the small of the back. The hippie screamed, head lolling back.

“Shut up!” Harry yelled and kicked him again, harder.

From the car, Victor: “Come on baby, let me see that bush of yours, come on—”

The hippie girl screamed and cried. There was the sound of a slap, then muffled sobbing as Victor moaned, “Oh yeah!” and then the car began to rock.

They’d found the hippies in Reading. They were cruising around, drinking beer, looking for some fun, and they’d come across the hippies at a hamburger joint off Route 272. The hippies had been seated in a corner booth talking quietly when Tom and his friends walked in to order French fries and burgers, which they’d taken outside to the car.

They were finishing up when the hippies exited the building and stood near an old Ford Mustang, arms around each other’s waists. Star-struck lovers.

Tom still had no idea why they’d abducted the couple.

Call it something to do. Call it anger at them and their kind, for all the bullshit going on in the world–the flag-burning, the war protests, their communist politics, their whole love-and-peace bullshit which was such a goddamn farce thanks to that other hippie freak from California, Charles Manson. It was all of that. It had all hit Tom suddenly and he’d mentioned something to Harry, who never needed persuading when it came to kicking somebody’s ass.

Luckily it had been late and there was nobody in the parking lot at that time of night. They’d filed out of the car and rushed the couple, subduing them easily with several blows and minor scuffling. And then, as if the whole thing was pre-planned, they’d dragged them to Tom’s car, shoved them in the backseat, and took off.

And now they were here, in the thick woods behind Zuck’s Farm about two miles off Route 772. Undeveloped land.

Where it was peaceful.

Quiet.

Victor had started in on the girl the moment her boyfriend was knocked unconscious. Tom could tell she was good looking–pretty face framed by straight, long brown hair. She had a nice body, too. Those hippies wore some tight, revealing clothing.

Still, it had made him sick watching them kiss and embrace in that parking lot. Looked like a couple of lezbo queers.

What was the goddamned world coming to?

The rocking of the car stopped and Victor climbed out, buttoning his jeans. The girl in the back seat and still sobbing.

Tom looked at Harry. They’d driven a good half a mile down a dirt road to find a place as secluded as possible. This was as secluded as it would get. “Well?” Tom asked.

Truth be told, with the alcohol buzz starting to wear off, he was starting to get a little nervous about how things had gone down so far.

“She’s ready for you guys,” Victor said.

“Hell yeah, I want a piece of that action!” Harry started shucking his jeans down.

He was a tall, lanky guy and was on the Spring Valley High School track team. Victor and Tom were on varsity football. The three of them had graduated from high school three days ago.

As Harry started toward the car, the hippie guy seemed to leap from the ground, covering an amazing amount of distance. He threw himself at Harry’s legs, sending him crashing to the ground. Harry hit the dirt with a startled “oooff!” The hippie yelled:

“Leave her alone!”

Tom reacted. He rushed forward and, as if he was performing the opening kickoff during a game, he got a good start and brought his right foot out in a hard straight-forward kick. The toe of his sneaker caught the hippie on the bridge of the nose, rocking his head back with a heavy force. The sound of foot striking face was like that of a watermelon hitting the floor and cracking.

Tom almost fell against the car from his forward momentum, and as he backed away to rain down more kicks, Harry squirmed out of the hippie’s grip. “Motherfucker,”

he growled. “I’m gonna smash his fucking face. I’m gonna fuck him up!”

Tom stomped the hippie about the face and neck. Harry was about to join him just as Victor ran up. “Stop!”

Harry got one good kick in but Victor held him back. “Stop! He’s dead!”

Tom stopped. Looked down at the hippie.

The hippie was lying on the ground, not moving.

A very large bloodstain was pooling around the hippie’s head.

“Oh man!” Tom said. In hindsight he would not remember saying that. In the years that passed when he sometimes thought of the incident, he would remember feeling a sense of extreme fright. Killing the hippie had not been part of the evening’s plan.

Kicking his ass, yes. Beating the shit out of him and his girlfriend, of course. Raping his girlfriend…not really. Victor’s sexual assault toward the girl would open Tom’s eyes to Victor’s nature, and it would affect their friendship from that point forward. But really, slapping them around a little had been the only thing on his mind that evening.

They certainly hadn’t meant to kill them.

“Are you sure?” Harry asked. He looked as shocked as Tom felt. He was standing over the hippie, eyes wide, face panicked.

Victor took a step forward. He looked freaked out. “I don’t think he’s breathing.

And look at his head!”

The hippie’s girlfriend started screaming from the backseat of the Nova. “You killed Billy! You killed him! You killed him!”

“Oh shit!” Harry said. He seemed paralyzed with fear.

It was Tom who sprang into action. He lunged toward the car, got the back door open and grabbed the girl. Her screams became shrill. “Let me go! Let me go!”

Harry and Victor could only stand and watch as Tom dragged the hippie girl out of the car. Once he pulled her out, she tried to fight him, but he had at least a foot on her in height and a good seventy pounds over her. He drove her to the ground, kneed her in the stomach and locked his hands around her throat.

Victor and Harry watched as Tom strangled her.

That was another thing Tom tried to unsuccessfully erase from his memory over the next twenty-six years: his hands around the hippie girl’s throat as he strangled her.

They never even learned her name until after the Missing Persons posters went up a week later.

Behind him, Victor was freaking out. “Oh my God, man, he’s killing her!” His tone of voice seemed to suggest they should do something about this. As in, stop Tom from killing her.

Any other time, Tom would have agreed. But this was not any other time. If this chick lived, all three of them would be brought up on murder charges based on her testimony.

She had to die.

And because she had to die, Harry and Victor did nothing to stop Tom from strangling the hippie chick to death.

* * *

Two hours later.

There was a brief period where Tom thought Harry would leave them there, grow a conscience and head straight to the police, lead them over here to the woods where Tom and Victor waited near the corpses of the two dead hippies. He even voiced this to Victor, who shook his head. “Naw, Harry won’t do that. It’s only gonna take him forty minutes to grab a shovel and he’ll be right back. He won’t let us down, man.”

And he didn’t.

Tom felt a tremendous sense of relief the minute he saw the headlights of his Nova appear in the distance. Even so, for a moment he thought it was somebody else–a cop perhaps, some wayward traveler, a couple kids maybe looking for a secluded spot to neck. A few seconds later Tom heard the unmistakable sound of the Nova’s engine and felt the weight come off his shoulders.

As the Nova pulled up, he and Victor got to their feet. They’d been talking and already had the plan in action. For now it would wait until the two hippies were buried.

Harry got out of the Nova and tossed the keys to Tom, who went to the trunk, unlocked and opened it. Three shovels lay in the dark recess. “I even got that kiddie shovel I used to help my dad with when I was eight,” Harry said.

“A shovel’s a shovel,” Victor said, grabbing one and heading to do the work they had to do.

Before Harry left to retrieve the shovels, they’d dragged the hippies about a hundred yards into the woods where they’d found a small clearing. Now they headed to where they’d left them, shovels slung over their shoulders. “You sure nobody knows about this place?” Tom asked again.

“I’m certain,” Harry said. “Only time you’ll see anybody out here is during hunting season and the ground is frozen solid that time of year.”

“And we’re digging these guys five feet down,” Victor said.

Between the three of them, they dug a five foot by three foot hole that was about chest deep. It took them two hours. By the time they got that far down they were tired, sweaty, and dirty. Victor glanced at his watch during a break. “It’s gonna be daylight in a few hours. We should probably throw ‘em in now and start shoveling dirt over them, otherwise we’re likely to get caught.”

The thought of getting caught was the decision maker. They dragged the hippies’

bodies to the hole, threw them in, and started shoveling the dirt over them. Filling the hole wasn’t as time consuming as digging it. By the time they reached the surface, sweat ran down their bodies in rivers. Harry shoveled the weeds and grass they’d dug up, tamping it down in the soft earth to give the appearance it wasn’t dug up. “That’s poison ivy, man!” Victor exclaimed.

“Yeah, and I’d rather get a case of poison ivy than have somebody come through here and wonder what’s buried there,” Harry exclaimed. He was on his hands and knees, trying to place the torn up vegetation back into some semblance of normalcy. “The shit isn’t dead, we can plant it back here and the next few rains will…you know…make it all better.”

It was a strange theory, but it worked. Because nobody ever found out where the missing hippies—whose names were Billy Thompson and Candace Drombowsky—were buried.

When they were finished they paused for a rest by the Nova. “Whatever happens,”

Tom said grimly, his voice and features stern as he made his intentions clear. “We say nothing about this. Not to future friends, not to chicks we eventually marry, not even to a goddamn priest or pastor if one of us decides to turn into a born-again Christian. You guys understand?”

Harry and Victor nodded. Harry was leaning against the Nova. For the first time it looked like the trauma and horror of that night were making their presence known on his features. “Nothing to nobody,” he said. “Not even to ourselves.” He looked at Tom and Victor. “We shouldn’t even talk about it to ourselves.”

Tom nodded. Victor said, “Yeah, I know what you mean.”

“It’s settled then,” Tom said. “After tonight, this didn’t happen. If for some reason the cops question one of us, we know nothing. We tell our parents we went out to the Jersey Shore.”

“We’ll tell them we went to the fucking Pine Barrens,” Harry said.

“Even better,” Tom agreed. “The fucking Pine Barrens. And we were never in Reading, never saw these two. We’ll shower up at Harry’s place by eight o’clock ‘cause his folks will be gone by then and that’ll be that. I’ll get the car washed. We’ll be done with it.”

“Done with it,” Victor sighed.

“Damn straight,” Harry said.

And they were done with it by ten A.M. that morning. Nobody asked them about their whereabouts the previous night, nor did the police come inquiring about whether they’d run across Billy Thompson and Candace Drombowsky. Even when Missing Persons posters went up around Berks and Lancaster County with their faces and vital statistics, nobody asked Tom, Harry, or Victor about them. Tom was certain somebody had seen them at that hamburger joint off Route 272, but nobody came forward.

After a few months went by it seemed they were in the free and clear.

The only time the subject came up was during their first semester of college, during winter break. Tom mentioned to Harry and Victor during a drive to the movies one night that if they could see to it that the land those hippies were buried in was preserved somehow, their secret would be safe. After all, it was state game land. There was always the possibility the state could sell it to a real estate developer. Turn it into a housing development or something. It was something to think about.

And they did. But they kept their thoughts, and their plans, to themselves, speaking only to each other about it in those rare times the subject came up.

And the months turned into years.

In time, the Missing Persons posters came down.

And the speculation of whatever might have happened to Billy Thompson and Candace Drombowsky eventually faded from local memory.

Chapter One

Present Day

Philadelphia, PA

The hot coffee warmed Neal Ashford’s hands as he settled back in the alley off Twenty-third and Broad Street. He took a sip, letting the warm liquid run through him.

Late spring nights could still be pretty chilly in the city, but it was at least feasible to sleep outside if the homeless shelters were filled up. You couldn’t do that in the winter.

Neal Ashford had been homeless for three months since being booted out of his apartment for failing to pay the rent. He was probably the sanest homeless person he knew. Unlike all the other homeless folks he’d met, he wasn’t a mental case, nor did he have a problem with alcohol or drugs. Well, at least not a serious one. He’d gone off the deep end when he lost his job at Harvey Industries thanks to their outsourcing program, but who wouldn’t? Neal had tried to land another position at a competing firm but was unable to. He was still having problems with his ex-wife, Linda, over custody of their twin daughters, and the combined alimony and child support payments were murder.

When he was a young man he used to ease his problems in the bottle and he’d taken to that again, only this time he didn’t stop until he was two months overdue on the rent. During that time he was still hustling for jobs wherever he could, even working a few under-the-table paying gigs, but it wasn’t enough to meet his living expenses. In short order his car was repossessed, a Sheriff’s Deputy served him papers on a lawsuit brought against him by his credit card company for failure to make payments, and then he was finally booted out of his apartment–locked out of it, actually. Assholes wouldn’t even let him get his stuff. He’d tried bunking with his ex-girlfriend, Mary, but she’d gone back to her husband. Former co-workers were no help.

Leaving Neal with no choice but to strike out on the streets.

He’d done okay so far. He’d found shelter at the YMCA and lived there for a month and a half. Once the weather began to warm up with the coming of spring, he’d ventured out and eventually became friends with another homeless guy who hung out near the convention center. Arnie Kolvak showed him the ins and outs of panhandling for change, hustling businessmen to remove snow from the windshields of their vehicles after light snowfall. If you hustled, you could make thirty, maybe forty bucks a day. Enough to eat and have plenty left over to pool together to rent a cheap room for the night.

Some nights, though, he had no such luck.

Neal sipped his coffee. Center City was bustling, and Neal wanted to head farther east to some more remote locations he knew of. There was an alley on Seventh and Vine that was pretty quiet. He’d slept behind a trash dumpster there one night last week and done okay. He was a good mile away from that alley now and he rose to his feet, his knee joints popping.

He started making his way down the alley. His shoes were ratted and worn, his jeans caked with dirt and mud, his army surplus jacket giving him warmth and a nice layer of cushion for those nights he did have to sleep outside. The jacket had deep pockets woven in the seams where he stashed items essential to his survival on the streets–a toothbrush and a roll of toothpaste, a comb, a stick of deodorant, a small handheld mirror, mouthwash, a wallet, the keys to his old apartment and car, a small address book, several pens, a Swiss Army knife. Stashed deep in another pocket was a wadded up blanket he’d swiped from the Salvation Army a month back; a further sources of comfort, if you could call it that.

He reached the mouth of the alley and looked both ways. The street was relatively deserted, but there was an SUV approaching from fifty yards away. Neal started crossing, sipping his coffee as he went. He’d just reached the curb when the SUV slowed down behind him. He heard voices coming from inside the vehicle–it sounded like kids–and then the rear passenger side door opened.

He looked behind him just as a couple of teenage boys ran up to him, their expressions malevolent, evil. Neal had them pegged on sight: middle-class white boys from the suburbs. He’d heard stories about teenagers that sometimes went on rampages, beating up homeless people for thrills, and he started running toward the opposite alley when they grabbed him.

“Come on, get him David, get him!”

Rough hands grabbed Neal’s jacket. He fought back, landing a fist against one smooth-shaven cheek. An arm locked around his throat and one of the kids loomed in front of him, looking pissed off. “Motherfuck,” he said. The kid reared back, fist clenched, and popped him hard in the face.

Neal saw stars and, before he could collect his bearings, he was punched again.

He felt blood spurt out of his nostrils. He felt himself start to go down but a pair of hands held him up. They started to drag him to the car. “Come on, you worthless piece of shit,”

one of the kids muttered. Neal opened his mouth to scream and something was shoved into his mouth, stifling it. He tried to spit it out but a hand was holding it in. As he was pushed into the vehicle, another pair of hands managed to wrap a bandana around his mouth, tying the gag firmly into place. Car doors slammed. “Okay, let’s go! Let’s go!”

The driver pulled away from the curb and headed down the street. A pair of guys were in the rear of the vehicle and they went to work on Neal the minute he was thrown into the SUV, forcing him to the floor. One began tying him up with what felt like rope while another one–the guy who’d punched him in the face—leaned close to him.

“Gotcha, you fucking dirty piece of shit!” He looped another fist down into his face.

That single blow was the opening of a floodgate as fists were rained down on him, striking him everywhere–the face, back, chest, stomach. A booted foot struck him repeatedly in the small of his back and Neal screamed through the gag. His arms were tied behind his back at the wrists, and his feet were tied together at the ankles. He rolled on the floor of the vehicle, trying to escape the blows, but they held him down and beat him, laughing all the while until he finally blacked out.

* * *

When they got him back to Scott Bradfield’s house in Spring Valley, David Bruce had to threaten to kick the crap out of them if they didn’t shut their fucking holes. Steve Downing was giggling like a goddamn kid, and Gordon Smith was making sounds of disgust. The homeless guy had shit his pants shortly after they started whaling on him while they were still in Philly, and David had shouted for Gordon and Steve to stop. Steve had kept kicking the guy, though, and David had to grab the idiot by a lock of his hair and haul him back. “He’s knocked out, fuckhead,” he’d said. “Stop it! You want to kill him?”

Steve had stopped and settled back against the window. Steve was a walking cliché; guy was a chick magnet and dumber than a stump. The middle seat of the SUV

had been hauled out months before, giving them a nice little area to play in as Scott piloted the vehicle back to Lancaster County. The homeless guy was lying on the floor like a sack of shit, bloody and stinking like a goddamn cow.

And now Steve and Gordon were breaking up in laughter again as David and Scott carried the homeless guy out of the SUV. “Shut the fuck up!” David hissed. He glared at him. At six foot one with a lean build, David could be intimidating when he had to be. A lock of brown hair fell over his forehead.

“Okay,” Steve said, his laughter quickly stopping. Gordon averted his eyes from David and turned away.

“Open the fucking door,” Scott said. He was dragging the homeless guy, pulling him from beneath his armpits.

Gordon went to the guesthouse that was situated at the rear of the Bradfield property and opened the door. Scott had unlocked it earlier. Scott and David carried the homeless guy inside and the rest of them followed.

The light was turned on and Scott turned around. “Turn the goddamn light off!”

More laughter from Steve and Gordon. The light was turned off. Gordon sounded bored. “I bet your girlfriend wishes you’d behave like that,” he said.

“Fuck you, Gordon!”

“Girls, girls,” Scott said. Despite the pitch dark inside the guesthouse, David knew his way around. It had once served as a real guesthouse by the former owners, but Scott’s parents hadn’t had much use for the extra living space since buying the estate. The guesthouse itself was approximately twelve hundred square feet of living space. The carpet had been torn out years earlier, the furniture removed, and the living room was now a bare room with wood floors. Scott’s dad once used it as a workroom, but Mom had made him move his stuff to the basement. Probably so she could keep an eye on him. Guy was always working anyway. If David had a wife as good-looking as Scott’s mother, he wouldn’t be working so much. He’d be banging the old lady more often. Maybe that’s why Scott’s mom was such a bitch most of the time.

“Girls, girls, yourself,” Gordon said. He was Scott’s height, but slightly stocky with dark hair and a wide face. When he wore his glasses he looked like a scholar. He knelt down on the floor by the unconscious homeless guy. David saw him check his pulse by putting an index finger to his neck.

“He still alive?” Steve asked.

“Yeah, he’s alive.”

“We aren’t going to fucking beat on him anymore, you got it?” Scott Bradfield said. His blue eyes reflected the intensity they were obviously all feeling. David could see sweat dot his brow and gleam in his blonde crewcut. “We beat him too damn much in the SUV coming back here. I want him to last a long time, okay?”

“You got the ropes?” Gordon asked.

“Here in the corner,” David said. He took two steps toward the wall and knelt down, feeling for them. Four coils of rope lay nestled there, ready to be deployed.

“Let’s get him tied up,” Scott said.

They did it. Despite their teenage dysfunction, they could work together very well when the task called for it. Like tonight’s abduction. That had gone off without a hitch. In fact, it had been downright perfect.

They’d been planning this for weeks. It had been Scott’s idea to go to downtown Philly and pluck a homeless person off the streets and bring him back to the guest house where they could have some fun with him in relative seclusion, and it was a damn fine idea. Scott’s house was on ten acres of land that bordered against the woods. His nearest neighbor was down the road a ways, but far enough away that they wouldn’t suspect anything. Scott’s parents surely weren’t going to suspect anything because they were never around.

The plan was to grab a homeless person, get him to the guesthouse and keep him there for however long it took him to die from whatever injuries he sustained from repeated beatings administered by Scott and his friends.

There was no use in doing any of that happy-slapping bullshit, or going on a wilding spree. Too many idiots got caught doing that and wound up going to prison for it.

And the ones that filmed themselves doing it–well, they deserved to go to prison. Stupid fucks. That wasn’t going to happen with Scott and his friends. If you do everything in private, nobody will know. And they could still have fun.

And besides, they could bury the body when they were finished. And they would do it the right way, too. Wrap it up in garbage bags so it wouldn’t leak and the animals wouldn’t get the scent, and they would bury it four, maybe six feet deep.

Scott inspected the ropes when they were finished. They’d tied the homeless guy up tight, binding his lower legs and thighs, his arms. Guy wasn’t going anywhere. If he woke up, no way was he going to be able to lift himself into a sitting position, and if he did, he couldn’t go anywhere. Door would be locked from the outside, and the guest house was far enough into the back yard that nobody would see anything through the windows anyway.

“Think we should find something to tie him to?” Gordon asked. They were standing around the unconscious man.

“Why?”

“Suppose he gets to his feet and bashes his head against the window or something?”

Scott had thought of that but didn’t think it was likely. “I don’t think that’ll happen. Besides, if he does, he’s only going to hurt himself worse. Maybe even kill himself.”

“Still, he could try.”

“You could board the window up,” Gordon suggested.

“Then I’d have to board the others up and my dad’ll wonder why they’re boarded up!”

“Yeah, and it’ll take him six months to notice,” Steve said.

True. Still, Scott felt they could get away with leaving the windows un-boarded for now. “He’ll be fine for tonight. Come on, let’s get out of here.”

And with that, Scott Bradfield led his friends out of the little guesthouse set off deep in his back yard, leaving an unconscious Neal Ashford alone and trussed up.

Chapter Two

Tim Gaines was sitting by himself on a bench in the quad at Spring Valley High School reading a book— Back From the Dead by Richard Long—when Scott Bradfield and David Bruce walked by with those two losers they hung out with, Gordon Smith and Steve Downing.

Ever since that day six years ago when Scott, David, and Steve had beaten him up in that field off Cedar Street and tried to force him to eat a dead possum, Tim had done everything he could to avoid them (and the reason they’d tried to force-feed a dead possum to him was because they were moronic pricks who thought that if you read vampire novels—Tim had just discovered Stephen King’s ‘Salem’s Lot and had been reading it in study hall that day—you were probably a vampire yourself. Complete idiocy, but that was how people who lived in this goddamn town seemed to think). Naturally, he’d told his parents what happened when he arrived home. He’d still been sobbing and throwing up in the bathroom when his mother arrived home from work and he’d collapsed in her arms, barely able to speak. When Dad got home from his job as a Web Designer in Lancaster and learned what happened to his only child, he’d been furious.

He’d called the police. Ten minutes later, a squad car was parked in front of their duplex and an officer was taking a statement. “I want that little sonofabitch arrested!” Dad had said, his voice shaking.

Tim and his friends were arrested that evening. But then a strange thing happened.

They were released to the custody of their parents and the next day, when charges normally would have been filed, the Township declined to move forward on it. Steve, David, and Scott received warnings from the police and the school district had suspended them for three days. Dad had been furious and threatened to complain to the Pennsylvania State Police, but then Scott’s parents stepped in. They’d threatened to sue them if they continued pursuing what they claimed were “erroneous, false, and libelous charges”

against their son. Only then had Dad backed down. The Bradfield’s were one of the wealthiest families in Spring Valley. They lived in a seventeen room mansion on ten acres of land just north of the little airport that mostly serviced private planes and the occasional corporate jet; Tom Bradfield was the CEO of a Financial Planning firm in Lancaster; his mother was a high ranking executive with a construction company. They had the available legal and financial resources to ruin the Gaines family, Dad explained to Tim a week later at the dining room table. “We can’t afford a lawsuit like this, Tim,” Dad had explained. He’d looked defeated and angry that night. So had mom. “Even though we can probably prove our case and win, the cost of doing it would be prohibitive. We’d lose everything in the process, but if we lost the case…”

Tim Gaines was a smart kid and he understood. The next morning Tim, his parents, the principal of Spring Valley Elementary School, and the School District Superintendent had a meeting. Because the School District was facing a possible lawsuit from not only the Gaines family, but from the parents of the other boys involved in the assault, they saw no choice but to allow the boys back into school. “But I want to assure you that they are being placed on new schedules that will keep them away from your son for not only the remainder of the school year, but during middle school and high school as well.” The Superintendent was a man named Dr. Roth. Tim thought he looked like a mad scientist. He was bald with wispy strands of graying hair sprouting on the sides of his head and a bushy mustache and eyebrows. “We’re going to arrange for separate transportation for your son when school lets out in the afternoon as well.”

And that was the arrangement that was made. For the past six years, Tim rarely saw Scott Bradfield, David Bruce, and Steve Miller. In the afternoon, a school administrator drove him home (his father dropped him off in the morning). And when he entered Spring Valley Middle School and, later, Spring Valley High School, he was on a different bus altogether than the three boys. Likewise, their class schedules were so different that the few times Tim did manage to catch a glimpse of his tormentors, they were either on the other side of the building, or the school itself.

Tim kept his head down, eyes to the book as the boys passed by. He knew school administrators were still on their vigilance in keeping them in check, and despite occasionally running into them at school–and very rarely after school–they had not attempted to harass or assault him again. Instead they’d relied on others to do their dirty work for them.

As the boys passed by, Gordon called down to him. “Hey Count, what’s happening?”

Tim ignored him. They’d been calling him Count Gaines ever since that incident, and despite being reprimanded by the school, the nickname had stuck and spread throughout the student body. Thanks to them, the dimmer bulbs that attended Spring Valley High School thought he was either a vampire or a warlock.

A moment later, Gordon walked back to Tim and stood in front of him. “Another vampire novel, Count?”

“This one’s about zombies,” Tim said. While the three original boys were forbidden by the school district to have any contact with Tim, this edict was not extended to their cronies. As a result, shortly after that original incident, Scott Bradfield and David Bruce had started a rumor that Tim was a devil worshipper. Of course, it didn’t help that Tim liked horror movies, horror comics, and horror novels, and that he was into goth clothing. For a brief time during seventh and eighth grade, the rumors resulted in harassment from students who didn’t even run in the same social circles as Scott Bradfield and his friends. His locker was broken into, the contents destroyed. Notes containing obscene messages were left in his folders and schoolbooks. A lame attempt at a pentagram was drawn in felt pen on the locker of a classmate and blame was laid at Tim’s feet. Unfortunately a new guidance counselor, who wasn’t aware of Tim’s history, believed the accusations and mounted a campaign of new harassment and intimidation toward him. This only encouraged some of the more straight-laced, preppy kids to pick on and harass Tim whenever possible.

“Zombies, huh?” Gordon said. “Cool!”

“Gord!” Scott called out. He and David were waiting for him, not even looking at Tim. Tim was considered beneath them in the student body hierarchy.

“Count’s teaching me about zombies,” Gordon said.

“You can learn about zombies from watching TV,” Scott said. “Come on. We’re late.”

“Later, Count,” Gordon said. He hustled over to join his friends.

Tim watched the boys retreat out of the corner of his eye. The feeling of dread he’d felt in his stomach began to subside.

This was his junior year of high school. In a few weeks he’d be out of school for the summer. In one more year he’d be finished with high school and this backwater town forever. Ever since that incident six years ago, he’d wanted to leave Spring Valley and move to an area where people didn’t judge you by the clothes you wore, or what kind of books you read. He wanted to live in a community that was more open-minded. The town he lived in, Spring Valley, in the heart of Lancaster County, Pennsylvania, was very conservative. If you weren’t a born-again Christian it was assumed there was something wrong with you. Tim had considered himself an agnostic shortly after his run-in with Scott and David, but never professed this aloud. To many people in the community, if you were of any religious faith other than some mainline Christian denomination you might as well be a Satanist.

Tim sighed and tried to get back into his book, but the atmosphere of reading was gone. He marked his space, set the book down, and glanced at his watch. The one o’clock bell was due to ring in two minutes. So far he had no homework, so he could get a good hundred or more pages read tonight. He had nothing else to do. Besides, this book was getting pretty good. Richard Long was one of his favorite horror authors.

A pair of girls walked by, glanced in his direction and gave identical smirks. Tim glowered at them. Karen Henderson and Heather Watkins. Such smarmy bitches. They’d picked up the baton handed to them by Scott Bradfield and ran with it back in the eighth grade. They were responsible for spreading the rumor among the student body at Spring Valley High school that he liked to go in the woods, sacrifice cats, drink their blood, and chant to Satan on Hallowe’en. That rumor became so persistent that the police followed up on it. The officer that paid him a visit was Officer Frank Clapton, who investigated the original assault; he’d even told Tim’s dad that he was just going through the motions in the investigation because he had to–he didn’t believe the allegations personally.

Still, the fact that the accusation against him was levied was enough to infuriate his parents. That was the closest they ever came to packing up and moving.

But they couldn’t. Dad’s job in town paid pretty well and mom’s parents, who lived nearby, were getting old and sick and she felt obligated to stay near them. They didn’t want to move to York County, which was too far from his grandparents, and the area they were in now was in close proximity to them. If he could just stick it out for a couple more years–

Which he did. It wasn’t easy, but he did.

George Ulrich sauntered by and patted him on the back. “Hey man, what’s up?”

Tim brightened. George was about the closest he could find to a friend in this school. He was in the same grade, was built like an athlete, and possessed handsome features that made him a chick magnet. Unlike the lettermen jocks, George did not associate with the trendy cliques and did not participate in any of the team sports or school functions. Instead, he was a member of a loose group of kids Tim hung out with that consisted of a kid named Al, who was a comic book geek, another kid named Matt, who was the school’s lone punk rocker, and a girl named Chelsea, who was an art student and who Tim had a secret crush on. George and Al were good buddies, and Tim knew they often hung out together after school. Sometimes he wished he could hang out with them, too.

“Not much,” Tim responded. They started heading to their next class. “What about you?”

“Not much.” George shrugged. “Hey, what’re you doing Friday?”

“Same as usual. Probably stay home and read or watch a movie.”

“Wanna hang out with me and Al? We were thinking of catching a movie and then grabbing a bite to eat at Freeze N Frizz afterward.”

Tim tried not to let his enthusiasm show too much. He hefted his backpack in a more comfortable position. “That sounds great. What do you want to see?”

“Hostel 3 is playing.”

“Sounds good to me!” Tim was dying to see Hostel 3, and felt another sense of vindication. Another horror movie fan!

“Cool. Hey, listen, let’s meet up tomorrow at the beginning of lunch and we’ll swap numbers. I gotta go catch my next class. Mr. Banks. English Comp.”

“Okay, man.”

“See ya!” George clapped him on the shoulder again and took off, heading toward the row of buildings on the other side of campus.

Tim watched him go for a minute, then started heading to his own class. For the first time he could remember, he felt good about himself. After years of being the butt of everybody’s jokes, of hardly having any friends, he felt he was gaining strides in his social life. He and George had been tentatively sniffing around each other for the past year when George transferred to Spring Valley High from a school in Dauphin County.

His parents were new to the area; job transfer. They’d hung out together somewhat at lunch and it was during those brief, yet introspective moments when they’d discussed mutual interests when he realized they were a lot alike. They liked horror and SF, were into gaming, and the same kind of music. The only difference was that George Ulrich didn’t have six years of baggage on him, branding him as an outcast. If he’d learned about any of Tim’s history from the other kids he never revealed it, or let it affect him. Tim had known Al, Matt, and Chelsea casually since Middle School and everything seemed to just magically come together when George arrived. They started hanging out together at school. And it was shortly after that he began to really notice Chelsea. She’d always seemed to carry an aura of trouble about her. Tim could never pin anything specific to her, but the impression he had was she was not the typical clichéd fake tortured soul so many artsy kids pretended to be. It had taken Chelsea a good two months to open up to the others during their lunchtime conversations. It wasn’t until the last few weeks that Tim noticed three things about her: he really liked her as a human being, he was physically attracted to her, and she’d had some serious psychological problems in the past that had caused her to cut herself. More than once Tim caught a glimpse of scars running diagonally along her right inner forearm. The first time he noticed them it immediately made sense. Late in their tenth grade year, Chelsea had missed school for two weeks, with no explanation given for the absence. He’d wanted to ask her about it but wasn’t sure how to approach the subject. Maybe it was better if he didn’t. Besides, it didn’t matter.

He liked her, and that was all that mattered.

Tim walked to class and slid into his seat in Mrs. Fegley’s Algebra class. The rest of the afternoon went by in a dreaming haze.

* * *

Through all the laughter, David couldn’t hear Scott yelling at him to stop. He hit the bum in the face again, his fists plowing two front teeth out. The bum’s face was a swollen, bloody mass of flesh. His right eye was completely swollen shut. He’d been pounding on the piece of shit the past minute or so and he was already working up a sweat. His fists and face were spattered with the man’s blood.

A hand gripped his wrist, stopping his next blow. “I said stop!” Scott yelled.

David started, suddenly back in focus. He blinked, panting with exertion.

They’d trussed the homeless guy up by a pulley they installed on the ceiling via a heavy steel hook. Dangling from thick chains at the wrists, the homeless man had been stripped to the waist. His body was a mass of contusions and heavy bruising. His left side was puffy and swollen from repeated kicks and blows. The hardwood floor he dangled above was wet with piss and blood. The bum dangled, his breathing raspy, barely conscious.

Scott hauled David back. “Jesus Christ, I can’t believe you!”

David stepped away, confused. “I thought that’s what we brought him here for?”

“We didn’t bring him here so you can kill him on the first day!” Scott yelled.

Scott and David were the only two in attendance in the guest house after the abduction. Since then, they’d pretty much left the bum alone. Scott had kept him gagged and tied up and allowed him to regain his senses. Then today after school he and David showed up to have some fun. Scott’s mistake was letting David go first.

“I want a crack at him too, you fucking asshole! Look what you did to his goddamn eye! You damn near punched it the fuck out of the socket!”

“Yeah, I did, didn’t I?” David rubbed a grimy forearm against his sweaty brow.

Scott managed a grin and threw a mock punch at David. “Come on, let’s get out of here.”

They left the guesthouse; Scott locked the door behind them. They could leave the homeless guy dangling there all night for all he cared. His throat was already blown out from trying to scream his way through the gag. Scott discovered that this morning when he’d gone in to check on him.

They paused at the little gazebo in the center of the well-manicured back yard.

Scott sat down on the quaint oak bench and David sat down next to him. He peeled off his shirt, revealing a well-muscled abdomen. Scott leaned forward, elbows resting on his knees. “Gordon and Steve haven’t said anything, right?”

“Nah,” David said. He looked at Scott. “They’re cool, man. I told you we’re all cool with it.”

“Yeah, but the more people know, the more of a chance we’ll get caught!”

“Not if we keep it to the four of us.”

“All I want is a week with him,” Scott said. “I want my turn in a day or two. Then we can let Gordon and Steve have a turn.”

“And no filming,” David said.

“Goddamn right. No filming the shit and posting it to Youtube. That’s how all those other assholes get caught.” He rose to his feet and David followed. “Come on, I’m hungry.”

They headed to the house. “He’s only gonna last for so long. I figure when we’re done we can bury him in the woods that border Zuck’s Farm. We’ll do it right, too. Wrap him in plastic and dig a good five foot hole, drop him in.”

David nodded. “Yeah, that’s the ticket.”

Scott led the way in to the spacious house through the breakfast nook. As they stepped inside, David was struck by the immense size of the Bradfield home. It was immaculate. Well over four thousand square feet, it had five bedrooms and five baths, a large great room with vaulted ceilings, a large kitchen, a dining room, and a four car garage. There was an indoor swimming pool off the combination mud room/laundry room near the garage. The basement was finished and contained a family room with a wet bar, a media room, guest quarters, and a small workroom where Scott’s father had woodworking tools: bandsaw, various hammers and pliers, even a goddamn chainsaw.

That was a lot of house for only three people, but David lived in a house that was only slightly smaller, with his brother and sister.

Scott opened the refrigerator and pulled out a carton of orange juice. “Thirsty?”

“Yeah.”

David sat on one of the stools at the counter as Scott pulled down a pair of drinking glasses. As he poured the juice, Scott glanced at the clock on the wall. It was just after four P.M. “Your folks working late again this week?”

“Dad is. Not sure about Mom.” Scott handed a glass to him.

“I can’t believe your mom still works,” David said. He took a sip of his orange juice; it was freshly squeezed, just the way he liked it. “When my dad was made senior partner, Mom quit her job.”

“My mom loves this shit,” Scott said. He was standing on the other side of the counter. He took a quick gulp of orange juice. “She always has. I mean, they met at work.”

“Oh yeah?”

“Yeah.” Scott finished the rest of his juice in several gulps, set the glass down and sighed. “That hit the spot.”

“So…your mom’s always worked, then?”

“Pretty much. She works, does her country club shit on the weekends.”

David took another sip of his orange juice. When his mom quit her job, she said it was because she wanted to be home for when he and his sister returned from school. I don’t like the idea of you coming home to an empty house or spending the afternoons at the Rec Center, she’d said at the time. David had been hoping she’d change her mind; having mom around now was like being under the watch of the Gestapo. Ever since that day five years ago when his parents received that call from school telling them what he’d done to Count Gaines, Mom never fully trusted him again, even after he apologized a thousand times and went out of his way to be extra nice to her and shower her with presents. Now she was constantly checking up on him, calling the homes of his friends to inquire about him.

“That sucks,” Scott said.

David nodded. That pretty much echoed his sentiment.

“So…we cool?” Scott asked. He was looking at David as if he were trying to get a read on him.

David finished his juice and set the empty glass down on the counter. “Yeah, we’re cool.”

“I’m going to keep Rebecca away from the house.” Rebecca was Scott’s gorgeous, and incredibly nosy, girlfriend. It was a minor miracle Rebecca wasn’t along last night.

She was known for dropping by Scott’s house unexpectedly to check up on him.

“She still doesn’t know about the Intercourse incident, right?”

“Hell no!”

David grinned at the memory of the Intercourse incident. Late last summer, just before school started, he, Gordon, and Scott had gone cruising around in Intercourse, a small town about fifteen miles away. Intercourse was a big tourist attraction, drawing thousands of people a year to its quaint streets and shops run by the Amish. There was actually a big Amish population in Intercourse, with the majority of them living on farms in the surrounding countryside. On the day in question, with David driving, they’d cruised around the town until they found their likely target–a young Amish man on a bicycle. As they drove by, Scott leaned out the car window and pushed the man down. They’d sped away, sputtering laughter. They’d done the same thing to a pair of female Amish sect members, also on bikes. This time Scott had pushed one down, causing her to topple into her friend, knocking them both to the ground in a tangle of Amishflesh, blue ankle-length dresses and bicycles. They’d laughed all the way home.

There’d been no witnesses to what they’d done. The incidents had even received mention in the local paper the next day.

In a way that’s what started it all.

Scott had wanted to go cruising for some bum-bashing ever since. The uproar over the assaults on the three Amish had been loud in the local media, and for a brief time David was afraid the cops would come knocking on his door. Fortunately for them, their victims had been unable to provide accurate descriptions and the authorities never came poking around. Besides, they had a clear alibi. David was at Scott’s house that day watching movies all night with Rebecca and Gordon. Scott’s parents had seen them when they left earlier that evening for a shindig at some fancy Country Club. They’d still been there when they came home, shortly before midnight. Besides, all four were at the top of their class academically and socially, and they were involved in various youth groups at their local churches. Scott was even President of an off campus Spring Valley High School Students for Christ social club that met every Wednesday in the basement of the Grace Baptist church on Main Street.

They’d remained on the straight and narrow ever since they’d gotten into trouble by beating up the Gaines kid.

Or so everybody seemed to think.

“Okay…I see what you mean,” Scott said. He was leaning against the opposite counter where his mother prepared the occasional meal. “It’s still gonna be my ass in a sling if we get caught.”

“If you’re afraid of getting caught, let’s kill him now.” David was slightly taken aback the minute that was out of his mouth. Had he just said that? Yes, he had.

“Nah, I don’t want to kill him now,” Scott said. “It’s gotta be like we planned it. I mean, what fun is offing him real quick? That’s why we got him in the first place, right?”

“Right.”

“And we got tired of driving out of the area to other neighborhoods and picking fights with other guys, right?”

“You got that right.” Ever since that incident involving the Amish, he and Scott, occasionally joined by Gordon and Steve, in various vehicles, had ventured out of Lancaster County to pick fights with people. It didn’t matter who–some guy taking out the trash, a pedestrian in a quiet section of town. If it looked like they could take him, the guys would jump out and pound the shit out of him for as long as possible, then get the hell out of there. The first three times they’d set off on random beatings like this they’d stomped the shit out of four different guys. Last time, though, they met their match. Some skinny little fuck with glasses they set upon turned out to be a martial arts expert. They got the hell out of there before serious damage was done to their respective selves.

“So we’re safe,” Scott said. “That homeless guy is so fucked up he ain’t gonna be in any condition to scream or run. My parents never venture out there, and what we’re doing is staying between us. We’ll be fine.”

Steve nodded. He looked at Scott, realization dawning in him. “Only thing is…what do we do after he’s dead and buried? What then? Get another one?”

Scott frowned. “Damn, you’re right. You got a good point there.”

Chapter Three

Tim Gaines couldn’t have wished for a better evening.

George and Al picked him up shortly after 5:30 and they made it to the theater fifteen minutes before the movie started. The Spring Valley Main Theater was packed.

Located just across from a small commercial airport, the theater housed eight screens, all of them running first-rate features. Hostel 3 was nearly sold out. Surprising, considering the relatively conservative nature of the population of Spring Valley.

The three boys cringed in the appropriate moments of the film and laughed during those moments of humor. When the movie was over they walked out of the lobby into a relatively comfortable late Spring evening. There was already a large crowd arriving for the late show, including several kids from Spring Valley High School. Most of them Tim recognized.

George nodded at a couple of familiar faces that said hello to him as he and Al talked about the movie. As they stepped into the parking lot, George turned to them.

“You guys hungry?”

“Hell yeah!” Al said.

“Freeze and Frizz!” Tim chanted.

They piled into George’s car, an old four door Saturn, and were at Freeze and Frizz ordering hamburgers, hotdogs, French fries, and sodas within fifteen minutes.

Freeze and Frizz was a local mainstay in Spring Valley. Located just off Route 501, it was a family-owned hamburger joint that served great food: hamburgers, hotdogs, steak sandwiches, onion rings and fries–and the best chocolate milk shakes in the universe. The place did booming business in the summer thanks to a combination of its food and atmosphere. It sported plenty of indoor booths, a large grassy area with picnic benches, and a playground for the kids. With the completion of the Main Theater down the street, business was booming more than ever.

They took their food to one of the picnic tables outside. Al had already staked a claim on one of them, and as they sat down and divided up the food, George asked Tim why he thought Eli Roth was over-rated as a director. “I think he’s good,” Tim said, biting into his hamburger. “I like his stuff, don’t get me wrong. Most people either love him or hate him. I thought Cabin Fever was awesome, and the first Hostel definitely had its moments.”

“The scariest thing about the first Hostel film was the Elite Hunt club,” Al said.

He dipped his French fries in catsup and chowed down.

“Oh, those guys were the essence of the movie!” Tim said. “I’m really glad he got more into how they operate in the sequel. If you ask me, Hostel 2 was ten times better than the first one.”

George was watching him. “You really love horror movies, don’t you?”

Tim felt suddenly embarrassed. He took a bite of his hamburger, not knowing how to respond, when George smiled. “I dig ‘em too.”

“No shit, me too!” Al said. He took a slurp of his orange soda. “Horror movies, graphic novels, comics–”

“Novels,” George said, nodding.

Tim grinned. The vibe he got from George and Al was that they were sincere. For the first time Tim felt like he was on the verge of finding real friends in Al and George.

“Hey guys, what’s up?”

The three boys turned at the sound of the voice. Tim felt his elation drop a notch.

Gordon Smith and Steve Miller were ambling over. With them were Rebecca Watkins and Susan Snow. Rebecca was Scott Bradfield’s girlfriend, and as far as Tim knew, Susan wasn’t dating anybody. Rebecca tended to hang out with Scott’s friends whenever his old nemesis was occupied elsewhere. Susan was probably tagging along because she was Rebecca’s best friend.

Gordon, Steve and the girls stopped by the table and Gordon sat down beside Tim.

“You guys go to the movies?” Steve asked.

“Yeah,” Al said. He and George were nodding at them, exchanging grins.

“See Hostel 3?” Gordon asked.

“You better believe it,” George said. He had wolfed down all of his fries. “That is one mean movie.”

There was laughter all around. Tim felt like he was in the spotlight. Susan sat down across from him, making small talk with Rebecca, who was standing close by.

Gordon nudged Tim. “So tell me about that book you were reading the other day. The zombie book.”

“You’re reading a zombie book?” Al asked, the interest obvious in his features.

“Yeah,” Tim said.

“So what happened?” Gordon asked.

Tim took a sip of his chocolate shake. “You mean, what happened in the book?”

“Yeah.”

Tim shrugged, curious why Gordon would want to know the plotline of the horror novel he was reading. Gordon was one of those kids that only read when they were assigned books to read in class. “It’s about a group of guys that basically make zombies so they could be their slaves.”

Gordon looked fascinated. “You shittin’ me?”

“No,” Tim said. Part of him felt nervous that he was talking to Gordon in a more or less civilized manner; this was the only time he could remember Gordon being courteous to him. “I’m at the part now where they’ve got a bunch of them enslaved in this…like…encampment…and they’re going to use them to—”

“What’s the name of the book?” Al asked.

“It’s called Back From the Dead and it’s by Richard Long,” Tim told Al. He turned to Gordon. “They make the zombies by a combination of black magic…specifically voodoo and this…I guess you could say it’s this powder made from certain herbs that are found from this plant in the ‘Carribean. I can’t remember the name now. And—”

“So do these zombies eat people?” Steve asked.

Tim realized that they were all paying attention to him now. Even Susan Snow, who’d hardly noticed him since they entered middle school together and was one of the hottest-looking girls in school. Tim took a quick sip of his milk shake to wet his palate.

“No. They don’t eat people. At least they haven’t yet.”

“So how do they make the zombies?” Gordon asked.

Tim shrugged. If this had happened back in the sixth or seventh grade he would have been hesitant to tell him. Gordon would have just run off to tell Scott and Steve, then the three of them would tease and make fun of him about it. However, this time, things seemed different. Tim had the impression that Al and George, who were not only interested in hearing about this too, would take his back if Gordon turned into a shithead.

“Well, some of this novel takes place in Haiti, where zombies are very real to the population there. How the characters in the novel make the zombies is from a mixture of the herbs I mentioned and certain chemicals found from toad skin and puffer fish.”

“Is that because they’re poisonous?” Gordon asked.

“Yeah,” Tim said. “The hungoun, or the voodoo priest, can make the victim appear dead by putting this mixture in food or blowing it as a powder in their face. The victim ingests it involuntarily, they faint, and people think they’re dead. They have an incredibly slow heart rate and labored breathing, and because people are buried so quickly in Haiti due to the high humidity and heat, this suits the zombie-making process. The victim is dug up within eight hours of burial and by then they’re a zombie.”

“So…they’re not really dead?”

“Not really. Well, in Back From the Dead they are because in the book they die and the voodoo priest uses certain rituals in conjunction with the chemicals.”

“What kind of rituals?” Gordon was looking at Tim as if he was sincerely interested in learning about this.

Tim traded a glance with George. “Well…specifically a black magic rite, more out of Santeria than Voodoo. There’s a formula they follow…certain prayers spoken before the victim is secured…oh, and the ground the victim is buried in has to be consecrated…there’s got to be a special ritual performed over it and a sacrifice made.”

“A human sacrifice?”

“No, an animal. In the book they sacrifice a chicken.”

“Okay.” Gordon looked like he was taking mental notes.

“Anyway,” Tim continued, “Once the victim has been killed and buried, another ritual is performed and then the person comes back from the dead, programmed to do the priests…or, in the case of this story, the protagonists, bidding.”

“So they don’t eat people?”

“Not in Back From the Dead they don’t.”

“And they don’t, like, rot and shit?”

“Well…actually, they kinda do.”

“That’s so cool!” Gordon grinned. “I’ve gotta check that book out. Can I borrow it when you’re finished?”

“Sure,” Tim said, before realizing he was agreeing to loan a book to a kid he didn’t really care for. “I should be done with it by Monday.”

“Cool. Thanks.”

Steve Downing, who’d been listening earnestly, rested his foot on the bench. “So you think that shit’s real?”

Gordon turned to him. “It’s gotta be real if it’s in a book!”

“Well, Back From the Dead is just a novel,” Tim said. “But the zombie myth itself is said to be the real thing in Haiti. I’m sure there’s more books on it. You know, true account stuff. Non-fiction.”

“Yeah,” Gordon said, standing up. Tim wasn’t even sure if Gordon was paying attention to his caveat about the non-fiction accounts. “Hey listen, thanks a lot, Tim. I’ll catch you at school Monday.”

“Sure.”

Gordon and his friends waved goodbye and headed toward the parking lot. Tim watched them go as he finished his burger and fries. George and Al finished their meal in silence.

“So when did Gordon suddenly become interested in reading books?” Al asked.

Tim shrugged. “Your guess is as good as mine.”

“I take it Gordon isn’t much of a man of academics, huh?” George asked.

“Nah, not really,” Tim said. He had no intention of giving George a hint of the torments Gordon had put him through back in middle-school. George and Al seemed to be tight enough that Al would probably clue him in a little at some point.

As the three boys gathered up their trash, deposited it in the waste basket, and made their way to George’s car, Tim couldn’t help but feel that the scales had tipped in his favor tonight. Gordon had not only behaved, he’d seemed to respect Tim for his knowledge, something he wouldn’t have done last year. Gordon’s friends for that matter–

Steve, Rebecca, and Susan–were the kind of kids who were followers; if Gordon had acted up, they would have been quick to follow. The fact that Gordon behaved differently around him tonight meant that he was sending the message to his clique that it was now okay to treat Tim like a fellow human being. Not that Tim was looking to hang out with that crowd anytime soon, but it would be nice to go through his last year of high school without suffering any of the indignities he’d had to endure the past five years. All of that had severely limited his social status throughout middle school and for most of his high school years.

Tonight was the start of a new beginning, though. He’d felt that since George asked him if he wanted to hang out tonight.

And the evening couldn’t have gone better.

As they reached George’s car, Al glanced at his watch. “What time you gotta be home?” he asked.

“Eleven.”

“It’s just after ten now.”

“Really? Damn!” He had no idea it was that late.

“Want to go to Spring Valley Park and hang out there?” Al asked.

Tim shrugged. “Sure.”

“Or we can hang out at your place,” George suggested. They were all standing around the car now, talking over the roof to each other. “Would that be cool?”

“Sure.”

“I like that idea better,” Al said.

And so it was settled. They all piled in George’s car and headed back to Tim’s house.

Chapter Four

“So you wanna turn him into a zombie?”

They were in Scott’s room, the bedroom window open to let in the cool late spring breeze. Gordon was sitting on the floor, his back against the wall as Scott reclined on his queen-sized bed and Steve sat at Scott’s desk. David was at a wrestling match. The three of them had just come back from a beating session in the shack. It had been Scott’s turn this time. He’d knocked the bum unconscious after four punches, but this time they waited until the sad sack of shit woke up before starting in on him again. Gordon and Steve had pulled the bum to his feet and Scott knocked him out again with a single punch to the face.

Scott had also cut his knuckles in the process. Now he sat on the bed, a bandage over his right forefinger and across the knuckles where the bum’s teeth had shredded the skin. Said teeth had gone flying like piano keys. They’d left him lying on the floor, still chained up.

“Well, yeah!” Gordon said. “I’m gonna get a copy of this book Monday from Count Gaines. It’s all about how to make zombies. He says you use a chemical made from some kind of frogs and pufferfish and–”

“Where the fuck are you going to get a pufferfish from?” Scott exclaimed.

“I don’t know. The internet?”

Steve came to Gordon’s defense. “Yeah, you can get anything on the internet.”

“Okay, so say you get this pufferfish and the other stuff you need,” Scott said from the bed. “Then what?”

“Well, I need the book to help me out,” Gordon said. “They do this stuff all the time in Haiti and there’s spells you’ve got to do with it.”

“Spells?” Scott looked skeptical.

“Yeah. Count says this stuff is like black magic. You know…devil stuff.”

“You believe that shit?” Scott asked.

Gordon was on a roll. “You believe in God, right? I mean, you’re President of the Spring Valley Christian Outreach Club.”

Scott nodded. “Okay, I see what you mean. But—”

“This is built on the same principle. If you pray to God, He answers. He’s not going to answer us if we pray to keep this guy alive.”

Steve laughed. “Yeah, we’re going to hell for sure on that.”

Scott shot Steve a dark look. “We’re not going to hell for getting rid of that bum!

How many times have I told you that all we’ve gotta do is confess our sins and our souls are cleansed? And that the kingdom of Heaven isn’t open to people with AIDS and drunkards?”

This much was true. A few nights ago, the three of them had been in Scott’s room when Steve suddenly got scared that they were not only going to get in trouble, but they would go to hell for what they’d done to the homeless guy. Scott knew his Bible pretty well. He’d been going to his parent’s Church–First Baptist of Christ on Main Street–since he was five years old. He’d led youth Bible studies and was very involved in the Christian Outreach program at Spring Valley High School, an off campus group that met once a week in the church’s basement. Scott was a charismatic leader. His knowledge of the Bible and his outgoing personality had the Christian student body and the church elders eating out of his hand. He’d told the guys that as long as they were sincerely sorry for their sins and confessed them to Jesus Christ, He would absolve them. Man might judge, but God forgave. Plus, God was strict when it came to who would enter the kingdom.

“Yeah, and I thought the Bible said those who worshipped demons wouldn’t get into Heaven, either,” Gordon said.

“We aren’t worshipping demons,” Scott said. “We’re just—”

“Using them,” Steve said, picking up on Scott’s train of thought.

“Yeah,” Scott said, nodding. “We’re using them.”

Gordon shrugged. No skin off his back. That’s the way he interpreted it, too. After all, didn’t the President of the United States use rogue governments that they considered terrorists or enemies of the country to do their bidding? And the President was usually a man of God himself; well, except for Obama. Or so his parents had told him.

“So what do you think?” Gordon asked. “I want to try it.”

Scott appeared to mull it over. He glanced at Steve. “What do you think?”

“It’ll be cool,” Gordon continued. “Think about what will happen if it works! The guy isn’t going to die and we can continue using him as a punching bag all summer.”

“What if somebody finds him?” Scott asked. “With him being a zombie all summer, somebody’s liable to find out.”

“Nobody’s found out yet, right?”

“He’s got a point,” Scott said. “Your parents are never in that guesthouse anyway.

They’re not gonna suspect a thing.”

“So he’ll be dead but not really dead,” Scott said. He was mulling this over, talking to himself in a way that suggested he was trying to convince himself of the idea.

“Yeah,” Gordon said, in seller’s mode now. No sense telling Scott that if the bum was dead he’d probably continue to rot. What he didn’t know wouldn’t hurt him. Besides, maybe they could shoot him in the head or something when he got that bad. Wasn’t that how you killed zombies? With a gunshot to the head? “In this book, it talks about this chemical you make from the pufferfish and these certain frogs and it makes it appear that you’re dead.”

Scott nodded. “I like it.” He turned to Gordon. “Let’s do it. You getting the book Monday?”

“Yeah,” Gordon said.

“How long do you think it’ll take before we can turn him into a zombie?”

Gordon shrugged. “I don’t know. I can ask Count to highlight those parts.”

Scott grinned. “I never thought Count Gaines would be good for anything but it looks like he’s going to be.”

The boys laughed at that. Who knew Count Gaines would be good for anything, indeed!

Chapter Five

Tim wasn’t surprised to see Gordon at lunch the following Monday. His former nemesis paid him a visit at his usual hangout spot–a stone bench nestled in a nice little alcove well away from the quad where most of the student body hung out at during lunch.

Due to extra-curricular activities, the kids he sometimes hung out with were scattered to the four winds: Chelsea was assisting her art teacher, Matt was in the computer lab, Al and George were over in Mr. Sharp’s Graphic Arts class preparing for fifth period; he’d had lunch with them only ten minutes ago in the cafeteria. It was during times like these that Tim buried himself in a book.

“Hey Tim,” Gordon said. Tim nodded at him. Not, hey Count, or hey freak. Being addressed by his first name meant some kind of progress was being made. “You finish that book?” Gordon’s expression was eager.

“Yep.” Tim pulled the battered paperback out of his backpack and handed it over to Gordon, who took it excitedly. “Leave the lights on at night when you read it,” he said with a grin.

“Oh yeah?” Gordon looked up from the back cover, which he’d begun to peruse.

“Yeah. Creepiest shit I’ve read in a long time.”

“So where’s the zombie stuff?”

“They make an appearance about a quarter of the way into the book, but the serious shit doesn’t happen until the last third.”

Gordon was ruffling through the pages, as if searching through a textbook. “No, I mean, where’s the formula? You know…the spells on how they make the zombies?”

“You’re still gonna read the whole thing, right?”

“Well, yeah!”

Tim took the book back and flipped through it, finding the pages in question.

Gordon sat down next to him on the bench. Around them kids mingled, eating lunch together in groups or by themselves. A group of girls were sitting on the grass of the quad talking and laughing. “I guess I can show you where it is since I already told you about how they make the zombies. It’s not like I’ve given you spoilers.”

“Spoilers?” Gordon looked confused.

Tim ignored the confused look on Gordon’s face. “Here we are. Page thirty-six through forty-three.” He showed Gordon the pages in question. “Most of the background on zombies is here.” He flipped through another thirty pages. “And here’s the part where the main villain performs the ritual.”

Gordon all but snatched the book from Tim’s hands. “Cool!” He started reading through the passage in question. “This is some serious shit.”

“Don’t mess up on your zombie-making on the first try,” Tim quipped. He reached for his water bottle for a swig.

Gordon looked at him. “What do you mean?”

Tim grinned. “You’ll see.”

“Nah, really, what do you mean?” Gordon was getting that look Tim knew only too well; that menacing look that hinted at upcoming verbal or physical abuse.

Tim quickly back-peddled, his old habits falling into place whenever he was bullied by Gordon and his crew. “Nothing, nothing! It’s just that in the book the main villain performs the ritual the wrong way and…well, shit happens. You’ll see what I mean when you get to it.”

Gordon was looking at him, seemingly satisfied by the answer. “Okay,” he said.

He rose to his feet. “I better get going. Thanks, Count!”

“Don’t mention it,” Tim said, feeling the little punch to his gut at the word Count and suddenly feeling embarrassed for letting himself be manipulated by Gordon that way.

Why did you go out of your way to loan him a book? To be his friend? To get on his good side? You know Gordon and his friends are never going to be on your good side and there’s no use being friendly with him or trying to accommodate them. They’ll just use you and spit in your face. Just like Gordon did just now by calling you Count.

Tim watched Gordon walk away, feeling a burning distaste in the pit of his belly.

Sometimes he wished he could lash out at those who tormented him like the villains did in the horror and SF novels he read. He wished that, for a brief time, magic really existed so he could turn them into frogs or slugs and then step on them, grinding them to paste beneath his feet. He wished he could humiliate them publicly in a way that it would never be traced back to him.

Tim sighed. No use getting bent around the axle now. What was done was done.

He couldn’t undo it. And if Gordon never returned his copy of Back From the Dead he could pick up a used copy somewhere. No big deal.

Tim reached into his backpack and pulled out another book, a Robert E. Howard title, and settled back to read. Best case scenario was Gordon really got something out of Back From the Dead, which, in Tim’s opinion, was a solid horror novel. It didn’t matter if he returned it, just that he understood its underlying message: that if you pushed somebody hard enough they would push back.

And sometimes they would bite.

Chapter Six

The following night, Gordon entered the woods five hundred yards off Briar Road near Zuck’s Farm and, with the help of a flashlight, wove his way between pine and birch trees until he found a spot he liked.

He set the burlap bag down on the ground and found an old log to sit on. Leaving the flashlight on, he dug inside the bag for the things he’d brought with him.

The first item was a paperback copy of Back From the Dead. He’d lost the copy Count Gaines loaned him at Mt. Joy Cemetery and had to make an emergency trip to Aaron’s Used Bookstore on Broad Street after school to find a replacement. He set the book down on the log and pulled out four silver saucers and four black candles. The book said the candles had to be made from sheep’s fat and he’d gone to a Pagan Book and Gift Shop in Lancaster ( might as well call themselves witches, Gordon had thought) to purchase these along with some other things, which he brought out: an ounce bag each of hemlock, belladonna, and witchgrass. He brought out the ceremonial dagger–seven inches of jagged steel–and a can of salt.

One of the bags contained an item he’d spent considerable time and energy last night obtaining, but he’d done it. Count Gaines never told him about this ingredient, and Gordon was of good mind to pound the little shit when he saw him at school next time.

Gordon pulled the item out now and turned it over gingerly in his hands, his heart pounding.

It was a plastic baggie containing powdered human bones.

When Gordon read the passage that contained the preparation for the ritual yesterday during Study Hall, he’d been concerned. The spell specifically stated that one of the ingredients needed was the powdered bones of a human corpse. For several minutes he’d stewed in anger, almost prepared to leave study hall in a hunt for Count Gaines so he could kick the shit out of him, but then he started thinking about his predicament. The cemetery near Reamstown Road at that old Mennonite church was old, and several of the graves were interred above ground in large stone cairns. Gordon and Susan had walked through it one day on their way home from the Reamstown fair and Gordon thought it might be easy to push the lid of one of those cairns over, revealing the coffin inside.

With that in mind, he’d placed a call to David Bruce and explained his predicament and outlined his plan. David was willing to help. So late last night Gordon had snuck out his bedroom window and started his car, which was parked at the curb in front of the house, and drove to David’s. David had been waiting for him and they’d driven to the graveyard in silence. Once there they made their way onto the grounds, selected the first cairn they came across and went to work. Using a crowbar and brute strength, they managed to move the lid of the cairn enough so that Gordon could get to the coffin within. A couple of heavy strikes with the crowbar splintered the wood, but that wasn’t enough. “Shit, we need to break the fucking lock on this thing,” Gordon had muttered.

“We gotta get the lid completely off then,” David said.

They’d wound up pushing the heavy lid of the cairn completely off, giving them open access to the coffin. Two strikes with the crowbar and the old lock snapped, gaining them access to the thing that lay within.

Gordon thought he’d be sick, but he wasn’t. The body had withered to bones long ago, and what remained of its burial shroud had turned to brittle rags. Gordon took the skull, the femurs, a fibula, and several rib bones, stuffing them in the burlap bag he’d brought along. Then they’d gotten the hell out of there.

Only as they scrambled to get back into the car, David heard a sound. “What’s that?” he’d said. He’d turned a panicked gaze toward 272, which was five hundred yards away.

Gordon had flung the burlap bag into the vehicle and was so nervous and itching to get the hell out of there that he barely noticed the book fall out of the car’s backseat and onto the parking lot. All he saw was the dim glow of headlights down the road.

“Shit,” he’d said. “Get in the car! C’mon!”

They’d gotten in the front seat and hunkered down. Gordon had peered through the window and watched as the headlights grew larger. The vehicle made a right turn and headed down another secondary road. Gordon sighed, feeling the tension ease. He started the engine, his eyes concentrating on the receding tail lights of the vehicle.

They’d been so rattled by the incident and in such a race to get the hell out of there that he didn’t realize the book had fallen out of his car. He didn’t realize this until the following morning when he went to school. He was lucky Aaron’s had a copy.

Otherwise, he probably would have had to drive into Lancaster to try to scare one up.

Gordon sighed, sifting the powdered bones in the bag. Today after school, shortly after he returned home from the bookstore, he’d taken a pair of rib bones, a piece of the skull and a femur, and ground them to dust with repeated strikes of the hammer. It had taken a good twenty minutes to smash the bones into fine powdery bits. He’d stashed the remaining bones in a box under his bed. His parents never set foot in his bedroom anyway.

While obtaining the bones had been the most difficult, the last item was the one that filled him with trepidation this evening.

This other item was in a box and still alive. He left it in there as he went about making the preparations.

He poured the salt in a circle, being careful the lines were heavy enough to be seen. Then he drew a pentagram with the salt, again being careful the lines were well discernable. When he was finished he stepped carefully outside the pentagram and placed the saucers around strategic points, pausing every so often to consult the book. He placed the candles in the saucers, lit them, then took the book and the herbs and ventured to the center of the pentagram. He consulted the book, flipping through the pages and squinting in the darkness at the text. Then, following the book as best he could, he reached into each baggie, pinched a piece of herb or powdered bone between thumb and forefinger, and threw it at the four corners of the pentagram. “As above, so below,” he said. “From the four points of the earth, through the elements of space and time, I beseech thee!

Awaken and open the gates! Listen, for I bring you sacrifice. With my left hand I bring it to you in sacrifice.”

He paused, checked his watch and frowned. The book said the spell had to be started precisely at midnight and it was two minutes before. Did it really make a difference? At least he was getting a head start. Besides, he had to get the box with the rabbit he’d brought along.

Stepping out of the pentagram briefly, Gordon plucked the cardboard box off the ground and stepped back into the circle. Using the blade of the ceremonial dagger, he cut the tape that bound the box shut and carefully opened the lid. He reached inside and grasped the rabbit by the scruff of the neck and, with one quick motion, lifted it and drew the blade of the dagger across its throat as it bleated once and kicked its legs frantically.

Blood sprayed out into the pentagram. Gordon continued the spell, reciting the words he’d memorized this afternoon. “I bring you sacrifice with my left hand. I bring you fresh blood as sacrifice. Oh Damballah! Oh Erzuile! Hear my prayer! Oh Azathoth, the blind piper of a thousand names! Oh Hanbi, Father of He Who is Our Dark Demon Father Pazuzu, I call on you to grant me this dark boon! I give you the blood of the living, which I have spilt on this hallowed ground so that the powers you bestow will make one who’s dead alive again!”

The rabbit continued to kick until it suddenly slowed, then stopped. Gordon’s right hand and wrist were drenched with the rabbit’s blood. When the rabbit was dead, Gordon set the animal down in the pentagram. He dipped the forefinger of his left hand in the wound, grimacing as he did so, then stood and flicked the blood from his fingers at the black candles, sprinkling blood on the dancing flames. “Azathoth, Hanbi, Baal, Pazuzu, Damballah! Erzuile! Abaddon!” He repeated these names as he sprinkled the blood, watching as the flames flickered as the blood spilled on them. Actually, according to the book, you were supposed to say something else but it was in some other language and Gordon couldn’t very well hold the book and do all this at the same time. When he was finished, he picked up the book and flipped through to the page in question. He tried pronouncing the words as best as he could. “Aya absath ngya, wahlee obsoth, ngya, yian…wow!” What the hell did that mean, anyway? “Azathoth! Mgwai! Damballah!

Damballah!”

The flames of the candles rose and flickered. The wind picked up slightly, blowing leaves. Gordon shivered.

The crickets, which had been chirping and seemed almost like background music to Gordon, continued but there was a funny sound in their cadence. It was almost as if the rhythm of their chirping had been knocked off track just slightly and then resumed again.

It was slight, and Gordon thought he was imagining it when it happened. He stopped the ritual, the hair on the back of his neck standing on end.

The chirping of the crickets continued. Gordon listened, his blood running cold.

Something about them sounds different now, it’s almost like they’re in a different key, a different cadence or something and I know I heard that, I know I heard them getting knocked off their rhythm, this is so fucking weird–

Overhead, in a tree, an owl hooted.

Gordon started, heart racing, his skin breaking out in gooseflesh. This was just getting too damn creepy.

Gordon hurriedly finished the ritual, repeating the words and phrases from the book as best he could. He threw another sprinkling of the herbs and bone over the five corners of the pentagram, closing the ritual, and by the time he was finished he was feeling like a fool for letting it all get to him. And besides…what the hell was he doing?

Did he really believe in the shit Count Gaines believed in? Did he really think this ritual was going to make the ground cursed? That if he buried something dead here the curse would bring it back to life?

Now that the ritual was over it was time to find out.

Gordon knelt down and dug a hole with his hands, cursing himself for not bringing a small shovel along. He dug into the moist soil, heaving clumps of dirt in a pile on his left side, and when he’d gone down a foot or so he picked up the dead rabbit and placed him inside. He shoved the dirt back over it with his hands, tamping it down flat.

Then he stood up, blew out the candles, tossed everything in the burlap bag, then kicked at the salt-drawn pentagram, scattering it. As he worked he listened to the crickets, pretty sure now that he’d let his imagination get the best of him. The rhythm of their chirping was normal; it hadn’t changed at all. He’d just imagined the whole episode.

When he was finished he hurried through the woods to his car, forcing himself to take it slow and not trip over any vines or bushes.

Once in his car he threw the burlap bag on the front passenger seat, started the car, and drove away.

* * *

Naomi Gaines watched her son as they ate supper, wondering what was going on in his world.

The past few days had seen a remarkable change in Tim’s demeanor. No longer sulking, no longer shy and reserved, Tim seemed happy and talkative now. Ever since that day five years ago when Scott Bradfield and those other boys had done that horrible thing to him, Tim had been through hell. It didn’t help that so many people in the community, with the exception of school administrators and the local police, weren’t very supportive.

Naomi had warned Jeff early on that if they moved back to her hometown they had to be prepared for the narrow-minded attitudes of the local population. Jeff hadn’t taken her seriously enough, though. His eyes were opened not just by what happened to their son, but when Tim was in seventh and eighth grade at Spring Valley Middle School.

“How’re things going, son?” Naomi asked casually.

“Great,” Tim said. He’d already wolfed down his steak. Jeff was wiping his mouth with a napkin, listening as Tim related how his day went. “George and I hung out here after school.”

“He seems like a neat guy,” Naomi said. She and Jeff had met George and Al when they came by the other Saturday to pick Tim up to go to the movies. While cautiously optimistic, they’d come away feeling good about meeting both boys. What little she knew about George, she figured he was too new to the area to be exposed to Tim’s history and the tainted reputation he had with the student body of Spring Valley High. Still, Tim wasn’t a total outcast at school. There was that computer whiz he hung out with and that girl, some art student. Chelsea. They were kids like Tim; kids who had been cast out of all the social cliques, who were forced to band together lest they be picked on and harassed by the social elite of the student body.

“Yeah, George is cool,” Tim continued. “He and Al are into the same books and movies as I am. It’s really neat to finally meet guys who aren’t like, all wigged out over science fiction and horror movies, you know?”

Naomi smiled. “I know, honey. Trust me, I kinda went through something similar when I was your age.”

“Yeah, you told me.” Tim was looking at her and Jeff. “And Matt and Chelsea are cool too. I like them, but they aren’t into the same kind of books and movies as I am nearly as much as George and Al.” He turned to Jeff. “So, Dad, how different was it to go to a big city school?”

Jeff shrugged. He’d grown up in Baltimore and living in Spring Valley was his first experience living in the country, in a small town. “Hard to say,” he said. “It’s been over twenty years since I’ve been in high school and we had our share of cliques back then, too.” He traded a glance with Naomi. “But even I can tell things are different here. I work right off Main Street, you know, and most of the people I work with live in town.

I’m kinda like you in a way, Tim, only in a corporate environment. The people I work with all share the same background and interests and I…well, I don’t. You’ve probably heard me tell you and your mom that I’m the only person at my office that reads during their lunch break, right?”

Tim nodded, chuckling. Naomi couldn’t help but shake her head. Jeff had mentioned this before. While Jeff wasn’t an unabashed horror fan like their son, he read the occasional Stephen King, sometimes Peter Straub. One day Jeff had tried a Richard Laymon novel at Tim’s urging. Jeff had liked it, but commented on the remarks his coworkers had for his choice of reading material. Only a sick mind would find this kind of stuff entertaining, one woman told him that day after getting a glimpse of the cover of the book while in the company break room. Jeff had commented on the incident that evening over dinner. Screw ‘em if they don’t like it, he’d said.

“I think it’s no secret that my closest friends, aside from you and your mom, are the ones I made in high school and college. I have a feeling George and Al are going to be very good friends for you, Tim. You share the same interests and, from the way it sounds, they respect you. I’m certain they’ve had to have heard some of the nasty rumors about you from other kids.”

Tim rolled his eyes. “Well, Al said that Jennifer Walbert told him not to hang around with me because I sold my soul to the devil and belonged to a coven.”

At the mention of this, Naomi retorted in anger. “That little bitch has been a thorn in your side since seventh grade. When the hell is she going to grow up?”

Tim grinned. “Al told her he thought that was cool. He said he couldn’t wait to join the coven, and she looked at him like he was a freak and walked away. I don’t think that was the reaction she was expecting.”

Jeff chewed his food. “Well, that tells me Al doesn’t give a damn what the other kids say about you, and that’s good.”

“Yeah, when Al told me about it, he was laughing,” Tim said, relating the incident in surprisingly good humor. In days past he would have either been dismissive or depressed about it. “He was like, ‘damn, she’s got to be the dumbest chick I’ve ever met.’”

“Unfortunately, she’s probably going to grow up to assume some position of influence or authority,” Naomi said. She was finished with her meal and leaned back from the table. “And she’s going to torment some other hapless soul.”

“It really is so like The Stepford Wives living here,” Tim said.

“You can say that again,” Jeff muttered.

Naomi couldn’t help but feel a pang of regret when she talked with Tim about his problems or saw his reactions to the vicious teasing he received. She’d hoped the good of living in a small town would outweigh the negative; that hadn’t happened for Tim. She remembered hating Spring Valley High. She liked the town–the architecture, its history, the peaceful setting of the surrounding countryside. But the people? They were all narrow-minded, self-righteous religious zealots. Okay, maybe not all of them, but more than she could count. When Naomi was in high school she’d gone through her own identity crisis stage. Her parents had been strict on appearance, stressing that how you presented yourself through dress, grooming, hair and makeup, formed an impression on other people. Things like your personality, whether you were a pleasant person, easy going, friendly, or kind, did not matter.

So when Naomi had fallen for a boy named Chuck Gabriel, a sullen olive-skinned boy who wore his straight black hair below his shoulders, her parents had disapproved of the relationship vehemently. They’d been trying–hell, pushing her–to date Greg Argall, a boy who lived down the street who’d grown into a Ken-doll caricature of perfect hair, perfect teeth, six-pack abs, and a predictable future of an MBA position at some faceless corporation. If Greg hadn’t been a belligerent asshole, she might have been mildly attracted to him. The fact that she could engage in more stimulating conversation with a pile of mulch was another souring point for Naomi. Chuck, on the other hand, was kind, considerate, polite, and genuinely cared for her and she could talk to him for hours about everything. He wasn’t cruel, did not possess a sense of humor from the gutter like Greg, and he was smart—a straight A student. Despite her pointing this out to her parents, they still didn’t approve of him. Her relationship with Chuck was the first time Naomi ever lied to her parents, and the sneaking around to see him eventually took its toll on the relationship.

Naomi offered Tim a smile. “The difference between you and me is that my parents didn’t take the time to understand me, nor understand what it was like to be a teenager when I became of age. They saw it from their own perspective, which was the nineteen fifties. They didn’t relate to the early eighties trends or fashions at all. Your father and I…I’d like to think we’re trying a lot harder than my parents ever did.”

Tim grinned. “You guys are the best. I mean…I hear some of the kids in my class talk about their parents and they think Linkin Park is a place!”

They all laughed at this.

Jeff was finished with his meal. He stood up and began clearing the table. “Son, your mother and I are happy with the way things are going for you lately. We really are.

George and Al seem like great guys, and I think some of the kids that used to be so much trouble for you are eventually going to come around and grow up. If they haven’t by now, they probably will by the time you graduate.”

Tim got up to help his father. “Actually that might have already started to happen.

Gordon Smith actually asked if he could borrow a book from me!”

Naomi raised an eyebrow at this. While Gordon wasn’t one of the kids who’d set upon Tim that dark day, he’d participated in too many incidents of harassment against her son that she felt instantly wary and suspicious. “Why did he want to borrow a book from you?”

Tim shrugged. “Beats me. But he seemed really interested in it.” Tim told them about his initial contact with Gordon last week, and the conversations and encounters that led to Gordon’s growing interest in Back From the Dead. “Maybe he’s finally seeing reading as something that can be fun. You know?”

Naomi nodded. Tim inherited his love of books from her and Jeff, and had developed his unique tastes on his own. She surely hadn’t been into horror fiction as a child the way her son was, although it was a genre she dipped into from time to time and enjoyed occasionally. But if it got kids into reading that was half the battle. She’d been pleased when Tim went from Goosebumps to Stephen King and finally to Faulkner, Dickens, and Capote on his own, at no urging from his high school curriculum. “Maybe you’re right,” she said.

And as the three of them bustled about the kitchen clearing the table, rinsing the dishes, placing them in the dishwasher and doing the evening chores, Naomi felt the first ray of hope that perhaps Jeff was right. Their son was going to turn seventeen this summer. He was on the road to adulthood–manhood. He was a mature kid for his age, and she had no doubt that he had a bright future ahead of him. She truly hoped that Al and George were opening new doors for him, that things would improve on a social level for her son in the coming months as he gradually ascended to his senior year.

Chapter Seven

Scott Bradfield and David Bruce accompanied Gordon Smith into the woods to see if there was evidence that the rabbit had come back from the dead.

David giggled. He and Scott had gotten stoned before Gordon showed up at the Bradfield house and they were getting on his nerves. “A zombie bunny!” David said.

“Shut up!” Gordon said.

“I wonder if it’ll try to eat us?” Scott asked, half seriously.

David and Scott burst into laughter.

Gordon stopped and turned around. His friends had stopped in their tracks and were doubled over with laughter. The days were getting longer, and at a few minutes past eight pm there was still sufficient sunlight to see by. They had another ten yards to go.

“I’m going to go check. If you assholes want to come, let’s go.” He turned and started heading toward the clearing, not caring if they followed.

Despite it not being fully dark yet, the woods had a sinister quality to them, more so than last night. As Gordon picked his way past poison ivy and fallen pine branches, he heard the crickets going at it again. They sounded normal to him now. What was I thinking last night? he thought as he reached the clearing.

He stood at the edge of the clearing, not too surprised at the sight but his heart sinking nonetheless.

The hole he’d dug and buried the rabbit in, that he’d filled up and tamped down, was undisturbed.

Gordon hoisted the small bladed shovel he’d brought along. This wasn’t going to be pretty, but he might as well get it over with. He took a step toward the area where he’d buried the rabbit, plunged the blade in the soil and started digging.

Scott and David showed up a moment later. Gordon didn’t notice the look on their faces, but he could tell from their tones of voice that they were disappointed. “Hey, there’s nothing here.”

“I know,” Gordon said. He was almost a foot down now.

“So it didn’t work?” Scott asked. Both of them sounded serious now.

“Not sure,” Gordon said, because he didn’t really know how to answer that one.

Because despite not seeing the tell-tale signs of the rabbit having clawed its way up out of the soil, something didn’t feel right.

Something felt… wrong.

Scott and David stood on either side of him as the shovel hit something more solid. Grunting with the exertion, Gordon carefully levered the shovel under the bulk and lifted it. As he lifted the mass of soil and dead flesh, David gasped. “Aww, man, that thing’s deader than shit!”

Gordon dumped the dead rabbit on the ground, not even feeling sick at the sight of the worms doing their number on the animal. Already there were maggots writhing about the body–how the hell did flies burrow underground to lay their eggs anyway?

Underneath the earthy smell of wet soil was the scent of rotting flesh.

“Well shit, I was actually looking forward to this,” Scott said.

“Yeah, me too.” David.

“Dammit,” Gordon said.

“So why do you think it didn’t work?” Scott asked.

“I don’t know,” Gordon replied. “I did everything right. Followed everything in the book to the letter.”

“Maybe it’s because animals don’t have souls,” David surmised. “I mean…the demon can’t take their soul and use their body as a vessel. Know what I mean?”

Gordon nodded. It made perfect sense. But still…

There was that feeling. Something was there. In the woods.

Do they feel anything? Gordon thought. Or am I just imagining things?

“Well, might as well bury it and get going,” David suggested. “We can try again.”

“Yeah,” Gordon said, anything to agree with them and get the hell out of here. He shoved the animal back into the hole and started piling the dirt back over it. When the hole was filled up completely, he stomped the soil down.

“What kind of animal are we going to try it with next time?” David asked Gordon.

“You mean we’re going to try this again?” Scott asked. He looked doubtful. “The shit obviously didn’t work.”

“I don’t think we’re going to try it again,” Gordon said. He started heading out of the clearing. He didn’t tell them that he agreed with what they were saying, that they were right. That might be the impression they got out of his response but it wasn’t his intention.

Something did work.

He could feel it.

Scott and David followed along behind him. They talked and Gordon answered, but he wasn’t really paying attention to what they were saying. “We can still bury him out here when he’s dead,” Scott said. “Nobody’ll find him.”

“Yeah,” David answered. “Too bad we’re not going to know if he’ll come back from the dead.” To Gordon: “Hey, Gordon, whaddaya think? Think this’ll still work?”

“I don’t know,” Gordon said, his heart racing. He felt his skin bristle; gooseflesh.

He didn’t want to give them his honest opinion.

That he felt whatever it was he’d done out there last night had worked.

Chapter Eight

Tim Gaines had just finished his homework–his last big assignment before the semester ended–when there was a knock on the front door.

His mother was in the kitchen stacking the dishwasher, and his father was in the living room watching the news. Dad looked out the window and frowned. “It’s the police,” he said.

“What?” Tim got up from his chair and walked over to the living room window.

Sure enough, a black and white squad car was parked in front of the townhouse.

Dad was already up and crossing the room to the front door. When he answered the door, Officer Frank Clapton stood on the stoop, a grim expression on his face. Officer Clapton had been one of the investigating officers in the Scott Bradfield and David Bruce assault case five years ago. In the intervening years he’d been a strong ally to the Gaines family, providing Tim with the occasional escort home, or stopping by to see how he was doing. When Jennifer Walbert spread the rumor that he was killing neighborhood cats for satanic sacrifices, Office Clapton had been the investigating officer. He’d even apologized to Tim’s parents that night for the trouble.

“Officer Clapton,” Dad said, opening the screen door. “What seems to be the problem?”

Naomi came in from the kitchen and Tim’s heart clenched in his chest when he saw the look on Officer Clapton’s face. “Evening Mr. and Mrs. Gaines. Sorry to bother you, but I’m afraid I have to talk to your son.” His eyes focused on Tim. For the first time they looked accusing.

“What’s going on?” Tim said. What did they say about me this time? Who said it?

I thought they were finished with this shit! I thought it was finally over! Unbidden, Tim felt his eyes begin to tear up.

Officer Clapton extracted a slim notebook from his breast pocket. He flipped through to a fresh page, pen in hand. “Mind telling me where you were two nights ago, Tim?”

“He was right here!” Naomi said, her voice and features showing frustration and a hint of anger. “Where else do you think he’d be on a school night?”

“Please, Mrs. Gaines,” Officer Clapton said. Tim could tell by the tone of his voice that he didn’t want to question him. He turned back to Tim. “Specifically between the hours of ten-thirty P.M. and five A.M. yesterday morning.”

“He was asleep!” Naomi stated, the irritation clear in her voice now.

“I was asleep,” Tim said at the same time.

“Are you sure?” Officer Clapton asked.

“Will you mind telling us what this is about, Officer?” His father asked.

Officer Clapton ignored the question. He looked at Tim’s parents. “Can you two place Tim in his bedroom at those times?”

“Yes!” Naomi stated vehemently.

“Absolutely,” Dad said, his voice and stance firm.

Office Clapton regarded them calmly. “Two nights ago Reamstown Cemetery was vandalized. Somebody broke into one of the graves and stole…certain body parts.

Reamstown police recovered evidence and called us. I wouldn’t be here if that evidence didn’t lead straight to you, Tim.”

Tim felt the blood run from his face. “Wh…what evidence?”

“Do you own a book called Back From the Dead?”

At the mention of the book, Tim felt like he was going to faint. He could tell that the cop knew Tim owned the book; he could probably see it in his face.

“Um…well…yeah, I do, but—”

“Reamstown police found it at the scene,” Officer Clapton continued. “It had your name and address written on the inside cover. Are you sure you were home between the hours of—”

“I said he was here!” Naomi Gaines was suddenly in front of her husband and son, hands on her hips, a ragged dishtowel in her hand. She faced Officer Clapton, her features pure anger. “I don’t care what you found, Tim would never be involved in something so…so…”

“Believe me, I know how this looks,” Officer Clapton said. “I know the hassle you people have gone through with every religious freak in town accusing you of everything from killing animals for the devil to vandalizing school property with satanic symbols. I know you’ve had to endure years of rumors and harassment and I’m sorry for it. But…I have to ask this stuff. We have the book. It has your name and address on it, a crime was committed…parts of a human body were stolen!”

“I loaned that book out!” Tim said suddenly and then it all came out in a rush, like a confession. “I loaned that book to Gordon Smith. He asked if he could borrow it and I gave it to him Monday afternoon.”

Officer Clapton was writing in his notebook. “Gordon Smith?”

“Dammit, I knew it!” Naomi said. She turned away from the door in anger.

Tim felt suddenly like he was to blame. If he hadn’t been receptive to Gordon’s seemingly friendly overtures maybe this wouldn’t have happened.

“Care to tell me about the circumstances that led to you loaning this book to him?” Officer Clapton asked.

Taking a deep breath Tim told him, starting with the day Gordon inquired about the book and culminating in Monday when Tim finally turned it over to him. “He seemed to be…I don’t know,” Tim said, feeling embarrassed. “Interested in it. I thought…I thought we’d put aside our differences and…”

Officer Clapton offered them a small smile. “I know what you mean, Tim. You were trying to meet Gordon halfway. No problem with that.” He looked at Naomi and Jeff. His features seemed gentler now, more at ease. “I think we can get to the bottom of this,” he said.

“You damn well better,” Naomi said. She was in Officer Clapton’s face again, pointing her index finger at him. “I’ve had about enough of these goddamn self-righteous little shits spreading falsehoods about my son! Do you understand me!”

“I understand perfectly, Mrs. Gaines.”

“I hope you do.” Naomi was so upset she looked like she was going to cry.

“I’m…I’m sorry for blowing up at you like this, Officer Clapton, it’s just that—”

“Listen,” Officer Clapton said. He took a step inside the house. Jeff and Naomi stepped back to allow him entry and Tim found himself huddling near them to listen. “I understand your frustration. Believe me, I do. If it was my kid I’d be furious. I hope you can see my position, though. I can’t play favorites. I have to play by the rules. I know you, and I know you’re good people. Tim’s a good kid.” He nodded at Tim and smiled and Tim instantly felt better. Gone was the cautious semi-accusing tone and stance. “And I know you’ve had problems with certain kids at the school, specifically Scott Bradfield, David Bruce, and Steve Downing.”

“And that Smith brat,” Naomi muttered.

“Have you had problems with Gordon before?” Officer Clapton asked Tim.

Tim sighed. “Back in, like, ninth and tenth grade. He’s friends with Scott Bradfield, David Bruce, and Steve Downing.”

Officer Clapton nodded. “I see. They run around together, right?”

“Yeah, pretty much.”

“Well, they don’t have criminal records,” Officer Clapton said. “They’ve been clean since the day they beat you up after school. I will follow up with Gordon Smith, though.”

“Do you think there’s a possibility Gordon was cozying up with Tim to perhaps frame him for something?” Jeff asked.

“It’s possible,” Officer Clapton said. He took a step back so that he was on the front stoop again. “Best thing I can do is bring Gordon in for questioning.” He nodded at them. “Thank you Jeff, Naomi. Tim.” He held his gaze with Tim a bit longer than normal, as if silently communicating that he was on his side, then stepped off the porch and headed back to his squad car.

Naomi closed the front door. Tim felt relieved that the focus of attention was now finally on one of his tormentors rather than him.

“You have one more week of school, Tim,” Naomi said. “I suggest you avoid Gordon Smith as much as possible. Do you understand me?”

“Loud and clear,” Tim said. Mom was right. There was no question about it.

Trying to be friendly with Gordon, trying to be civil with him and meet him halfway, had blown up in his face.

Chapter Nine

All four boys were standing around the bum, peering down at him when Rebecca Watkins showed up.

“Okay, what happened?” she asked. She shouldered her way into the circle of guys and gasped when she saw the bum’s condition. “Oh my God, what have you guys been beating him with?”

It was the following afternoon and they’d set on the bum shortly after arriving at Scott’s house directly from school. They’d headed straight to the guest house, flipped a quarter, then started the game. Steve first, then Scott.

“What the hell do you think?” Steve said. There was blood spattered on his face and chest. He was rubbing his swollen, bruised knuckles. “No weapons, just our fists and feet. That’s the rules.”

Gordon and Steve had headed to Scott’s house straight from school and gotten into the game the minute they entered the guest house. Two minutes later, Scott placed a panicked phone call to Rebecca, telling her to get the hell over to the house now. He wouldn’t have called her if he didn’t trust her; she’d known about the past wilding incidents in Philly and Harrisburg and he’d told her about their abduction of the homeless man a few days ago. Her only concern was that she didn’t want him to get caught.

Rebecca knelt on the floor near the bum’s cracked and bleeding head. The man was in worse shape than ever. Not only was his face a swollen, bleeding mass, his right eye was ruptured and there appeared to be a crack in his forehead. Scott could see the white of shattered bone and the thick jelly-like substance of brain matter filling the cavity of the wound. “Well, if you guys wanted to keep him alive all week, I think you’re going to be out of luck.”

“What do you mean?” Scott barked.

“He’s fucking dying, you nitwit!” Rebecca stood up.

“What the hell do you mean he’s dying!” Scott grabbed Rebecca by the arms and was about to shove her against the wall when Gordon and Steve intervened. Gordon grabbed Scott and held him back.

“Get your fucking hands off me!” Rebecca shouted.

“Come on, man,” Gordon said, holding Scott back. After some shuffling around, in which Gordon and Steve kept Scott and Rebecca separated, Gordon and David continued talking Scott down from his anger. “She knows what she’s talking about, man, she’s done all the First Aid courses at the Rec Center and shit. Come on, chill out.”

Scott let go of Rebecca. They glared at each other. “Sorry,” Scott muttered.

“Fuck!” Rebecca rubbed her upper arms where Scott had grabbed her.

Steve motioned to the bum lying on the floor. The bum was unconscious but breathing. His breath came in slow, bubbling rasps. “You said he’s dying. There’s no way to save him?”

“Not without taking him to a hospital, and they’re probably not going to be able to save him either,” Rebecca said. She looked at the dying bum. “His head is bashed up.

You sure you didn’t hit him with a rock or something?”

“No,” Scott said. No use in telling Rebecca that the guy had been slammed in the face repeatedly by fists and feet for the past few days. She knew that. “I didn’t realize that if you hit somebody repeatedly and hard enough, you’ll eventually break their skull.”

“Well no shit! Welcome to Human Anatomy 101!”

There was awkward silence for a moment as Rebecca crouched down and visually examined the bum again. She picked up his left wrist and took his pulse.

“Well?” Scott asked.

“Pulse is weak. His breathing is shallow. See how he’s breathing? Hear that bubbly sound?”

The boys nodded. Rebecca continued. “The bones in his face are so broken they’re creating a problem for his nasal cavities. He’s probably bleeding down into his esophagus. Also, see that purple stuff there in that cut? Looks like jelly?”

Steve answered; he sounded hesitant. “Is that his brains?”

“That’s singular. And yes, it’s his brain. It’s swelling. It’ll probably fill the wound and then he’ll be dead in an hour, maybe less.”

“Damn.” Scott turned away from the group, clearly mad at this latest turn of events.

Rebecca stood up. “You asked me on the phone if I could help him. I can’t. He’s dying. You should finish him off as soon as possible.”

Gordon traded a glance with Scott. “We could do it now.”

“One more blow to the head should do it,” Rebecca said.

Scott exchanged a look with Gordon, then all three boys looked at her. The grim realization of what had to be done seemed to be evident in their faces. “Okay,” Scott said.

He moved forward to escort Rebecca toward the door. “Thanks. And listen,” he said as he ushered her outside. “I’m sorry for blowing up at you like that.”

They were standing outside the guest house now. Rebecca lowered her guard slightly. “Okay, but don’t wig out on me like that again.”

“I won’t. Scout’s honor.” Scott began to walk Rebecca down the stone path that carved its way through his immense back yard to the back deck of the house. “And listen, I appreciate you coming out here so quick. We just…I guess we never thought it would…”

“End so quickly?” She stopped and looked at him. There was something in her face that was so damned sexy to Scott. He kissed her once then hung back, waiting for a reaction. Her mouth turned up in a slight smile. “Bastard.”

Scott grinned.

Rebecca’s features became serious again. “Seriously, Scott. You still going to do what you talked about? You’re gonna bury him in the woods, right?”

“We’ve got that all figured out, just like we talked about it.” He’d told Rebecca about burying the bum in Zuck’s Woods. He didn’t tell her about their plans to try resurrecting him via black magic and bringing him back to the guesthouse so they could beat on him some more. She’d really think they were seriously deranged.

“Yeah?”

“Oh yeah.” Scott put his arm around Rebecca’s shoulders and led her to the back deck. “Trust me, we got it all figured out.”

“Okay, just remember,” she said as they mounted the steps of the porch. “I have no knowledge of what you guys are doing here.”

“Of course not. You and I were in my car cruising around in York County the night that bum disappeared.”

“Exactly.”

“And Gord and Steve were at the Reading outlets.”

“Damn right they were.”

They looked at each other again and then Rebecca turned to look at the guest house. She looked grim. “Seriously though, Scott…if that guy wasn’t such a…you know—”

“A worthless no nothing homeless nigger?”

Rebecca gasped, then looked at him in irritation. Scott grinned.

“I can’t believe you said that!” Rebecca said.

“Okay, I’m sorry.” Scott put his arm around her and ushered her gently across the deck and into the kitchen. He closed the sliding glass doors behind them.

* * *

When Scott stepped outside fifteen minutes later, Steve, David, and Gordon were on the deck sitting in the lawn chairs. They looked over at Scott as he came outside.

“Well?” Gordon asked.

“Rebecca’s still cool,” Scott said. He sat down at the bar his parents had erected on the deck. “She thinks he might live another day at the most, probably not much longer than that. He’ll most likely die tonight, though.”

“So we’re still going to do it?” Gordon asked.

“Yeah,” Scott said. “I must be crazy for going along with this, but…” He shook his head. “What can it hurt?”

Last night and today at lunch, they’d talked about the burial site. Steve was convinced Gordon’s spell hadn’t worked on the rabbit because animals had no souls.

Gordon asked him to explain that and Scott did the honors. “God made man in His image and breathed life into him, giving him a soul,” he’d explained. “The Bible doesn’t say anything about God giving animals souls. That’s why it didn’t work.”

It made sense. By the end of lunch they’d convinced Gordon that it was at least worth a try to bury the bum at the spot. Steve asked how long they would have to wait.

Gordon answered, relying on his dim memory of his scant read of that passage in the book Count Gaines had given him. “It should happen overnight,” he said. “If we bury him at nightfall he should come back the following morning.”

“So we’ll have to camp out there at night,” Steve suggested.

“Or get there real early in the morning,” Scott ventured.

Now Gordon got to his feet. A nervous twinge of dread coursed through him.

Might as well get this over with. “I say we do it. We can have him in the ground and be back here by midnight.”

The boys eyed each other warily. Scott nodded. He turned to Gordon. “Okay,” he said. “Let’s do it.”

The boys stood up and then slowly headed to the guest house. Before they stepped inside, however, each boy headed to the utility shed that sat catty-corner from the guest house. Scott unlocked the padlock with a key on his key ring. The boys reached inside and each of them grabbed a different gardening tool–shovel, spade, hoe, pick. Then, as if they had a singular purpose, they headed toward the guest house and stepped inside.

Chapter Ten

Burying the bum was no problem.

They waited until nightfall to do it. With the homeless man’s very battered body wrapped in plastic garbage bags and stowed in the back of David’s SUV, they drove to the spot well after ten-thirty P.M. Once they were fifty feet down the trail, David popped the headlights back on again; he’d turned them off shortly before he made the turn to head down the rutted dirt road. They were deep enough in the woods now that they wouldn’t be seen. Besides, the other night it had been so dark you couldn’t see your hand in front of your face when you were this far in the woods.

All four of them were silent as David piloted the vehicle through the narrow, twisting road until they reached the small clearing where they’d parked the other evening.

Then, like they’d rehearsed this scene a million times, they got out of the vehicle and stepped into motion.

They hauled the plastic-wrapped corpse out of the rear of the SUV and, with David leading the way with a small flashlight, and Steve carrying a pair of shovels, the four threaded their way through brambles and weeds and trees to the clearing. To the sacred spot.

“Here we are,” Gordon said as they stopped in the clearing. Steve handed Gordon a shovel and the boys got to work. Within ten minutes they had a two foot hole dug in the ground, about six feet long and three across. Plenty of room to lay the body in, but not too deep. The guy still had to claw his way out, right?

When they were finished they rolled him into the grave, shoveled the dirt back over him, stomped it down. Then they gathered around and Gordon pulled out the book.

Using the illumination of the flashlight provided by Steve, he concluded the ritual by making a hand motion in the air–the sign of the pentagram and the inverted cross.

“Abbadon, Damballah, Pazuzu, Azathoth, Hanbi! I beseech thee! Bring what lies dead in this hallowed ground alive!”

Gordon rushed through the ritual, not really caring that he was fumbling it, just wanting to get the hell out of there. It was a still night, and a slight breeze rustled the leaves of the trees. When he was finished, Gordon turned to the group. “It’s done. Let’s go.”

He led them through the darkness to the SUV. When they piled in, Gordon tried not to let his nervousness show. Scott could tell, however. “Fuckin’ pussy,” Scott said, playfully punching his shoulder.

“Let’s just get out of here,” Gordon said. They don’t feel it, he thought. They honestly don’t feel it!

What Gordon felt was that same sense of eerie… presence was the only word he could think of. He’d felt a presence in that clearing, as if something had come alive. It was something unseen and silent. He’d felt it the night he’d come out here a few nights ago to consecrate the ground when those crickets had been jolted out of their rhythm. And he’d felt it again yesterday when David and Scott came with him.

And he felt it now.

David started the vehicle. He was snickering, too. “Count Gaines got you scared of this shit now, huh Gordon?”

“Let’s just go!”

David backed the vehicle around in a clumsy three point turn and piloted it down the dirt path. A moment later they were creeping out onto the secondary road. When there was no signs of cars, David popped the headlights and eased onto the road.

Five minutes later they were speeding east down Newport Road.

“Me and Scott will head out here first thing in the morning,” David said, his features smug. Confident. “We got weight lifting first thing in the morning, so we’ll get here at six. Sound good to you, Scott?”

“Fine with me, man,” Scott said.

“And if he’s clawing his way out, we’ll nab him and get him back to the guest house,” David said.

“What if he’s hostile?” Steve asked. “You know…like in Dawn of the Dead?

What if he tries to eat you?”

“Then I’ll shoot him in the head with my .38,” David said. “I’ll have it with me.”

He looked at Gordon and Steve in the rearview mirror. “We’ll be fine. This is going to work out. And if it doesn’t…I mean, if the guy doesn’t come back from the dead, no skin off our butts. We’ll just bury him deeper so the animals don’t get him. Right?”

“Yeah,” Steve said.

Gordon nodded. Despite the calm assurances of his friends, he had a hard time believing everything was going to turn out okay.

Chapter Eleven

Early morning. Six-fifteen A.M.

Scott Bradfield and David Bruce made their way through the thick woods to the spot where they’d buried the bum last night. Scott had picked David up at a quarter till six and they’d made the twenty minute ride in silence, each lost in their own thoughts. Scott was pretty sure that when they arrived at the clearing they were going to find it in the state they’d left it in and they came prepared: both boys were carrying shovels and a burlap bag with a change of clothes for school. The burlap bag also contained two coils of rope in case they struck pay dirt and had to tie the dead bum up.

But if the spell didn’t work? “We’ll bury him deeper when we get there,” Scott had said during the few words they exchanged in conversation. “It shouldn’t take long.”

As they rounded the corner of the bend that took them to the clearing, David was a few feet ahead of him. Scott almost bumped into him as David stopped suddenly and said, “Holy shit!”

Scott reached the clearing and felt his stomach plunge into his bowels.

The grave was dug up. Torn pieces of plastic from the garbage bags they’d wrapped the bum in lay discarded in the shallow grave.

The bum was nowhere in sight.

Scott and David ran to the edge of the hole. They looked around, their faces panic-stricken. “What the fuck?” David began.

“It’s an animal,” Scott said, already trying to rationalize it. “It’s gotta be an animal that got him.”

“Then where the hell is he?” David asked. When Scott looked at him he saw a mirror image of how he felt: he was scared shitless.

“We’ll find him. Come on.” Gripping his shovel, Scott headed north, into the woods. Surely an animal wouldn’t have dragged him that far.

“Hold on, look at this,” David called out behind him. Scott stopped, turned back to the clearing. David was standing at the other side of the grave, inspecting the side of the hole. “It looks like he went this way.” David pointed in a direction to Scott’s left.

“What do you mean he went that way?” Scott said. He headed back to the clearing, trying to see what David was pointing at.

“Look at the ground,” David said, motioning toward impressions in the muddy soil. “See how the grass and those weeds are flattened down? He crawled over this way and—”

“He crawled?” Was he hearing this right? Did David believe that Count Gaines’

spell worked?

“What else do you think?” David asked. He looked at Scott, his features serious, nervous. “Even a possum or a fox couldn’t pull a full grown human corpse out of a hole this shallow. And we don’t have bears in these parts, nor mountain lions. And I’ve done enough tracking while hunting deer with my dad to know when something is dragging itself through the forest.”

For the first time Scott felt a shiver run through him at the very implication.

“Come on.” David headed into the woods, his stance unwavering, determined.

Brandishing his shovel like a weapon, he headed into the woods slowly, following the tracks only he could see. Scott cautiously followed behind him, searching the woods all around them for any tell-tale signs that somebody else had been through here: a bent branch, footprints, flattened down weeds or grass. He had no idea what he was looking for. With a heavy feeling of dread, Scott followed David, clutching the shovel tightly in his grip.

When they were fifty yards away from the clearing Scott started to get worried.

Surely even if Count Gaines’ spell had worked, the bum couldn’t have gotten that far. Or could he?

As they headed deeper into the woods, David occasionally stopped and searched the area with the gaze of a hawk. Scott stood still each time, keeping his breathing shallow, ears tuned for every sound. He felt an internal timetable ticking away as the minutes passed. They were not going to make the morning weight room workout, which meant Coach Clark, the head football coach, would ride their ass but that was nothing new. Coach Clark was always riding their asses. First period started at eight A.M. sharp, and ditching it was out of the question this late in the game. It was Finals week.

“This way,” David said. He took off in another direction, heading south this time.

Scott followed, still tense and wired.

The woods in this part of Lancaster County were thick. Scott had no idea it was so remote here. It was weird to think that modern civilization was only two miles away, yet in here, in the thick of the forest, it felt like being in another world. He wondered why this section of what had to be state game lands was so desolate, why it hadn’t been built up.

His dad’s company, Evergreen LLC, was responsible for most of the rural development in Lancaster County these days. In fact, his dad sat on the Spring Valley County Commissioner’s board for development. Whenever a large corporation like Target or Wal-Mart wanted to build a store in the area, representatives from those companies had to pitch the idea to the city. Scott’s father had tremendous influence on the Commissioner’s board for development, and sometimes Scott overheard his father while he was in his office during phone meetings. He couldn’t recall this section of Spring Valley being in discussion and had never ventured to ask. Surely it was owned by the County or the state, right? Scott didn’t think it could be privately owned, but then–

“There’s a farm up ahead,” David said, his voice a low whisper. David had stopped and was looking intently ahead at something through a thick band of trees.

Scott stopped. “Where?”

David pointed. “About a hundred yards away. Looks like a field. Come on.”

As they threaded their way through the thick woods, Scott could make out where the forest ended and the beginning of what appeared to be a farmer’s field. His heart quickened. What if he made it out to the field and some farmer found him?

Later, when they got back to the house and talked about what happened between themselves, and later with Gordon and Steve, Scott would learn that they’d walked almost a half a mile through the forest. But now, as they reached the edge of the forest and Scott saw a figure just breaking through the stand of trees and head into the field, all thoughts of how far they’d come flew from his mind. Scott recognized the lurching figure the moment his eyes rested on him. “That’s him!”

Scott and David ran the last dozen yards through the trees toward the bum, who was lurching toward the field on wobbly legs. As they fell upon him, Scott raised the shovel over his shoulder and brought it down on the man’s back. The blade hit the small of his back and brought him to his knees. “Motherfucker!” Scott tackled him, his knees grinding against the man’s lower back. He was instinctively reaching for his neck to throttle him when David pulled him back.

“No! We gotta restrain him. Help me tie him up!” David was reaching into the burlap bag he’d lugged along and pulled out a coil of rope. He tossed one end to Scott, who caught it one-handed. Then David was on the ground helping Scott tie the dead man up.

It wasn’t until they had the man’s arms bound to his sides and his legs tied together that Scott realized the implications of his blind rage could have gotten him killed. He’d attacked a zombie! What if he’d been bitten?

As David brought the dead man up into a sitting position, Scott warily took stock of the situation. A wave of naseau swept through him and he fought it down. For the first time he was intimately aware of the odor emanating off the man. It was the stink of death.

Bits of dried mud clung to the man’s face and hair. His busted eye lolled from the socket, the pupil a tiny orb amid the dirty white of the sclera. The crack in his skull was clotted with dirt and bits of grass. While the man looked like shit, his overall appearance was worse now due to being buried. His head darted around like a frightened animal, his one remaining eye taking everything in. To Scott, he looked like one of those zombies you saw in a movie– Dawn of the Dead or 28 Days Later. He thought the man would have a more vacant stare. It wasn’t like that at all.

“Holy shit, look at him,” Scott said. His heart pounded in his chest. He felt light-headed. Even David was affected by the sight of the bum. It was like watching a science project come to life before their eyes after months of research and preparation.

Count Gaines’ spell had worked!

“He’s still dead, right?” Scott whispered, unable to take his eyes off the dead man.

“Yeah,” David said. “We were all there when Gordon took his pulse after we killed him. You saw it.”

Scott could only watch the bum, knowing in his heart that David was right. After they’d killed him last night they’d watch Gordon take his pulse. “He’s definitely dead,”

Gordon had said, his voice shaking slightly. Hell, they’d all been nervous last night after killing him. It was the first time they’d ever killed anybody. That nervousness, however, had quickly dissipated. After all, the guy had just been a worthless homeless nigger.

The bum’s remaining eye darted around. His features looked fearful, scared, and nervous. His face was streaked with blood and dirt.

“So what do we do with him?” Scott asked. What a stupid question! he thought.

The correct question should’ve been, how do we get him back to the guesthouse?

“Something we didn’t take into account which we should right now,” David said.

He turned to Scott. “You have any special emotional attachment to that windbreaker you’re wearing?”

Scott was wearing a light tan windbreaker. It had been chilly this morning. “Not really. Why?”

“We need something to cover his head with,” David said. He gestured to Scott.

“Take it off. We can tie it around his head with the sleeves.”

Scott understood where David was going with this. He shrugged out of the windbreaker and handed it to David.

David spread the windbreaker out and stood in front of the bum, who looked up at him. The bum made a strangled hiss. Scott felt a chill run down his spine at the sound of it.

With a sudden lunge, David looped the jacket over the zombie’s head and wrapped the sleeves around, tying the jacket up as the zombie screamed and began flailing its body around. Scott felt his heart stop at the sound of it; the scream was muffled and raspy, but the intensity of it was chilling. He didn’t realize he’d taken an involuntary step back as David took control of the zombie, tying the jacket around its head, effectively blinding and gagging him. David glanced back at Scott, his features slightly ashen. It looked like the zombie’s reaction had spooked him as well. “C’mon, we gotta get him out of here.”

Scott forced himself to step forward. Standing near the zombie now brought an involuntary shudder through him.

David was clutching the zombie’s shoulders. “Help me get him up. You take one end, I’ll take the other, and we’ll walk him back to the car.”

Somehow they did it. Scott fought his revulsion down during the first dozen yards, but as they quickly headed back to the car he felt better about the situation. They ushered the zombie along as if they were herding a man of simple means. The zombie had stopped its ululations of escape and moved along compliantly, like a dog on a leash.

Once at the SUV they herded the zombie in the back. David secured the zombie to the floor of the vehicle with some tie-down straps, holding him firmly in place. The zombie was completely docile now. Scott felt his fascination with everything growing by leaps and bounds. While the situation was still creepy, it was slowly awakening something inside him. Something that told him that this was the start of something big.

Scott and David got in the front seat and David started the vehicle. Scott glanced at the clock on the dashboard. “If we get him to the house and tie him up quickly, we can make first period,” he said.

David put the vehicle in gear and began backing out of the space he’d parked in.

“That’s just what I was thinking.”

During the drive home, Scott had to resist the urge to peek in the rear of the vehicle. While he still felt nervous, he was also excited. He hadn’t entertained the thought of this actually working–he was only going along with Gordon’s idea to placate the bastard. You want to turn a homeless bum into a zombie? Sure? Why the fuck not? What good are homeless people for anyway? He hadn’t expected Gordon’s spell to work, and the fact that it did had thrown a wrench of surprise into the equation. Now that he was getting over that surprise, his mind was working in overdrive.

“We’ll come straight to the house after school,” Scott said, mostly to himself.

“We won’t tell Gordon and Steve anything until after school.”

“They’re gonna ask,” David said.

“Yeah, you’re right.” Damn!

“It’ll be cool, though. They haven’t said anything yet.”

“Okay, so we tell them at lunch. And we go straight to the house after school so Gordon can verify he’s really dead.”

“Okay, then what?”

Scott grinned at David. “Then we do what we set out to do. We have some fun with him.”

David grinned back.

They made the trip back to Scott’s house in twenty minutes.

Scott jumped out of the SUV. “Let me make sure my folks are gone,” he said before sprinting up the long driveway to the side door. He got in, checked the garage.

Both cars were gone. He headed back outside. “Okay, let’s do it!”

Getting the zombie out of the SUV was a little trickier. Scott played lookout and took a quick surveillance of the neighborhood to see if anybody was out and about. He turned to David. “Back the SUV up to the end of the driveway. We’ll get him out there.”

David nodded and backed the SUV out onto the street. Scott guided him back in. If they could get the zombie out at the edge of the yard, they’d be out of sight from the eyes of prying neighbors. Good thing Scott lived in a pretty ritzy area; the closest house was a good one hundred yards away to the south.

David parked the SUV and raced to the back of the vehicle. A moment later they were walking the zombie to the guest house. The zombie’s gait was still staggering, as if he were drunk. At least he wasn’t making those creepy ass sounds anymore. Scott unlocked the door to the guest house and they herded the zombie inside.

“Let’s get his ass tied down,” David said, reaching for the restraints on the bloody floor.

They quickly got the zombie tied down. Once the job was done, they stepped back and surveyed their work. The zombie still had the jacket wrapped and tied around its head. Its arms were tied to its sides, its legs tied together. It lay on its back, restrained by the chains he’d been bound to when he was alive. It moved its head around in a curious motion, as if it were trying to see its surroundings through the windbreaker.

“What time is it?” David asked.

Scott checked his watch. “Seven thirty-eight.”

“Think he’ll be okay here?”

“Yeah. And we can cut fifth period. We already missed morning weight room, we may as well skip Clark’s athletic class as well.”

David nodded. “Yeah.”

“I’d like to get back here as quick as possible. Make sure he’s still tied down.”

“I hear ya.”

They glanced at each other. Grinned.

“We did it, brotha!” They high-fived each other and laughed.

David reached down and pulled the windbreaker off of the zombie’s head. He threw it aside as Scott gave the zombie a kick in the torso. The zombie made a startled sound, almost as if he’d felt the kick. Hearing that sound gave Scott a perverse thrill, and he kicked him again. The zombie made a strangled attempt at a whine in the back of his throat and tried to scurry away, but was restrained by the bonds that held him in place.

David and Scott laughed as they watched the zombie try to get himself free. He looked up at them, his eyes dead, yet something in them still remained…something that resembled fear.

“Come on,” Scott said. He turned away and headed toward the door. David followed him. They exited the guesthouse and Scott locked the door behind them.

Chapter Twelve

Tim Gaines was in his composition class with George and Al, in the middle of writing an essay for a class assignment, when they were summoned by the Principal.

Mr. Newsome, their teacher, looked over in bemusement as Dr. Stokely stood at Mr. Newsome’s desk. “Al, George, and Tim? Dr. Stokely wants to see you in his office.”

Tim looked up at the front of the class and felt his heart sink.

Jim Simmons, the school Dean, was standing with Dr. Stokely. He looked accusatory. Furious.

Oh shit, what now? Tim thought.

George glanced at him as he rose from his desk. What’s this about? Tim shrugged, trying to be casual about it, and stood up.

“Get your books,” Dr. Stokely said.

The room was silent and Tim could feel all eyes on him as he joined Al and George at the front of the room.

“Let’s go,” Dr. Stokely said. He and Mr. Simmons led the three boys out of the classroom and down the hall.

As they headed toward the administrative offices, Tim felt his stomach grow tight.

George asked, “What’s going on?”

The Principal and the Dean said nothing as they led the boys to the Administration offices. When they got there Tim’s fear became solid.

Officer Clapton and another police officer were waiting for them in the lobby. The police officers followed them into the Principal’s office.

Al and George looked confused as they were ushered into the office. Tim felt embarrassed for his friends. They were going to be made to suffer for associating with him. He knew it, had a feeling this had to do with the same old bullshit he’d had to put up with for the past five years. Another false accusation had been levied against him, something relating to the cemetery vandalism Officer Clapton had questioned him about a few days ago. Gordon Smith had probably found a way to weasel out of that; it was obvious. Once again, Tim was going to get in trouble for something he didn’t do.

“Sit down, boys,” Dr. Stokely said as he crossed the room to his desk.

“What’s going on?” Tim asked as he sat down. His voice was shaky.

“I’ll get right to the point,” Dr. Stokely said. He looked like he didn’t want to have to be here. Officer Clapton looked the same way. Only Mr. Simmons looked like he wanted to nail Tim to the wall for something.

“We learned from several anonymous sources that the three of you belong to a black magic coven and have been vandalizing private and public property,” Dr. Stokely said, all serious.

“What?” The three boys looked at the adults gathered around them. Al glanced at Tim, then at George, confusion quickly giving way to slow realization.

“Don’t act surprised,” Mr. Simmons said. “Tim’s been getting away with this crap for too long now. How he managed to rope the two of you into this, I have no idea, but it stops now.”

“He didn’t rope us into anything!” George protested.

Dr. Stokely was silent as Mr. Simmons seemed to take over. “For the past year or so, since you’ve been at Spring Valley High, school property has been vandalized.

Occult-related graffitti has been drawn on lockers, on bathroom walls. You’ve always denied it, but the evidence shows otherwise.”

“I’m not into the occult!” Tim stated. For the first time he was starting to feel angry.

“The police say that you tried to frame Gordon Smith for that grave robbing incident in Reamstown,” Mr. Simmons said grimly.

Tim looked at Officer Clapton, who appeared nervous. The officer that was with him wasn’t nervous at all. Like Mr. Simmons, he seemed to be under the impression that Tim was Satan incarnate.

“I never made that claim,” Tim said, feeling his gaze drawn to Officer Clapton.

“And you know it!”

“True enough,” Officer Clapton said. “When I questioned Gordon, he denied being out that evening and said he’d returned the book you’d loaned to him.”

“That’s a lie!”

“You can’t prove we were even at that cemetery,” George stated calmly.

Dr. Stokely looked at George. “No, that’s the job of the authorities.”

“And we are cooperating with them fully,” Mr. Simmons said.

“Fine, whatever,” George said. He shrugged. He was starting to lose some of that nervousness. “Maybe you should get help from a real police force, though. You know…one that has experience with school vandalism and grave robbing.”

“I don’t appreciate your sarcastic tone, Mr. Ulrich,” Mr. Simmons said.

“And I don’t appreciate you accusing us of something we had nothing to do with.”

Way to go, George, Tim thought. George’s stubborn refusal to not back down was having a positive effect on Tim’s own demeanor. Gone were the butterflies that had settled in his stomach as they’d made their way to the Principal’s office.

“I can have you suspended for disrespecting a school administrator,” Mr.

Simmons threatened.

“How am I disrespecting you?”

“By talking back to me.”

“So we don’t have the right to defend ourselves?”

“All we want,” Dr. Stokely said, interrupting brusquely, “is the truth.” He leveled a serious gaze at the three boys, resting his eyes on Tim. “I am quite aware of the false accusations that have been levied against Mr. Gaines.”

“I wouldn’t call the vandalism of Heather Watkins’ locker in which dog shit was smeared all over her books and a pentagram was drawn on the inside door a false accusation,” Mr. Simmons muttered.

“Well, I do call it a false accusation,” Dr. Stokely said, still not breaking his gaze from the three boys. “You weren’t our Dean of Students then.” He turned to Mr.

Simmons. “I suggest you stick with incidents that have come to you during your tenure at Spring Valley High, Mr. Simmons, and not rely on incidents I and the school board have already labeled as false!”

Mr. Simmons opened his mouth to say something, then closed it. He glanced at the other cop, then turned his gaze back to Tim.

Tim ignored him. It appeared that since arriving in Dr. Stokely’s office, the principal now had the upper hand.

“Unfortunately, I can’t ignore this most recent incident,” Dr. Stokely continued.

“The police found evidence that points to you, Tim. Despite your denial, Gordon Smith has an alibi for that night.”

“So do I,” Tim said. He glanced at Officer Clapton. “We told you last night!”

“What about George and Al?” Dr. Stokely asked.

“I was home that night,” George said, still not breaking his stance.

“So was I,” Al said. He, too, looked like he’d regained his confidence under the heavy scrutiny.

The door to Dr. Stokely’s office opened and Naomi Gaines stepped in. She was dressed in a dark pantsuit; her work-attire for the week. When she saw Tim she rushed over to him, looking concerned, frightened. “Are you okay?”

Dr. Stokely quickly brought her up to speed. As he listed the charges that had been levied against the boys–the allegations of witchcraft, animal sacrifice due to a report that a student’s cat was found disemboweled, and the grave-robbing of the Reamstown cemetery–Naomi’s features quickly turned to anger. She turned to Officer Clapton, who looked embarrassed. “So. It seems I can’t trust you now, either!”

“Mrs. Gaines, if you’ll please have a seat,” Dr. Stokely said.

“No, I won’t have a seat, Dr. Stokely,” Naomi said. “I’m taking Tim home. I will call you this afternoon to arrange a meeting with my husband and I on how we can best finish out the remainder of the school year.”

The officer that was standing with Officer Clapton spoke up. “Mrs. Gaines, my name is Officer Halford. I’d like to request your permission to conduct a search of your home for evidence pertaining to the allegations that have just been levied against your son.”

“Get a search warrant,” Naomi sneered.

“Fine,” Officer Halford said. “I will.”

A man dressed in a white shirt, dark slacks, and a tie stepped in to the room; he looked like an older version of George. When he saw George he crossed the room to his son, who stood up and met his father. A moment later Al’s mother arrived.

Tim couldn’t get out of that room any quicker.

* * *

Naomi Gaines was furious.

“—I’m just sick of this shit! I’ve had it! These people can fuck themselves!”

“We can’t just pack up and leave!” Tim’s dad said. Always the voice of reason, he was having a difficult time trying to talk Mom out of pulling up stakes and leaving town permanently.

“What else can we do? They’ve suspended the boys for the remainder of the school year! They’re trying to falsly charge them with a crime they did not commit!”

“Leaving is only going to strengthen their case,” Dad said.

Tim was sitting at the top of the staircase, listening as his parents talked downstairs in the kitchen. It was ten minutes till eleven in the evening. Despite his exhaustion, Tim couldn’t sleep. After leaving school for the day–hell, for the remaining week of the school year–Naomi and Tim had met up with George, Al, and their parents at Scooter’s, a bar and grill on Route 501, and talked. It was there that George and Al were quickly brought up to speed on Tim’s reputation in Spring Valley as the town pariah. Al had filled in some of the narrative as well, mostly based on his own observances over the last five years. This was all new to George and his father, as well as Al’s mother, who was shocked, having never heard of the incidents prior to today. Several times George and his father–a man named Bart, who worked in Lancaster as an IT manager–shook their heads in amazement. A few times, Bart said, “That’s the dumbest thing I’ve ever heard!”

Those comments were usually made after Naomi or Tim brought up one of the more outlandish claims that had been levied against Tim…usually the ones involving witchcraft and Satanism.

“You know…we now have people on our side,” Naomi said. “The Ulrich and Romero families. They’re as outraged as we are this is happening to their sons, and they’re even more outraged it’s been happening to us for the past five years!”

That was the bright side of this whole mess. Contrary to what Tim initially believed when they were brought to the office, George and Al had stuck by him. And most importantly, so had their parents. Their sons were being accused of the same outrageous claims as Tim, yet not once did they blame Tim or his parents for being a “bad influence.” Instead, Tim and his parents had received unequivocable support. Mr. Ulrich even said he was contacting a lawyer for them, which he’d done promptly. One of the calls Tim’s parents took earlier in the evening had been from the lawyer, who was now representing all three families.

“I know,” Dad said. “And I think that’s great. But—”

“We are not leaving! If we leave, they win!”

“This isn’t about who wins or loses, it’s about Tim growing up in a more stable environment!”

“Well, I’m sorry I even suggested we try moving back here.” Mom’s voice raised slightly and Tim winced; he could tell she was getting angrier. “It was dumb of me to even think things might have changed around here but I was obviously wrong.”

“Naomi—”

“Maybe we should have stayed in Baltimore where we at least had neighbors that were more open-minded. Of course you still would have had to work at that suck-ass job you hated so much—”

“Naomi, I’m not going to get into this with you now.”

“Why not? You wanted to talk about it, so let’s talk.”

Tim could only sit at the top of the stairs, listening as his parents talked on the verge of a full-blown argument. They’d had their squabbles before, mostly over minor things. This was the first time they’d gotten into anything this heated and Tim felt bad about it. Perhaps if he wasn’t so different, if he was just like everybody else, all this wouldn’t have happened.

“These fucking… idiots…had the audacity to get a search warrant and go through all of our things!” Mom was on the verge of crying. He felt torn between staying upstairs and listening or going downstairs to try to help Dad calm her down. “They went through our things–through Tim’s room and tore it apart!–and they took his books!”

That was the main thing that had kept Tim from falling to sleep. His bedroom felt tainted after the search. He felt like he’d been violated.

Officer Clapton had supervised the search, which hadn’t taken long. Tim had a chance to read some of the fine print in the search order that Officer Clapton gave to his parents, and the words “books, videos, and any items related to the occult” leaped out at him. Yes, he had several books that had occult themes, but so what? Apparently it was a big deal to whoever was driving this witch hunt because they spent a significant portion of their time in Tim’s bedroom going through his bookshelves, searching his closet, his desk drawers, looking under his bed. They carried out two boxes of belongings, mostly books–horror novels, primarily. Mom had bitched about it the entire time until Officer Clapton had to ask her to please stop denigrating his officers. They were only doing their job.

“And they said they were only doing their job!” Mom muttered downstairs, still on a roll.

“Let’s see what we can come up with when we talk to Doug tomorrow,” Dad said.

Doug Fenner was the lawyer George’s father had hired.

“What I’d like to do is sue this goddamn town,” Naomi said. The conversation had moved to the living room now; Tim’s position at the top of the stairs kept him in the shadows, well away from their vantage point. “Somebody’s personal reading material doesn’t automatically make them a criminal, and these inbred religious fanatics need to learn that!”

Tim grinned. His mom was good and pissed off. Dad was angry too, he just showed it in different ways. After years of doing everything they could to keep their heads down in this town and avoid getting stoned by the marching morons who were giving their lives hell, Tim’s parents were finally starting to fight back.

“When I talked to Mr. Ulrich earlier this evening he said the police took books and a bunch of comic books from George’s room,” Dad said. “Mrs. Romero said the same thing. Any DA in his right mind is going to take one look at this and throw it out.”

“We can only hope,” Naomi said.

“That’s what’ll happen, and we’ll petition the court for Tim’s belongings to be returned. If they aren’t returned, we’ll not only sue the city for character defamation and harassment based on religious grounds, we’ll sue them for theft as well. The fact that we’ll have to enroll him in private school come fall can be another issue we can levy against them.”

Tim had been thinking of the religious thing for the past hour or so now. His father had explained to them when they got home that one of the things Mr. Ulrich was going to inquire about when he talked to Doug tomorrow was if they could sue the city on religious discrimination. Because there was no physical evidence tying Tim and the boys to the grave desecration in Reamstown, attempting to smear the boys and tie them to the crime anyway based on their love for comic books and horror novels was not only ludicrous at best, it was a witch hunt pure and simple. Because Tim had been labeled as a

“witch,” and a “warlock” and a “devil-worshipper” by his peers ever since sixth grade, and because he professed no belief in the occult, much less being a member of any organized pagan group, it was clear that the harassment was clearly religious in nature.

The kids who were doing the harassing all belonged to area Christian churches; Tim and his family did not attend religious services. And despite the fact that two books on paganism and witchcraft were among the books confiscated in the search warrant, the authorities failed to confiscate two Bibles that sat on Tim’s shelf. Not to mention a copy of the Qu’ran, and a book called Comparitive World Religions.

“I just hope we can fight this and win it,” Mom said. For the first time that night, Tim detected the weariness in her tone of voice. “I’m just getting so tired of it!”

“I know, honey,” Dad said. “I am too.”

“They never did search Gordon Smith’s house or the homes of those other boys.”

“No, they didn’t.”

“And they won’t even question them further! That’s what’s got me so goddamn mad about this whole thing! Something tells me the kid that started this whole mess back when Tim was in sixth grade, Scott Bradfield, is behind it all.”

Tim thought about Scott and how he, Steve, and David had done such a good job in not only avoiding him for the past five years or so, but insidiously pulled the strings of his continued harassment. It was very possible Scott was involved, but how to prove it?

And really, how could it be proven that Gordon robbed that grave?

Furthermore, why would Gordon desecrate a grave and steal human remains? Tim found it hard to believe it was done for the sole purpose of smearing Tim’s name even further.

But then, he wouldn’t put it past that crew. They could have seen his happiness the past few months. Could have noticed that he now had new company in the form of Al and George, as well as Matt and Chelsea, and decided to take him down a few notches.

And in doing so they’d sent a message to George and Al as well. And that message was simple: we control this school. So don’t mess with us.

“I’m guessing if there was no evidence to tie Gordon to what happened it will be even tougher to tie Scott to it as well,” Dad said. There was an audible sound of the chair cushions squeaking as Dad sat down. “You know those three have been as slick as snot on a glass door handle since they first got in trouble for assaulting Tim.”

Mom sighed. There was a creak of leather as Mom sat on the sofa, followed by the click of the television turning on. “And there’s no evidence tying Tim and his friends to this as well. It’s their word against ours and no physical evidence. I think you’re right, honey. A good DA is going to take one look at this and throw it out.”

“Hopefully we can still sue them,” Dad said. “The fact that we’re now forced to place Tim in private school due to what’s happened will be the main thing. When they throw this thing out, we’ve got ourselves a good case for a harassment lawsuit.”

“Okay. So we keep Tim out of school the rest of the year and make sure he takes his finals, does the remainder of his schoolwork and turns it in, and we follow up with his instructors to make sure they’ve received it. The last thing I want is for Tim to fail a class because one of his teachers won’t accept his work due to him being suspended.”

“I agree. We’ll talk to Dr. Stokely about it tomorrow. I’m sure he’ll be agreeable since Tim’s maintained excellent grades, and he’s suspended for the rest of the year.”

The cooking channel was on and Tim finally got up and headed back to his room.

He closed the door softly behind him and sat on the bed.

He’d done his best to put things back in order after the police left, but there were still piles of books on the floor. The police had taken everything horror-related but they’d left behind all his fantasy and SF. To further demonstrate their illiteracy, they’d left behind a really cool novel called Harvest Home by Thomas Tryon, which wove themes of neo-paganism flourishing unseen in modern day villages.

And true enough, they’d left behind the two Bibles Tim owned. That and numerous other books, including a true crime encyclopedia that contained cult-related crime entries.

Idiots, Tim thought as he lay down on the bed.

He turned off the lights and wondered how Al and George were doing tonight. He was sorry they’d gotten dragged into this sad, sorry mess, but was happy and pleased that they and their families were standing with him to fight it.

And because he couldn’t help it, he found himself wondering what Gordon Smith and his friends were up to tonight.

Chapter Thirteen

Gordon was with Scott, Steve, and David when they went into Harrisburg that night and got themselves another homeless man.

Scott’s parents were out of town this week–both of them were attending business conferences for their jobs–and the house was theirs. Nonetheless, when they brought the unconscious homeless man back, they took him directly to the guest house.

Scott had the SUV pulled back into the rear of the driveway and was talking to Gordon about Count Gaines’s recent trouble with the law as Steve and David carried the homeless man out of the SUV. Gordon had filled the guys in on what happened over the course of the evening during their run into Harrisburg. It had taken that long to relate everything in between the drive, scouring for the right homeless guy, subduing him quickly, and getting him into the SUV. David had knocked the dirty fuck out with one punch to the side of his head and the guy–who actually didn’t appear that much older than them–fell to the ground. Once again, there were no witnesses.

Gordon was bringing Scott up on where things stood now with Count Gaines.

“The cops questioned me and my parents, but they hauled Gaines out of class and suspended him, George, and Al. They’re totally focusing on those three for what Dave and I did.”

“That was still a stupid thing you guys did,” Scott said. “Letting that book fall out of your car.”

“Yeah, but that’s how they tied the grave robbing to Gaines!”

Scott shook his head. “It’s a trip to think they’re harassing the shit out of him just because of that. I mean…Gaines told them he loaned the book to you and you told them you returned it and they swallowed your story? That’s the funniest shit I’ve heard all year.”

“Yeah, and now Simmons has a hard on for all three of them,” Gordon said. He grinned. “George Ulrich and Al Romero have been cozying up to Tim for the past few months and he’s noticed. It’s only a matter of time before he sets his sights on Matt and that crazy chick they hang out with. You know…Chelsea?”

“Those freaks should be thrown out of school,” Scott said. “Especially Chelsea.

Know what Heather Watkins told me?”

“What?”

“She said Chelsea is one of those weirdos that cuts themselves.”

“Huh?”

“They cut themselves with knives.” Scott made a sawing motion with his fingers on the underside of his left arm. “They cut themselves for attention or some shit.”

“That’s fucked up, man.”

“No shit. And she’s just as deranged as Tim Gaines, if you ask me. Heather told me she’s bad news. She not only cuts herself, she listens to that goth shit. She also listens to those weird metal bands, the ones with names you can’t pronounce. She’s probably into the same kind of demonic shit as Tim.”

“Yeah, I can see that.”

Scott got out of the driver’s seat and he and Gordon began making their way to the guest house. Steve and David had already gotten the unconscious bum inside.

“Well, if we succeed in getting Tim, George, and Al kicked out of school, Matt and Chelsea will be next,” Gordon grinned. “By the time first semester is over next year, they’ll be out on their asses.”

Scott laughed as he and Gordon entered the guest house.

David and Steve had deposited the unconscious man on the floor in front of the zombie, who was chained up against the pipes that would have fed into the sink had they finished the guesthouse interior and actually installed a kitchen. The zombie looked at the homeless man curiously, as if he’d never seen a man knocked out cold before. David laughed. “Hey man! Check this out! Maybe our zombie will try to eat this guy!”

“Here zombie!” Steve called out in sing-song voice. “We brought you din-din!”

David pushed the homeless man closer to the zombie by shoving him with his foot. The man rolled over and moaned. His left arm flopped on the floor, landing inches away from the zombie.

The zombie made a guttural gasp of surprise and stepped back. His left eyeball was a gleaming pus-filled globe. Fluid dribbled down his cheek, pooling above his upper lip.

“Come on you sack of shit, eat!” David knelt closer and picked up the homeless man’s arm off the floor. He moved it under the zombie’s nose, waving it enticingly.

“Come on, have a bite! He’s nice and fresh!”

Scott couldn’t help but laugh. Gordon stood beside him, laughing too. It really was kind of funny. The goddamn zombie was behaving as if he were afraid.

“Are you sure that thing is dead?” Scott asked Gordon.

“Yeah, he’s dead,” Gordon answered. “Can’t you smell him?”

David turned to Scott. “No shit, man. You smell that?”

Scott hadn’t noticed the smell before but now he did. It was the faint smell of roadkill. “We’re going to have to do something about that soon,” he said.

“Air fresheners,” David said, taking a step back from the zombie and the new homeless guy. “We can get a bunch of them tomorrow.”

“So what you wanna do now?” Steve asked. He looked twitchy. Excited. Scott could tell he was amped up to spring some violence.

“Aren’t zombies supposed to eat people?” Scott asked.

“Count said they don’t always eat people,” Gordon said. “In that book he loaned me he said—”

“Count Gaines don’t know shit,” Scott said.

“He knew enough to help us make a zombie!”

Scott sighed. His energy was low tonight. He had no desire to tie this new guy up and wail on him. Least they could do was get him tied up and gagged, but he didn’t want the guy beaten this soon. He’d already gotten knocked out by Dave. Besides, he really wanted to see if it was true about zombies–did they really eat people? “I want to see if our new zombie will take a bite out of this guy,” he said. He nodded to Steve. “Lift that guy up a bit and move him closer. Maybe stick his arm up to the other one’s mouth or something, force-feed him.”

David laughed. “Hell yeah, man! Force-feed him! Pry his mouth open with this dirty fucker’s arm! Maybe that’ll trigger a feeding response!”

That idea seemed to spark interest in the boys’ minds and they gathered closer around Dave as he reached down and hoisted the bum up by his armpits. The man moaned, his eyes fluttering open briefly. He was thin, wearing ragged jeans and a button down shirt with dirty sneakers. He’d been carrying a dirty knapsack when they crossed paths off an alleyway in downtown Harrisburg and Gordon had made sure to snag it when they got the bum into the SUV. The first thing the guy had said when he saw them pull up was, “Hey, can you guys spare some change?”

It had also been the last thing he’d said before they swarmed over him.

Dave picked up the unconscious man’s arm and moved it up to the zombie’s face.

As he tugged on the man’s arm, he inadvertently pulled his body closer. The zombie stepped back, grunting in surprise. David forced the man’s arm to the zombie’s face.

“Come on, you dirty piece of shit! Eat! Take a bite!”

Gordon and Steve laughed. Scott cracked a grin. It was kinda funny watching the expression on the zombie’s face. It looked confused.

“This guy looks nice and tasty!” David crooned. “Come on, dude, you can do it.

Take a bite!” He shoved the man’s arm against the zombie’s lips, pushing and prodding until its mouth was forced open. The zombie made a bleating cry of protest and tried to step back again. It was clear to Scott that the zombie was afraid of something.

“Come on, its good for you!” Gordon prodded. “You’ll like it.”

“Are you sure you want to be that close to it?” Steve asked.

Dave was standing close enough to the zombie to force the man’s arm into its face, but had a good position in which to get out of the way should it lunge at him.

Besides, the zombie was chained up. He couldn’t really go far. Dave pushed the homeless man’s arm into the zombie’s lips, slowly prying his jaws open. The zombie made a high-pitched bleating noise; it was obviously trying to escape now. It looked terrified. With its back against the wall, chained up on a short leash to the metal posts, it gave Scott the impression that it was backed up against a corner. It was moving its head away from the proferred arm, its one remaining good eye rolling around in the socket, seeking an exit.

“The fuck,” Dave muttered, pushing the man’s arm farther into the zombie’s mouth. “Eat, goddamit!”

“Eeeeeeehhhhhh!” The zombie whined. It took another stumbling step backward and almost fell.

“Fucking piece of shit!” Dave punched the zombie with the homeless man’s arm.

The movement jerked the homeless man’s body forward, hitting his head against the zombie’s grubby sneaker. The homeless man’s eyelids fluttered.

“Whaaaa?” The man groaned. He was lying on the ground near the zombie’s feet.

Dave punched the zombie in the face. “Eat, you fucking sack of shit!”

The blow rocked the zombie back and this time he did fall. He landed on his hindquarters, legs splayed out in front of him. His foot accidentally kicked the homeless man in the torso and the man’s eyes snapped open. “Hey!”

“Uh, oh,” Gordon said.

The homeless guy was conscious now. He sprang to his feet, as if he’d been doused with a bucket of cold water. Dave reacted instinctively, hoisting the man up by the armpits and giving him a shove toward the zombie.

The homeless man landed in the zombie’s lap and he gave a strangled scream.

“Aaaaugghh!”

The zombie gave out its own strangled cry, this one carrying a tinge of fear as the homeless man fell on him. “Aaaaaiiiieeee!” It made no attempt to eat the homeless man.

It didn’t even try to grab him. The goddamn thing was afraid of him!

“Fuck!” Scott muttered. Things weren’t working the way they were supposed to and this was getting him angry.

The homeless man floundered for a moment on the zombie’s lap, trying to orient himself. Then he launched himself to his feet and made a stumbling leap away from the zombie. He ran right into Scott, who grabbed him and flung him to the floor, his anger and fury rising. “Goddamit!”

The homeless man cast his gaze up at the four boys crowding around him, his eyes showing confusion, a sense of pleading. “Don’t hurt me, man…please…”

“Shut up!” Scott yelled. He lashed out with one well-placed kick to the man’s stomach.

The homeless man doubled over in pain. That kick seemed to awaken Dave’s own urge for violence; he kicked the homeless man in the thigh and the small of his back. The homeless man screamed and tried to hobble away. The zombie made that keening whine again, cowering against the far wall of the room.

Scott was consumed with rage. It wasn’t supposed to work this way! The zombie was supposed to eat this guy! “Gordon, what the fuck?”

“What?”

“You said the zombie was supposed to eat this guy?”

“I never said that, I only said that it might!”

“Bullshit!”

The homeless man made a scrambled attempt at escape during the exchange. He crawled between the arguing boys and began to make a mad dash toward the door.

Steve lunged for him, grabbed him by his T-shirt and hauled him back.

Scott and David joined in the fray and closed in on him.

Scott couldn’t help it. He felt himself unleashing all his pent-up fury on him. All his rage, hate, and anger. As his fists crashed into the homeless man’s face and chest he felt the anger leave his body slowly. All the frustration, all the hate, all geared toward people like him…it all began to dissipate the more he pounded on the bum. Steve held on to him as Scott and David pummeled the man. Gordon was the only one to not participate. He stood in the corner, watching them.

The homeless man kept trying to get away but he quickly succumbed to the crushing blows that were falling on him. He tried to deflect them by raising his arms, covering his head, cowering in on himself, but it was no use. In short order he was on the ground and David and Scott were kicking him over and over and over and–

“Okay, okay, that’s enough, stop!”

Scott didn’t know who was telling them to stop at first. It came as a distant call, as a disembodied voice from far away. What made him stop was his own fatigue. He was tired.

He stopped, trying to catch his breath. His arms hurt, his fists were numb. His entire body was still thrumming with adrenalin. He looked around; David stood across from him glaring down at the bum, his fists still clenched. Steve stood nearby, his chest heaving with exertion–had he joined in too? Gordon appeared to be the only one who hadn’t participated in the melee. He was standing behind Steve, an agitated look on his face. Behind them all, on the opposite side of the room, the zombie cowered against the corner, making those strange whining noises. “He’s had enough,” Gordon said. Scott put two and two together now; it was Gordon who’d yelled out to stop it. “He’s knocked out.”

“He’s more than knocked out,” Steve said, looking worried as he took a step closer to peer down at the homeless guy. He bent down, rolled the man over and gasped.

He looked up at the others. “He’s dead!”

“The fuck you mean, he’s dead?” Scott asked. He was getting pissed off again.

“He ain’t fucking breathing!”

“We didn’t beat on him that much,” Dave said.

“It doesn’t take much to kill somebody, either,” Steve said. “You already knocked him out in Harrisburg. Maybe that…you know…helped things…”

Scott took a step back. “You sure he’s dead?”

Dave knelt down and picked up the dead man’s arm. He pressed his fingers against his wrist. There was an uncomfortable moment of silence as Dave took the man’s pulse, then he looked at Scott. “He’s dead.” His expression was dead-pan. Expressionless.

“Shit, shit, shit!” Scott’s fury exploded and it had to be released. He went after the most likely target. He lunged toward the dead man and kicked him again, once, twice, a third time. Each time he kicked him he yelled, “shit,” spending his pent-up anger and aggression. Dave and Steve stepped back, giving him his space as Scott released his frustration and rage.

When it was finally over Scott staggered away, trying to catch his breath. He leaned against the wall, totally spent. The others stood silently, not looking at each other.

Only the zombie in the corner made any noise. Its whining was subsiding as it sat on the floor, looking at them with that same fearful expression.

“Now what the hell are we going to do?” Scott asked.

“Is it too late to bury him at Zuck’s Woods?” Dave shot a look at Gordon.

Scott looked at Gordon, too.

Gordon was still standing away from the other three boys, a strange look on his face. He looked down at the homeless guy. “You want to take him tonight?”

“Yeah,” Scott said, the idea taking root, settling in, making itself comfortable.

“We still got time, don’t we? What time is it?”

Steve glanced at his watch. “It’s only eleven-thirty.”

“We have just enough time to get there and do it!” Scott was getting excited. This would work!

Gordon was shaking his head. “I don’t know. I mean…the preparation…the stuff I have to do first—”

“You already did that before you brought the first bum back from the dead,” Scott said. “And we don’t have to bury him that far below ground. Just a few feet is all, and we’ll camp out there tonight and be there for when he digs himself out tomorrow morning.”

“Camp out?” Gordon was looking at Scott as if he’d lost his mind. Was Gordon getting chickenshit? It was hard to tell because Scott had never known Gordon to be a complete pussy.

“Yeah, camp out.” Scott clapped Steve on the back, motioning him to action.

“Come on, you can call your folks on your cell on the way over. We’ll just grab the shovels and get going.”

“We’re not going to need to perform that ritual again, are we?” Dave asked.

“We shouldn’t have to.” Scott glanced at Gordon for confirmation as Steve bent over the dead homeless man and dragged his feet to a more linear position. “Right, Gord?”

“No, I don’t think we have to,” Gordon said. He took a step forward, peering at the dead guy. He still had that look about him, and the closest Scott could come to describing it was worry. Gordon’s brow was creased, his face set in a frown. “But we gotta do it quick.”

“Let’s go,” Scott said.

They moved quickly, like a team that had performed this task numerous times.

Steve and Dave carried the body outside and deposited it in the back of the SUV while Scott collected the shovels from the utility shed. He grabbed a roll of duct tape and called Gordon over.

“Take these to the SUV,” he said, handing over the shovels.

“What are you gonna do with that duct tape?”

“Tape that fucking zombie’s mouth shut in case he makes those weird-ass noises while we’re gone.”

When Scott climbed into the SUV a minute later, the digital numerals on the dashboard clock read 11:37 pm. Scott pulled the vehicle out of the driveway and turned on the headlights as they exited the development.

“This better fucking work,” Scott said as they drove toward the outskirts of town.

“It worked last time, didn’t it?” Gordon said. He was seated beside Scott in the front seat of the SUV. Dave and Steve were in the back, staying silent. The tension in the vehicle was thick, heavy with anxiety. There was a lot riding on this tonight. In a way, Scott supposed it was a good thing the guy was dead. That was the eventual plan for him all along. It just wasn’t supposed to have happened so quickly. His unexpected demise had come as a surprise and, therefore, this hastily-arranged burial ritual had not been on the agenda tonight. Their alibis were compromised, for one thing. The other three boys’

parents knew they were spending the evening with Scott. That was about all they knew.

And should they get pulled over by a cop–

Best to not even think about that.

“What I mean,” Scott said, “is next time we try this, the sonofabitch that’s lying dead in the back of the SUV better not only be a zombie, it better eat the next homeless motherfucker we bring in.”

Steve turned around. “You serious? You want to like, feed homeless people to them?”

Scott shrugged. “Why not? Might be kinda fun to watch, don’t you think?” He glanced at Gordon and playfully punched his arm. Gordon chuckled ruefully, shaking his head. “Hey, come on Gord, think of how gross it would be. It’ll be like watching those zombie movies you’re always pestering me to see. You know, Night of the Living Dead and all that shit.”

“But I told you that the zombies we’re calling up are different!” Gordon said.

“They’re zombies, right?”

“Yeah.”

“And in those movies, zombies eat people, right?”

“Yeah, but in the book Count Gaines loaned me, they—”

“Who the fuck cares about what books say?”

Gordon opened his mouth to say something, then shook his head. “Okay.

Whatever.”

“Whatever? What’s that supposed to mean?”

“Nothing.”

Scott stared at Gordon, silently daring the other boy to keep it up. That strange feeling he’d had earlier about Gordon was still lingering. Was Gordon going pussy on them? He better not be. While Gordon had participated in way too many things with Scott and the rest of the crew that he could be in as much trouble as they should he squeal, Scott didn’t think he would stoop so low as to drop a dime on them. He might be the type to silently bow out, never to contact them again, and that was fine. So long as Gordon kept his mouth shut.

But if he even heard one whispered rumor that Gordon had talked about their recent activities with anybody else outside the group…if he so much as thought about it…

No. That wouldn’t happen. Gordon was in too deep. Gordon would never do anything like that.

Besides, making the zombies was Gordon’s idea.

“Tell me something, Gord,” Scott said. “Why’d you want to make zombies if you knew they weren’t going to eat people?”

Gordon shrugged. “I don’t know. I kinda thought they would eat people…you know, like in the movies. But according to Count Gaines, the zombies we conjured from that spell in the book aren’t those kind of zombies.”

Scott looked at Gordon, the idea settling in with him. “So this is all Count Gaines’

fault, then.”

Another shrug from Gordon. “I don’t know. I guess.”

They were silent as they drove through the country, heading up the winding road that would take them into the hills at the outskirts of town and, eventually, Zuck’s Woods. “Let’s just get there and do what we gotta do,” Scott said. “When he rises, we’ll bring him back to the house and then we can make plans to get another homeless person.

Maybe if we don’t feed them for a week or two they’ll be hungry enough to eat the next homeless guy we bring.”

Gordon nodded. “I never thought of that.”

Scott grinned. Let Gordon think that their next victim would be culled from the ranks of the homeless. He had someone else in mind.

Count Gaines himself.

Chapter Fourteen

Tim Gaines had been listening to a CD by The Cult–Love–over and over for the past few days in his room, wondering how things would have been for his parents, and the Ulrich and Romero families, if he were only normal.

Like everybody else.

Tim sighed. He was reclining on his bed in his room. A poster for the band Tool was pinned up on his closet door. A small boom box sat on his bureau, twin speakers currently blaring “Dark Angel,” Ian Ashbury’s voice both soothing and providing a hint of danger. Catty-corner to the bureau was his bookshelf, currently stuffed with dozens of paperbacks and a few hardcovers. Despite everything that had occurred as of late, Tim had a horror novel in his lap–a Jack Ketchum paperback. No matter how bad things got in the real world, escaping to make-believe fantasies was always preferable…even when those make-believe fantasies were as nightmarish as a Jack Ketchum novel.

The song ended and Tim debated getting up from the bed to change the CD. He’d been listening to his mom’s music collection relentlessly since being on house arrest for the past week. His mom was way cool. Dad was cool too, for that matter. In the past week, Mom had introduced Tim to the music of her youth. Bands like The Cult, The Cure, Bauhaus, Gene Loves Jezebel. She’d pulled out an old scrapbook and flipped through it with him and Tim was amazed to see that his mom had been a goth when she was in high school and college. “Of course back then we didn’t call outselves Goths,”

she’d said as they sat at the kitchen table. Mom was nursing a glass of wine. “We called ourselves punks. And most of the kids I went to school with were scared of me because of the way I looked…not for anything I’d ever done.”

It was the first time Mom had ever opened herself up that much to him about her youth. He knew she’d gone through a similar experience at Spring Valley High when she was a student there. What he didn’t know was that she’d been just as independent as he was. “The apple doesn’t fall far from the tree, honey,” she’d said, giving him an affectionate squeeze.

“Were the kids you went to school with back then as dumb as the kids are now?”

Tim had asked.

Mom laughed at that one. “There were quite a few doofuses in my day. Yeah…I’d have to say that there were brainless idiots when I went to school.”

The difference between Mom’s time and now was that back then the kids weren’t as cruel. The jocks never tried to force-feed a dead rodent to Mom, nor had they consistently targeted her in harassment and rumors. Mom even said that kids these days were just a whole lot meaner than they were in her time. When Tim asked why, she shrugged. “I don’t know, honey. There seems to be such a big emphasis now for parents to push their kids to be more competitive. To always succeed at everything they do and to basically mold them into images either they never lived up to or something they always wanted to be. As a result I think there’s a lot of angry, frustrated kids out there. They lash out, and quite often they lash out at those they perceive to be different. They perceive people like you and me to be a threat because we don’t have those same restrictions. So they lash out at us because it makes them feel better about themselves.”

“Why can’t they just be themselves?” Tim had asked. “I don’t get it.”

“Their parents have certain expectations of them,” Mom had explained. “They’ve set these goals for their kids and for the most part they’re either unattainable or they…they’re not something these kids want. My folks wanted me to be a business administrator when I grew up. Can you imagine me working in an office?”

Tim had grinned. Mom worked in an office, but it was in a very creative setting.

She was a Creative Director for a small advertising agency in Lancaster.

“When my folks found out I wanted to major in graphic arts in college they blew a gasket. It was bad enough I went out of my way to wear clothes they didn’t approve of and had a boyfriend they didn’t like because he didn’t look like all the Ken dolls in the neighborhood…I had to express a desire to do something with my life that I actually liked. The difference between what I went through and what a lot of other kids go through is that I stuck to my guns. I did what I wanted, took the college classes I wanted, pursued my interests. My parents weren’t happy, and they made this known to me throughout the time I lived at home. I had to actually move out of the house and show some success in my chosen profession before they finally came around. Don’t you remember when you were little and we’d come here to visit? How your grandparents and I never really talked much?”

Tim did remember. While his grandparents were always wonderful to him, they had seemed somewhat cold and distant to Mom. Things had warmed up recently, though, and they seemed fine now. Tim nodded. “Yeah, I remember.”

“Most people would rather take the easy way out,” Mom said. “They’d rather take the well worn path than the road less traveled. The well-worn path is easier. It’s compromise, and life is easier for you when you take it. You get a good job quickly, everybody approves of who you are and what you do. I could have done that, made my parents happy by majoring in a field that held no interest for me, and that’s what most people do. Instead, I chose the road less traveled and had a rocky relationship with my folks for a while because of it, but you know what? It was worth it.

That seemed so wrong to Tim. His parents had never once tried to steer him toward a goal he held no interest in. When Tim had expressed an interest in majoring in English and History in high school, they’d been entirely supportive. Other kids he knew who expressed similar goals had been talked into more “practical” courses like Accounting. Tim had a classmate who had gone from an A and B student, to a D and C

average when he was forced to major in Accounting instead of Music like he’d wanted to.

Too bad you couldn’t change your major in high school the way you could in college. Now that kid was screwed if he wanted to go on to college and had the balls to choose a major he knew he could excel in.

Tim got off the bed and approached the bureau where the boombox and Mom’s CD’s were stacked. He thumbed through them. It was three-fifteen, the last day of school.

Already, Tim could hear the excited voices of kids in the neighborhood as they came home for the first afternoon of what he hoped would be a long summer. Mom and Dad were at work. Tim had finished his last final exam yesterday, had turned in the papers this morning, and had only to log on to the Spring Valley School District website to get his grades. He knew he’d passed the tests with flying colors. He’d studied hard for them. He was confident his grades would remain well above average and that he would be able to raise his GPA even higher next semester.

He’d spoken to George and Al every day since his banishment from school.

George’s father was pressing on with his legal claims against the school district. Two nights ago, all three families had met at Doug Fenner’s office to sign paperwork authorizing a lawsuit against the district. The police still hadn’t filed criminal charges, but that was only because they were still investigating the crime. Or so they claimed. As Doug explained to them, the lawsuit against the school district was two-fold; it was designed to punish the district for discriminating against the boys, and it was also designed to shift the burden of proof away from them regarding the alleged witchcraft allegations. Either supply proof that they were involved in criminal activity, or cease and desist. In other words, put up or shut up.

Still, Tim felt bad that George and Al had gotten roped into this mess. Despite their guilt by association tags, his two new friends remained in touch. They’d called Tim every day since their suspension. They’d even tried encouraging Tim to go out with them to the movies, even to Freeze and Frizz. Tim was still a little nervous about going out in public since being kicked out of school. After all, news of their alleged crime had been written up extensively in the local newspapers. And while their immediate neighbors had been supportive and claimed to not believe the allegations, Tim had a feeling other people who lived in their development were not taking so kindly to the recent events. More than once Tim caught subtle vibes from people he passed on the street on his way to the community mailbox. Vibes that told him that on no uncertain terms they didn’t want to have anything to do with him.

Fine by him.

Tim’s thoughts were interrupted by the ringing of the phone. He crossed the room to his bed and picked up his extension. “Hello?”

“Tim!” It was Al.

“Hey man, what’s up?”

“Not much. Just chilling out at the house. You up to anything tonight?”

Tim shrugged. “I don’t know.” What Tim really wanted to do was go to the movies. He wanted to see the new Chronicles of Narnia movie. “I’m probably just going to hang out here at the house. You hear from George today?”

“Yeah. We were wondering if you wanted to go to the movies.”

“What do you want to see?”

“Either the new Narnia movie or that new movie with Ving Rhames.”

“Either one sounds good to me.”

“Cool. How about if I come by your place at five-thirty?”

“Sure!” Mom and Dad usually got home between 5:30 and 6:00. He could call Mom at her office and tell her his plans. He was fairly certain she’d be cool with it.

“Great. I’ll give George a call. See you at 5:30!”

“Okay. See ya!”

Tim set the phone down and glanced out the bedroom window. His bedroom window overlooked their back yard and the common area of the housing development they lived in. A group of kids were playing on a set of swings in somebody’s back yard.

Another group of kids were getting a scratch game of kickball going. Excited voices echoed through the open window. Tim smiled. It was the last day of school before summer vacation. Despite all the crap he and his family had been through, it was still a good day. He had his friends. He had his family. And that’s all that really mattered.

Tim thumbed the remote control on his boombox and got the radio. Harrisburg’s premiere alternative rock station 105.7 The X was playing Velvet Revolver.

Double cool.

* * *

You wouldn’t know by stepping into Scott’s back yard that there were two dead bodies in the guesthouse.

You’d definitely know once you stepped inside the structure.

The minute Gordon stepped inside with Steve the smell hit him. Heavy, rank, it was overpowering in its intensity. Flies flew around the room, their buzzing loud. Gordon took a double-step back and held his breath. “Holy shit, man!”

Scott was standing by the zombies with Dave. Both boys were dressed in shorts and nothing else. Their torsos gleamed with sweat. Gordon blinked in the haziness of the room, hardly able to breath because of the stink. Steve held his shirt over his mouth.

“Somebody’s gonna smell ‘em pretty soon.”

“Shut your pie hole, Steve,” Scott said. He turned away from the zombies and Gordon wondered if he and Dave were beating up on them. His eyes lit on Dave’s torso and noted irregular splatters of crimson across his pink flesh. “You beating on them?”

“Yeah.” Dave grinned stupidly. For the first time, Gordon noticed something about Dave he didn’t like. He was not only big, he was big and stupid.

“Which one you been beating on?” Gordon asked.

“That one,” Dave said, pointing at their first victim, who was sitting on the floor with his legs splayed out before him.

Gordon took a step toward the zombies, forcing himself to look at them. He didn’t notice Scott watching him as he stepped closer, fighting to contain the sickness that wanted to race out of him.

The first zombie was turning a muddy blue-black. Its hair was falling out, its skin was sloughing off in places, and its remaining eyeball sat crookedly in its socket. The eye they’d injured during the beating that killed him was lying on the ground, with long tendrils sticking out of the empty socket. The zombie’s face was the worst; it was a mismatch of lumps, gaping wounds, and supperating flesh. Its lips were so badly mashed from repeated beatings that they were almost non-existent. It was like looking at a skeleton covered with paper-mache. The zombie looked up at Gordon and made that weird ass noise again. “ Aaaaaauuughhh!”

“Now you’re setting it off again,” Scott said.

It took all of Gordon’s will power to not bolt from the room. Somehow he was able to control the shakiness that wanted to creep into his limbs. Flies swirled around both zombies, landing occasionally. A mass of white squirming maggots could be seen in the eye socket of the first zombie. “I never thought they’d do that,” he said. It sounded lame but what else could he say?

“What about that one?” Steve asked. He pointed to the new zombie, still holding his shirt over his mouth and nose.

“He isn’t rotting as bad as the first one,” Scott admitted. He stepped aside to give Gordon and Steve a better look. Gordon saw what Scott was getting at. The new zombie looked stiffer, albeit still dead. It looked up at them with a blank look in its eyes, not even trying to back away. Its nose looked freshly broken.

“I agree with Steve,” Gordon said. “It smells like shit in here. Somebody’s gonna find out.”

“Nobody’s gonna find out.” Scott gestured for them all to leave and they headed out of the guesthouse.

Despite the availability of fresh air outside, Gordon could still detect the stench of rotting bodies. He took a gulp of air. “Its gonna be double ripe in there once the other one starts rotting.”

“He’s already started,” Scott said. “He’s just not as bad.” The boys spoke in low tones as they walked to the little gazebo in the center of the immense back yard. The farther they got away from the guesthouse, the more the smell diminished. “By this time tomorrow it’ll be kinda gross to hit him.”

“What do you mean?” Steve asked.

“His skin will be fuckin’ sick,” Scott said. “When you hit him it’ll be like hitting a wet butterball turkey.”

Gordon made a face.

Scott laughed.

Dave gestured toward the house. “We should probably shower up if we’re going to that party.”

“You’re right,” Scott said. He turned to Gordon and Steve. “You guys going to Susan Zimmerman’s party?”

“Yeah,” Gordon said. They began walking slowly toward the house. “When are your folks getting home?”

“Dad’s gone all weekend, Mom gets back tomorrow.” Once again, Scott’s parents were on another whirlwind business trip. He wondered when Scott ever saw his parents.

Probably never. Only time Scott would be able to see them was when he got his MBA and joined whatever corporation they worked at; he’d be able to catch up with them in board meetings.

“So we have time, then.”

“Time to get another homeless person? Hell yeah.”

Gordon almost said, I didn’t mean that. He was catching a certain vibe from Scott, a feeling that told him he was being tested. That if he said the wrong thing, that if he made a suggestion of dissent, he would be diminishing himself in Scott’s eyes. He was also getting the feeling that Scott was growing a trifle paranoid. Gordon wouldn’t dream of telling anybody about what was going on, not in a million years. He was involved too deeply now. It had been his idea to turn the first guy into a zombie. If he had the opportunity to simply leave and not come back, he would. But he couldn’t. If he could just stick with it, find a way to somehow convince Scott and the others to not only stop the path they were heading down and maybe find a way to dispose of the two zombies permanently, that would be the best for things all around.

The only thing was, Scott wouldn’t hear of it. Gordon was sure of this implicitly.

And if he even suggested it he’d be deemed a traitor.

“Think we can pull that off soon?” Gordon asked, choosing his words carefully.

“If your mom’s coming home tomorrow, I don’t want her to suspect anything.”

“She won’t,” Scott said, warming up to the idea. A light breeze rustled the trees overhead and the sun felt warm on his back. “We can get somebody tonight.”

“Tonight?” All three boys asked this. They stopped walking, looking at Scott in confusion. Scott stopped, turned around. “You serious?” Steve asked.

“Well, yeah. Why?”

“We’re going to Susan’s party,” Dave said. “Remember that? Susan’s party, going into the inner city to kidnap a homeless guy, two different things. Both activities tens of miles apart.”

Gordon felt nervous but he wasn’t going to tip his hand to the others. He was already thinking of an alternate activity he could get involved in tonight. Anything to avoid the spur-of-the-moment spree of snagging another homeless person and dragging him out to Zuck’s woods tonight so quickly. The last time they’d done that was a complete disaster. Things had worked out fine in the end, but there had been so many opportunities for things to go wrong. There could have been somebody in the woods when the boys arrived with the body. Of course once they’d arrived they had set about burying him, then they’d sat around and talked, eventually falling asleep in the early hours of the morning. Gordon had slept in fits and starts and was awake when the new zombie started clawing its way out of the ground. He’d watched with a sense of numb detachment, hardly believing it was working. He’d woken the other guys up, and they’d secured the zombie pretty quickly and gotten him back into the SUV without any trouble.

But still…

…somebody could have come along at any time. Everything had been done so haphazardly.

There was no question about it. Gordon didn’t want to continue on this path. He wanted to stop. He was freaked out that the spell they’d tried the first time actually worked! He was also disturbed by the fact that this didn’t seem to bother the other guys, especially Scott. They behaved as if it was no big deal.

And they were supposed to be church-going Christians.

“So we’re not going to stay long?” Dave asked.

“We’ll play it by ear,” Scott said. He grinned. Then he headed toward the house.

“Let’s clean this nasty shit off us!”

Gordon glanced at Steve and Dave, who shrugged. Steve and Dave seemed resigned to just follow Scott anywhere he chose to lead them, even if it was over a cliff.

Gordon shrugged too, wanting to voice his opposition but at the same time afraid to.

Then, they followed Scott into the house.

And the sense of dread that was beginning to settle in Gordon’s belly became even heavier as it became evident what Scott was insinuating. They weren’t going into the city to get another homeless person after all. That grin told Gordon all he needed to know.

They were going to lure one of the party-goers back to the house and feed him, or her, to the zombies.

* * *

Tim Gaines wasn’t expecting to attend Susan Zimmerman’s party, but attend it he did.

It had been George’s idea to show up. They had just exited the movie theater and were talking about what they’d just seen when George brought the idea up. “It’s still early. Want to check out Susan’s party?”

“Sure!” Al said.

Tim shrugged. “I guess. Think it’s okay?”

“Why not? Matt said he might be there and I think he was going to bring Chelsea.” He winked at Tim. “Don’t play dumb with me, Tim. I saw how you and Chelsea were checking each other out before we got booted out of school.”

Tim rolled his eyes. “Yeah, right. We’re just friends.”

“Of course you are. Friends that want to be alone so they can suck face.”

Tim didn’t say anything and tried not to look too embarrassed. He’d been mildly attracted to Chelsea since the beginning of this last semester and tried not to let it be known. That obviously had not worked, and it was also obvious that Chelsea felt the same way, which was even more of a shock to Tim’s system. Girls had never liked him, mostly because of the bullshit rumors that had been spread by Heather Watkins and Emily Wynfield back in the seventh grade, but Chelsea was different. She hung out with their crew. She was as much a loner and outcast as he was.

They headed over to Susan Zimmerman’s home, which was on the other side of town. Unlike Tim and his friends, Susan wasn’t a social outcast, but then she wasn’t part of the social elite of Spring Valley High, either. Tim classified Susan as neutral in the whole thing. She was pleasant enough, and she often talked to him in class, but that was about it.

Susan lived with her parents and two younger brothers in a large two story McMansion on Sixth Street. When they arrived there were already twenty kids crowded in the basement rec room swilling punch and soft drinks. Susan’s mom, Cindy, was playing chaperone. She was standing by the refreshment table talking to Lisa Harman and Danielle Allegeny. Panic at the Disco was playing on the stereo. A group of kids Tim recognized from school were playing foosball. Other kids were huddled in groups of three or four, talking.

When they walked into the rec room several kids glanced their way. A few eyebrows rose in surprise, as if to exclaim oh my! The freaks are here! George grinned slightly. Tim was under the impression George was enjoying his new found status as a social outcast. In a perfect world George would have been among the social elite of the student body, with his good looks and athletic build. Instead, he’d chosen to not only be friends with Tim, he was actually enjoying being an outcast!

George nodded at several people as they entered and Tim did the same. With George and Al at his side he was filled with a sudden burst of confidence. Nothing could happen to them here. His friends had his back. He nodded greetings at several kids he knew, some of whom looked away. Others nodded back at them, kids Tim recognized as being neutral to the whole drama he’d experienced the past few years.

As they approached the refreshment table, Al nudged him gently. “Scott and his buddies at ten o’clock.”

Tim nodded. He was looking for Matt and Chelsea. They were nowhere to be seen.

Somebody said, “It’s Count Gaines and his followers.” A nervous laugh followed.

Tim ignored them and smiled at Danielle as she greeted them warmly. George and Al made small talk with Danielle and her friends while he stood by and took subtle glances around the room, taking stock of who was there.

The source of the Count Gaines comment made itself known a moment later.

Dave Bruce and Steve Downing. They were standing five feet away, hanging out with Scott Bradfield and Gordon Smith and another guy Tim recognized from the Spring Valley High football team. Dave grinned stupidly at him and raised his drink in a mock salute. He mouthed the word “Count” and Tim felt a sense of power surge through him.

He grinned. He wasn’t intimidated by these losers anymore. They might be the source of all his problems, but he wasn’t afraid of them.

Gordon glanced their way and when he saw them, he looked away. Tim wondered if it was because he felt guilty about lying to the police about that book. As Tim accepted a glass of punch from Danielle and sipped it, he wondered how his copy of Back From the Dead wound up in the cemetery parking lot in the first place. The only thing he could think of was Gordon had to have left it there, whether by accident or on purpose it didn’t matter. Gordon was the only one who could have left it there, and that meant he was present when that grave was desecrated. The police could find no physical evidence of Tim, Al, or George being anywhere within the vicinity of that cemetery the evening the grave was vandalized, and they hadn’t even tried questioning Gordon again. Doug Fenner had tried suggesting to the police that Gordon and his friends be investigated, but the police dismissed it. It looked like the entire matter was going to be dropped, but that didn’t stop Tim from thinking that Gordon, and quite possibly one of his other loser friends, were the real culprits of the grave vandalism.

And if that was the case, why had they done it? Tim didn’t think they’d have the balls to actually steal the bones of a long interred dead person, much less desecrate a grave, just to frame him. That was going a bit too far.

Tim’s mind was just about to go into overdrive in trying to come up with a scenario for why Gordon and his friends would try to frame him, when George interrupted his thoughts. “Chelsea and Matt just got here.”

Tim turned to the door that led to the back yard. Matt and Chelsea were standing there, looking a bit apprehensive about entering a party composed entirely of kids they hated. Matt was short, with longish blonde hair, and Chelsea was small and slender with black hair that hung to her shoulders. Chelsea saw him and smiled. Tim grinned back.

“What’s up, Count Gaines?”

Tim whirled around and came face to face with Scott Bradfield.

Scott was grinning. Dave, Steve, Gordon, and that football jock framed him on either side. Dave and Steve had those same dumb grins on their faces, as if they were anticipating something. Gordon looked like he didn’t want to be there and wouldn’t meet Tim’s gaze. The football jock looked like he wanted to fight somebody.

“What’s up?” Tim said.

George and Al turned around, too. Al nodded. “Hey, what’s up?”

Scott ignored George and Al, his gaze directed entirely on Tim. “Never thought I’d see you here tonight, Count. Getting pretty brave.”

“I guess I am.”

“Congratulations on getting your new friends suspended from school.”

“Thank you!” Tim grinned.

“This the motherfucker that tried to throw you under the bus, Gordon?” The football jock glowered at Tim, his blue eyes fiery pits.

“He’s cool, John,” Gordon said, still not looking at Tim.

“Actually, you’re right, John,” Scott said. “Gaines has a nasty habit of practicing witchcraft and doing weird shit and then trying to blame his crimes on other people. I wouldn’t worry about him, though. He’s been put in his place enough times.”

“You best not be fucking with my boys, asshole,” football jock said. His gaze did not waver from Tim. For his part, Tim did not look away.

“Count Gaines knows not to fuck with us,” Scott said.

“That’s true,” Tim said, not dropping his own gaze. He smiled. “I have better things to do.”

Football jock blinked. He looked like he did not know how to interpret this.

Scott glanced at Matt and Chelsea. His smile grew wider. “We were just going to make our own party at my place. Want to hang out with us, Chelsea?”

“Nope,” Chelsea said. She was suddenly at Tim’s side. “Like Tim said, I have better things to do.”

Scott put on a mock surprise of hurt. “Aw, now is that any way to treat a guy who shows interest in you?”

“You show interest in all the girls, Scott,” Chelsea said. “And besides, what would Rebecca think?”

“She’s not here,” Scott said.

“How come she isn’t here?” George asked politely. “You two still going out?”

Scott shrugged. “You know how it is. Girls like to have the occasional night off from arm candy duty.”

Dave tried to hurl another insult Tim’s way. “But you wouldn’t know that, Tim.”

“You’d be surprised,” Chelsea answered for him.

Muted giggles rose from Scott’s band of nitwits. The old instinct to blush never came to Tim. Instead he felt strong, positive. “Have a pleasant evening, gentlemen.” Then he turned and, as if on cue, George, Al, Matt, and Chelsea followed suit. They headed toward the sliding glass doors that led to the back yard.

“Hey, wait! Where you going?” Scott broke off from his pack to follow them.

George paused long enough to address Scott. “We’re taking off. See you later.”

Football jock looked like he still wanted to fight somebody. He joined Scott in attempting to follow them outside. Tim could feel the penetrating gaze of football jock’s eyes on his back and was somewhat relieved when Danielle stepped in to intervene. “Hey Scott, John, come here, I’ve got something for you guys.”

As they stepped into the back yard, Tim thought he heard the other guys mutter behind their backs. “Fucking weirdos,” and “They fuckin’ walked away from us! Did you see that shit?” This did not make him nervous. Instead, it made him mad.

George nodded at Tim as they gathered in the back yard. A small knot of kids were gathered beneath the glare of the sodium lights that blazed down on the immense lower back deck. Tim recognized some of them on sight but didn’t know them. “Let’s get out of here,” George said.

The others murmured agreement, and Tim tossed his hardly-touched glass of punch in the garbage can that had been set on the deck.

Scott poked his head out, his attention directed to Chelsea. “Ditch those losers and come to my house. 143 Hemingway Drive. We’ll be chilling out in the living room.”

“In your dreams,” Chelsea said, turning her back to him as she left with the guys.

“Bitch,” Scott muttered, and the rest of what he said to his friends was drowned out as they hurried around the house and up the incline that led to the front yard. Tim felt an urgency to get in the car and get as far away from this party as possible. He was absolutely certain now that Scott was giving his marching orders to his crew: come on, guys, that little bitch turned me down, she’s following Count Gaines like a bitch in heat, we need to put her in her place just like we did with Tim back in sixth grade. He could definitely sense it, and he had a feeling the others could too. George and Al sprinted ahead of them to the car and Matt called out, “Chelsea and I parked right out front, we’ll follow you guys!” George acknowledged them and then they were in Al’s car, pulling away from the curb, making a U turn and heading out of the neighborhood. And as they passed the house, Tim saw Scott and his crew in the front yard, watching as they drove by. A moment later they moved as one solid unit toward a row of parked vehicles. Tim glanced in the rearview mirror, saw the twin headlights of Matt’s little Mazda behind them and he leaned forward from his position in the backseat. “Scott and his buddies are following us.”

“Time to lose them,” Al said, accelerating quickly. Matt followed closely, and Tim held his breath as the chase commenced.

Chapter Fifteen

It had taken them all night, but they’d finally procured themselves some zombie food.

Scott panted heavily. The others stood around the zombie food in a rough semi-circle of the guesthouse living room, out of breath from the struggle. Even Gordon had gotten in on the act. Earlier in the evening, Scott was becoming strongly of the opinion that Gordon was about to pussy out. He’d been pleasantly surprised when Gordon joined in enthusiastically, landing a few blows to Zombie Food’s kidneys. Zombie Food had not wanted to come to the house even through all the wining and dining they’d bestowed throughout the evening. In a way it had been like a courtship dance. The chance meeting at Susan Zimmerman’s party, the attempt at small-talk, casting the initial reel. And then of course there’d been the subtle jabs of insult from both parties, made in good humor, of course, but a ritual that had to be undertaken to let down their prey’s guard. To make Zombie Food think that things were normal.

And it worked.

Zombie Food had always been somewhat adversarial with them, even before tonight. The chance meeting at Susan’s was like destiny. They’d appealed to Zombie Food’s basic instincts, said all the right things and, before they knew it, Zombie Food was hanging out with them.

Needless to say, Zombie Food was in the process of leaving the party with those that had delivered it to Susan’s house. In fact, it had almost gotten out of their collective grasp, but they’d chased it down, captured it, wined and dined it, and encouraged Zombie Food to stay. They’d brought Zombie Food back into Susan’s house and continued their courtship. They were determined to win Zombie Food over for the night.

And at some point during the evening, they’d convinced Zombie Food to come over to Scott’s house. They’d made the suggestion earlier in the evening, but Zombie Food had rebuffed them in that condescending tone they knew so well. Scott and his friends laughed at this. Don’t be silly, was their refrain. We have much in common. We will have fun. You’ll see. We can bury the past, forge ahead and leave our differences behind us. What do you say?

And somehow, it worked. They’d convinced Zombie Food to come with them, since it now lacked adequate transportation. They would provide transportation to Zombie Food’s home at the end of the evening, they said aloud while they were standing outside in a rough semi-circle in front of Susan’s house. Zombie Food did not have a car.

Scott had grinned. “No problem,” he’d said. “We’ll get you home! Come with us!”

And Zombie Food had gone with them.

Once at the house they’d hung out in the living room and plied Zombie Food with booze. It turned out that Zombie Food liked to drink. In fact, Zombie Food’s beverage of choice was Jack and Coke, which Scott had. He served up the concoction from his parent’s liquor cabinet and retrieved beers for the rest of the guys as they sprawled in the family room on sofas and comfy chairs and relaxed. Zombie Food began to get drunk and they encouraged it to let loose. Zombie Food was among friends now! Zombie Food could relax.

And Zombie Food did.

An hour later, when Zombie Food was good and plastered and mouthing off about Spring Valley High’s Principal, who they all agreed was a colossal douchebag, Scott signaled the guys into action and they attacked. They swarmed over Zombie Food, kicking and punching, sending Zombie Food to the floor amid a flurry of blows that quickly put an end to Phase One.

Scott glanced up at them, barely able to contain his enthusiasm. He grinned. “It’s feeding time!”

He grabbed Zombie Food’s arm, and Dave grabbed the other arm. Steve and Gordon helped, and as a unit they led a bloodied Zombie Food out of the house, through the darkened back yard and to the guest house.

Zombie Food was out of it. Conscious, bleeding about the face and head, Zombie Food made semi-conscious moaning sounds. Scott unlocked the door to the guest house and they got Zombie Food inside, shutting the door behind them.

Somebody turned on the light.

The two zombies stood shackled in their corner, looking towards them. The younger zombie’s eyes raised in surprise. “Eeeehhhaa!” he bleated. The older zombie regarded them with that dead look in its remaining eye. A low rumble seemed to issue from deep in its chest. It was hard to get a read on what the zombies were thinking. Their dead faces were slack, expressionless. Could zombies bear expressions like surprise?

Hate? Fear? They’d seemed fearful last time. Now it was hard to tell.

“Got you some dinner, zombies!” David said, his voice a lilting sing-song.

Steve chuckled. “You’re gonna like this one, guys. This fucker deserves it.”

They let Zombie Food fall to the floor and stood over him, waiting for a reaction.

From the moment he saw John Elfman at Susan Zimmerman’s party, Scott knew he was going to be the next one. John had been a thorn in their side since eighth grade.

While Scott, Dave, and Steve all played various sports in school and in general had been on pretty friendly terms with the other jocks, John Elfman was the exception. John was a jock all the way, playing varsity football, basketball, and baseball. He was also on the track team. Sports were John’s life. Academically he was a C average student and that was generous. Personally, Scott thought John had all the intelligence of a piece of driftwood.

The zombies stared at them, not even straining at their shackles to get at John.

Dave sounded panicked. “Guys, if this doesn’t work—”

“It’s gonna work,” Scott said, his adrenalin surging. “He’s like us. Remember what I told you on the way over to Susan’s?”

Gordon nodded and the others definitely understood. On the way to Susan’s, Scott had theorized that the reason the first zombie did not eat the homeless guy (now known as zombie #2) was because it recognized him as a kindred soul. However, if they’d retained any semblence of their former selves they might react differently to a guy like John, who, Scott theorized, would spark not only fear, but might also provoke them to attack in defense or anger.

And through that attack he hoped to spark a feeding response in them. If, that is, they were anything like the zombies he knew of in horror movies.

Scott lifted John up by his armpits. “We gotta throw him into the zombies. Help me.”

As Scott lifted John, Steve stepped up to help. Together, the two of them dragged John over and then they shoved him into the zombies.

As John fell in a sprawling heap on the zombies, they moved back and made those guttural sounds again. “Aaaugggh! Maaaguuughhh! ”

And then with seemingly lightning speed, the switch was flicked.

They attacked.

John hadn’t even hit the ground yet when Zombie #1 grabbed his arm and yanked him up. As John was hauled up, Zombie #2 dove forward and clamped his jaws in the hollow of his neck.

John’s eyes flew open and he screamed.

The zombies tore into John in a frenzy.

Scott took an involuntary step backward; they all did. He couldn’t tear his gaze away from John struggling in the zombies’ grip as they tore and bit into his flesh.

Zombie #2 had torn a chunk of flesh from John’s neck and was chewing it.

Zombie #1’s fingernails made deep gouges in John’s arm as he sought firm purchase, trying to get a foothold on what was offered. Zombie #1’s face dove forward and bit a chunk of John’s cheek away from his face, the flesh tearing away with a wet ripping sound. John’s scream became a gurgle as Zombie #2’s long-nailed fingers clawed into his belly, pushing their way through hard muscle. Blood flowed, and John struggled furiously as he was held firmly by the two zombies.

Scott watched, not breathing. Beside him Dave, Steve, and Gordon stood with tense expressions, their features showing a mixture of fear, excitement and awe.

“Holy shit,” Steve murmured.

“Fuck!” Dave said.

Gordon said nothing, as did Scott.

John was caught in the grip of the zombies. His eyes were wide with pain and fright, pleading in urgency to be saved. He reached out a bloodied arm and screamed again as Zombie #2 tore a chunk of flesh from it and shoved it into its mouth. A gout of blood geyesered from the wound and that seemed to be the end of the struggle for John.

He collapsed, almost sagging to the ground, but the zombies kept him propped up as they tore into him and devoured him.

Rotted teeth tore into flesh. Decayed fingers with hard bone and nails pierced tender meat, tearing open muscle and gristle. Zombie #2’s fingers dug into John’s belly again, this time securing better hold, and ripped it open, exposing John’s digestive system. A horrible smell arose, a mixture of blood, and bile. Zombie #2 pulled something out, some unidentifiable organ that burst open when it fell to the ground.

Another odor was released that overwhelmed him. Scott turned away, gagging, and he stepped back, seeking fresh air.

“Fuck,” Dave said again, following him.

“Shit,” Gordon said. He went further, heading outside into the night.

Scott took one final glance back before he followed his friends outside. John was on the ground now, on his back. The zombies were still feeding in a frenzied manner but John was no longer struggling. His sightless eyes stared upward.

Scott stumbled outside and closed the door behind him. He took a deep breath of the night air and fought to retain his equilibrium. The sights and smells from inside made him swoon. He closed his eyes for a moment, struggling to contain his wits. His friends were doing the same thing; nobody wanted to be the first to puke.

“Holy fuck, man,” Steve said, his voice slightly strangled. He staggered away, heading toward the gazebo.

One by one they followed Steve, where they sat down on the benches that lined the gazebo’s interior. Scott slumped down, taking deep breaths. He felt light-headed but was beginning to feel calm, more in control. He sat there for a moment catching his breath, waiting for the sickness to subside.

Steve broke the silence. He let out a slight chuckle, his voice low, excited.

“Goddamn man…that was fucking intense! Did you see that shit?”

“No shit, man,” Dave said, his tone of voice equally excited.

“I can’t believe I’m saying this,” Scott said, still coming down from the excitement buzz. “But I have to say that was the most fucked up thing I’ve ever seen.”

“Me too!” Dave clapped Gordon on the back. “You did it, man! You made real zombies!”

“Yeah, I did,” Gordon said. He looked at the others and smiled. Scott smiled back.

Gordon’s face was flushed and Scott could see why. What happened in that guest house was some intense shit and they all looked blind-sided by it, but at the same time it was awesome.

“Tell me the truth,” Scott said to Gordon. “Did you know that would happen?”

Gordon shook his head. “No. I didn’t. I had an idea it might happen, but…” He shook his head. “I didn’t know it would happen like that.”

Neither did I, Scott thought. He took one last deep breath and stood up. “Let’s go inside and get a drink.”

They got up and headed into the house.

* * *

It was a good thing the attack had momentarily shocked the other guys. It helped explain Gordon’s own expression.

Gordon reclined in the living room easy chair, nursing a beer as the other guys relived the attack in excited tones. He grinned and made the occasional comment, especially when it came to John Elfman. “That fucker’s had this coming to him,” Gordon said. “Sonofabitch has been nothing but a complete asshole since the day we met him.”

“You got that right,” Scott said. He pounded his beer, set the bottle down on the coffee table. “Good riddance.”

“Did you see the way he looked at us when the zombies were eating him?” Steve exclaimed. He was the most excited of the bunch. He was pacing the living room, his lanky figure jittery with adrenalin that the alcohol was having no effect on. “He looked like he was crying to us for help!”

“What a dumb shit,” Dave said. He settled back on the sofa. “I still can’t believe that idiot came with us. Like he thought everything was going to be cool.”

“No shit,” Gordon said. John Elfman had been a thorn in his side, too, but not enough to kill him.

“So what do we do now?” Dave was looking at Scott. He took a swig of beer.

“I don’t know,” Scott said. He looked contemplative. “I guess we’ll have to wait and see how much of John gets eaten.”

“Shit’s gonna be a bitch to clean up,” Steve said. He finally plopped himself down on an easy chair.

“Yeah, it is,” Scott agreed. He took a sip of his own beer. “But it’s gotta be done.

Dried blood is just gonna smell after while.”

“Those zombies are gonna smell worse,” Gordon said.

Scott nodded. For the first time he looked like he was seriously considering the complications of keeping two zombies in his guesthouse. “I say tomorrow we check and see what kind of mess we have. If there’s any pieces of John left, we snag them and burn them in the fireplace. Then we secure the zombies and clean all the blood and shit in the room. That will take care of that.”

“And then we hang those fucking air fresheners all over,” Steve suggested.

“That’ll mask the smell.”

Scott nodded. “Exactly. There’s gonna be a week or so of some nasty ass rankness coming out of there and we have to mask it as much as possible.”

“What are we going to tell people if they ask us what happened to John?” Gordon asked. He’d reached a sort of zen state as far as fitting in with the mood of the general group; inside he was absolutely horrified over what they’d done and witnessed. He was more terrified of his own part in it. I helped make this happen, he thought. If I hadn’t gotten that book from Gaines, hadn’t suggested we turn them into zombies—

“Nobody saw us leave Susan’s party,” Dave said. “I made sure of that.”

“And he didn’t say anything to anybody else,” Steve confirmed. “John just talked to us.”

“His friends left him,” Gordon added.

Scott nodded. “If the cops ask where he went we just tell him we don’t know.”

“And if somebody did see him get into the car with us, we tell the cops we dropped him off on Mill Valley Road near his house.”

They all nodded. Mill Valley Road was in a remote area of the county. It would be perfectly plausible for somebody to be dropped off there with no witnesses. It would be their collective word against anybody else’s.

“But we don’t volunteer that information,” Dave said.

“That won’t work,” Gordon said, his mind working at all the angles. “If we say that we don’t know what happened to him during a first round of questioning, then they find somebody who saw John getting into the SUV with us outside of Susan’s and they come back to us with that and we say, ‘oh yeah, well we did drive him home, but John wanted to be dropped off on Mill Valley Road. He wanted to sober up before he went home.’ We say that, it’ll look like we’re trying to hide something.”

“So we should contact the police and volunteer this information?” Scott asked.

“No. We just mention it the first time the police question us. If the police don’t question us, we don’t say anything.”

Scott mulled this over. It was a good approach. “I agree,” he said. He regarded the others, more confident. “This stays between us. If any of us is questioned separately we stick to the same story. John met up with us at Susan’s, we talked, he was really drunk and we drove him home, only he wanted to be dropped off at Mill Valley Road. That’s the last we saw of him. We don’t deviate from this simple story. Not one bit. Got me?”

The others nodded and Gordon grinned at him. “Yes sir, Master Scott!”

Dave and Steve laughed at this, guzzling their beers. Gordon cracked a grin. His take-charge demeanor was working.

In reality, he was a complete mess.

They spent the rest of the evening drinking and talking, reliving the incident.

Gordon was mostly silent, observing his friends with subtle glances. They were gung ho, excited about what they’d done and they laughed about how they’d pulled one over on their long-hated nemesis. At one point Steve suggested they feed one of their other enemies to the zombies and Scott brought up Tim Gaines again. That was when Gordon spoke up. “We do that, especially if we’re questioned about John, the police are going to zero in on us,” he said. “The fact that they questioned me about losing that book at the cemetery is enough to nail me, but you guys have a history with him.” He settled his gaze on Scott. “And they’ll put two and two together.”

Scott sighed. “Fuck, I hate it when you’re rational.”

“Yeah,” Dave chuckled. “Thanks for blowing that particular fantasy, Gord.”

“He’s right, though,” Scott said. He drained the rest of his beer and quickly retrieved more. In the past hour they’d gone through a complete case. Scott’s parents wouldn’t notice. “Okay, so I guess the next one is just gonna have to be another homeless person.”

“Let’s nab one next week!” Steve said.

“I’m for that,” Dave agreed.

“First we gotta clean up what’s left of John and do what we can to mask the smell of those zombies,” Scott said. He was addressing all of them now and Gordon leaned forward, wanting to be involved in cleanup. It was his ass too. “We can’t get plastered tonight. We need to be sober enough to check them out in a few hours. If they’ve stopped eating, then we get them tied up and—”

“How the hell are we going to do that if they’re still hostile?” Steve asked.

“Okay, so maybe we can’t tie them up,” Scott conceded. He was beginning to look frustrated. “We can…I don’t know…get some gardening tools like rakes and shit to pull body parts over to us and get rid of whatever’s left over. We’ll burn them. And as for the blood on the floor, we can throw lime on it.”

“Where the hell are we going to get lime?” Steve asked.

“There’s a bag of it in the gardening shed,” Scott answered. “Our gardener uses it.”

Gordon’s mind was working, thinking about all of this. “I think we can pull this off. Air fresheners to mask the smell is the next step. I say after we get whatever remains of John’s body out of there, we get some sleep, then three of us split up in opposite directions in the morning and get some air fresheners. Scott should stay here in case somebody comes around. Me, Dave, and Steve could head out to different counties to get air fresheners.”

“A whole shitload of them,” Dave said.

“Not enough to arouse suspicion,” Gordon said. He was surprising himself with how logical he was in his thinking process. “I say we make three stops each, in different parts of our assigned counties.”

Scott nodded. “Good idea. I say grab ten from every store you hit. That’ll give you thirty each.”

“That’s ninety tops,” Steve said. “That’ll be enough.”

“I’ll hit Dauphin County,” Gordon said. “Dave can hit York County and Steve can take Berks.”

The others were enthused with these plans. Scott got up and began collecting the empty beer bottles. Dave began to help clean up and Gordon joined in. As they cleaned the living room, Gordon worked everything over in his mind. This effort at covering their tracks would work. He was positive of it. They’d been careful until the last week, when they’d accidentally killed Zombie #2, and tonight, when they’d lured John away from Susan’s party. That had been an incredibly stupid thing to do, and Gordon had been against the idea from the beginning. The more he’d argued against luring somebody away from Susan’s party with the idea of feeding them to the zombies, the more Gordon realized that not only were the other three completely serious about it, but Scott was beginning to send shards of disappointment at him. He didn’t want to give Scott the impression he was going against the group. He wanted to appear that he was firmly on their side.

He didn’t want to give Scott the excuse to eventually feed him to the zombies.

Gordon had caught a little buzz while they spent the past hour reliving the feeding, and now as he assisted in living room cleanup he sobered up instantly. He still felt afraid for what was to come and felt a sense of shame at himself for what he’d participated in, but he was going to deal with it. He had to do something. Things were already going too far. It was only going to get worse in the days and weeks to come.

He had to put a stop to this somehow. Not to save somebody the pain and horror of being eaten. Not to save another homeless person.

He had to save his own skin.

He didn’t want to get in trouble.

Couldn’t afford to get in any kind of trouble of this magnitude.

As Gordon loaded the dishwasher he thought about his future, which was something he was beginning to take seriously, thanks to long talks with his parents. He wanted to go to college. His grades were fairly decent, and he was interested in Engineering. He wanted to go to college, major in Engineering, carve a future for himself.

If he were arrested for the crimes he’d participated in, that would blow his future. He couldn’t let that happen. Why Scott wasn’t thinking about that was bewildering. Scott got better grades than Gordon, had a chance at being accepted into a good university. Scott’s parents were very successful executives and he knew they were grooming Scott for a similar path. Was Scott’s uncaring attitude rebellion against his parents? That was Gordon’s impression, but no way was he going to suggest this to Scott. That would only spell trouble.

The only way he could extract himself from this was to assist in cleaning up this latest mess, offer ways to cover their tracks, and then work on providing alibis for himself for the nights they kidnapped the two homeless people and John.

As Gordon finished loading the dishwasher he felt confident he could cover all of his tracks. He could also provide an excuse for not being able to participate in further trips into the bigger cities for future zombie procurement. He could take off for the Jersey shore to spend time with his grandparents, say that his parents had made him go and he couldn’t really get out of it. He friends believe that.

But there was the lingering problem of Zuck’s woods and the spell.

He had to break it somehow.

Scott broke his silent reverie by entering the kitchen bearing an empty garbage can. “Ready to take a look in the guest house to see what kind of work we have cut out for us?”

“The sooner the better,” Gordon answered. He closed and locked the dishwasher, turned it on.

Scott set the empty garbage can down and filled it with a new plastic lining. Steve and Dave had finished their respective tasks and were huddled near the rear sliding doors that led to the back yard. Gordon walked over to join them, already thinking of what he had to do next.

Talk to Count Gaines. Find out if there was a spell that would counter the one he’d cast in the woods.

Of course, that would mean confiding to Gaines.

Could he trust Tim Gaines?

He had to. If Gordon wanted to pry himself out of this mess, he had to extend a modicum of trust to Tim. Maybe he wouldn’t have to tell Gaines everything, maybe he could—

He debated this in his mind as he walked outside and headed toward the guest house with the guys. Tim Gaines was smart. He’d figure out what had happened. He would try to use this information and take it to the police.

But would they believe him?

Gordon didn’t think they would. The new Dean of the school, Jim Simmons, didn’t trust Gaines. The physical evidence of the grave robbery pointed to Gaines. And while it was largely unspoken, local perception of Gaines wasn’t very favorable.

Everything he did was against the status quo, from his reading material to his taste in music, to his attitude. That perception was deep-seated, had settled firmly in the consciousness of pretty much everybody in town. It wouldn’t take much to plant further seeds of doubt in the public perception of Gaines and his new friends. All it required was digging some dirt on Al and George. Al would be easy. The guy had skated on the edge of being an outsider ever since the eighth grade, he hung out with Matt and Chelsea, and his parents used to be hippies or something like that. He’d have to do some digging on George, but he knew he could do it. He used to live in Dauphin County. An Internet search would probably reveal info on him. He could find some of George’s former classmates on MySpace or something, find out what he was like, then twist the feedback he received to dovetail with what was happening now.

He had law enforcement on his side. He had dirt. It would be easy to blackmail Gaines into helping him.

Help me find a spell to counteract what you helped me with in Zuck’s Woods and I won’t furnish the police with more evidence that you robbed that grave in Reamstown.

Gordon’s confidence was solid now. He knew Gaines wanted this latest episode to go away. He’d probably do anything to get the police to drop the whole matter. He could even sweeten the deal by assuring him that it wouldn’t happen again, which was true.

Gordon had no intention of messing with that black magic shit again. The guys had no inclination to try it themselves, and Gordon doubted they even remembered the title of the book in question he’d gotten the spell from. They’d be unable to duplicate his efforts for another go round.

This was going to work.

They approached the guest house and Scott stepped forward, gripping the doorknob firmly. He glanced back at the others and Gordon met his gaze with fierce determination. Let’s get this done. Scott nodded, and then he opened the door.

Chapter Sixteen

Ripple effects.

Like throwing a stone in a still body of water, an individual’s actions reverberate through life. A manufacturing plant manager laying off workers with a stroke of a pen to pad the compensation of the company executives affected those workers’ families, their wives and children. A slip down the economic ladder could mean hard times both financially and psychologically. In the mind of a child, that slip could mean a drastic change in their future that would, in turn, affect their future partners, their future children, and anybody whose lives they touched. Likewise, the choices one made upon deciding whether or not to enter college had similar effects. Choose the wrong major and stay with it for the wrong reasons and one could end up a lonely, bitter, angry person who, in turn, could affect everybody they touched in their lives.

So it was with magic.

And it did not concern the forces beyond who bestowed the practitioner of magic with their dark boons.

Their job was to grant the magician their wish.

No more, no less.

The ritual performed by Gordon Smith had been set to do its deed. The elements had fallen into place; the correct words had been spoken.

And the dark forces had answered.

And like all things, the ripple effect was in motion.

Flowing through the netherworld tide it reverberated, echoed. It sank into the ground, gathering strength through the ebbs and flows. It had been strong enough to reanimate and take possession of Neal Ashford when his lifeless, beaten body was buried in the consecrated ground and its strength was still present when Roger Gahan (who had lost his wallet two nights before being kidnapped by Scott Bradfield and his crew) was kidnapped, murdered and buried in the same spot. Building on its initial strength, and the new power it found through its simple task, that strength spread. It seeped through the ground, touching everything that had died and sunk into the earth. It moved slowly, creeping in a manner that was transparent to human perception.

A colony of ants killed by an invading colony was the first. Reanimated, the ants moved around sluggishly, as if confused in their destroyed labyrinths.

Farther in the woods the carcass of a mole, dead of a heart attack, was reanimated by the force’s power. It burrowed through the ground, still forever blind, searching for something that it could not comprehend.

The leaves of the trees overhead stirred. Birds in flight began to avoid the consecrated spot. Likewise, animals normally found in this section of the woods–deer, foxes, rodents, snakes–began to instinctively steer clear of it.

And the power slowly spread, reaching outward. Touching and awakening more dead life forms, calling them forth.

* * *

It was Wednesday morning and Tim Gaines was reclining on the leather sofa in the living room watching the news. He was tired. Last night, he’d gone out with Chelsea on his first date with her–she’d actually driven them into Lancaster to the Manor Theater to see the new Chronicles of Narnia movie. It had been a pleasant evening and thinking back on it sent tingles of pleasure through Tim. Even though it was pretty much common knowledge that they were attracted to each other, there was still that awkwardness between them. That all evaporated after the movie, when Chelsea parked her car in the community guest parking lot of his development and they talked. It had been so easy to talk to her now that the barrier between them was crumbling. He felt comfortable with her; still nervous, but comfortable. So when conversation abruptly died in mid sentence and the silence threatened to bridge that gap again, Chelsea had leaned forward quickly and kissed him.

And Tim had surprised himself by kissing her back.

He’d never kissed a girl before and he was surprised to find that his body just seemed to know what to do. From the gentle embraces, to the movement of lips and mouth, teeth and tongue, to the way he responded to her touches, her kisses, everything just came to him. The stirring in his groin was a natural reaction to that very physical coming together of their bodies, and Tim felt a momentary burst of panic. He didn’t want Chelsea to have the wrong impression of him; he wasn’t like all those other guys that lived only to get into a girl’s pants and then dump them. He wanted this to be special!

At the same time, he wanted her so badly.

And he sensed that Chelsea knew this.

And she responded accordingly.

She’d pressed herself against him and he could feel her breasts against his shirt.

That only made him more crazy, more responsive to her touch, her caresses, her kisses.

He let himself go, gave up control to his body’s instincts and expressed his desire for her through his own touch.

He didn’t know how long they made out in her car but at some point she stopped and held him. Tim opened his eyes, noted that the windows of the car were steamed up and he smiled. Chelsea told him that she should go–her curfew was midnight and it was already eleven-thirty. She started the car, rolled down the windows, laughing at the fact that they were steamed up. Tim had laughed too and she backed the car out of the parking slot and drove the dozen houses down to his condo unit and pulled up in front of it. She told him she’d talk to him tomorrow morning. He told her that would be great. They kissed one more time, quick, but still passionate, and then he was out of the car and heading toward the front door, feeling a momentary sense of panicked embarrassment.

God, I hope my folks didn’t peek out the window as she pulled up to the house.

But those fears were laid to rest when he entered the house and saw his mom reclining on the sofa, the TV on, her eyes half shut. She’d looked up at him wearily, asked how his evening was and he’d smiled and said fine. Then he’d gone upstairs.

Where he’d stayed and relived the moment in the privacy of his bedroom.

And didn’t fall asleep.

At some point Mom came upstairs to bed. Tim went downstairs quietly, turned on the TV, and sat down in the darkened living room. His excitement was fueling his wakefulness and he could not go to sleep. He channel-surfed for a while, then headed to the kitchen for a snack.

A light tap on the sliding glass door caught his attention.

Chelsea was on the back deck. When she saw Tim, she grinned.

Tim had quietly opened the back door and before he had a chance to ask what she was doing, Chelsea was in his arms.

Somehow they kept quiet. And when it was over and they were re-arranging their clothes, Chelsea gave him a quick kiss, told him she just couldn’t help it, she had to come back. Tim had grinned back, told her he hadn’t been able to keep her out of his mind since she’d dropped him off, and then she was leaving out the back door. He watched her shadowy figure dance across the yard and between the utility shed his father had built and the fence that bordered their property with the neighboring house, then down the common area to where he knew the guest parking for the development was located. A moment later he heard a car engine start. Only then did Tim close the back door.

And now it was the following morning and Tim had relived his evening with Chelsea too many times to count. Everything about the date was perfect; the physical expression of their feelings toward each other last night had been the icing on the cake.

Preceding that had been their conversation at the theater and in the car, where they’d talked about everything. School, their families, friends. Tim had brought her up on the latest in the investigation. How the police still hadn’t pressed formal criminal charges against him, or George and Al, but on the advice of their attorney they were on a sort of house arrest. Chelsea had raised an eyebrow at that and asked if he was on house arrest, why did his parents let him go to the movies with her? Tim could only shrug and grin. “I guess as long as they know we’re going to the movies, they’re cool with it.”

In reality, the house arrest wasn’t mandatory, but was suggested until their attorney could get the police to drop the investigation or file charges. Should something else happen in the interim, it was important they had firm alibis, and if they could verify they were at home, so much the better. It made sense.

It also kept them safe.

Thanks to the local weekly newspaper, the Spring Valley Gazette, they had every reason now to stay close to home due to a story published in last week’s edition.

According to the story, which stated in a bold eighteen point headline: local teenagers involved in occult activity accused of grave-robbery, other satanic activity, Tim and his friends were all but tarred and feathered. The article straddled a thin line between sensational journalism and reporting the basic facts. It started off by relating the incident at Reamstown Cemetery, including the police questioning of Tim Gaines due to the evidence found (an occult paperback, according to the paper—nitwits couldn’t differentiate between fiction and non-fiction), and then proceeded to lay out a thinly-veiled indictment of him. It wasn’t enough to support a libel suit, which was the first thing his mother thought of when she read the piece. Their attorney, Doug Fenner, after a careful reading, broke that news gently, and it was he who suggested the house arrest.

“The only way we can nail them is when we get the police to drop the investigation completely and hopefully arrest another suspect in the cemetery desecration. If they can do that we might have a case. But for now…we don’t.”

The background material in the article was simple enough in its noting the facts of the past six years from the school records at Spring Valley Middle School and High School; from the accusations that Tim had drawn occult symbols on students lockers and books, to the more outlandish ones where some of the more boneheaded kids swore he’d cast spells on them. There were a few comments on record that the reporter managed to get for the piece, including one from that bitch Heather Watkins, in which she dug up that old chestnut from ninth grade–that Tim had sacrificed her cat and not only told her about it, but informed her that he’d hexed her. It didn’t matter that the police had later dismissed the allegations, and it didn’t matter that this wasn’t reported in the article. As Mom had said the night the article came out, “Who the fuck wrote this? Some idiot that flunked journalism school?”

Dad had written a very long letter to the paper taking them to task for their shoddy reporting. He also set blame on the paper for placing the Gaines family in danger; since the article’s publication they’d received a dozen death threats by phone and had several dozen drive-bys where people yelled obscenities. While the majority of the citizens of Spring Valley were level-headed people, it seemed that a tiny minority of them not only believed everything they read and were told about Tim, they felt the need to put him and his parents in danger when there was no solid proof he’d committed any crime.

Furthermore, he wrote, Tim had never been convicted of a crime despite being made the social pariah of town. He concluded by addressing the Spring Valley Police department directly: either file criminal charges against my son or cease your investigation and make a public apology.

That had been three days ago, on a Sunday. Dad’s letter had not been published yet (he wondered if the editors of the paper would publish it in its entirety, if at all), and as Tim thought about it, not even paying attention to the news on TV, he added a few more things he’d noticed in the days since the article’s publication. How the police and Spring Valley High’s principal weren’t returning their calls. How Dad casually mentioned the other night how a once friendly colleague at work was now silent around him, refusing to speak to him (the guy in question lived in Spring Valley). For her part, Mom was looking into moving out of the area. Tim had overheard his parents talking about this Sunday night and his heart sank as he detected the seriousness in their voices. As much as he realized it was the rational thing to do, to wipe the slate clean and start fresh, he felt a tinge of sadness that he would be forced to leave his friends. He also felt a heartsickness at the thought of leaving Chelsea. In the days before their date they’d talked constantly on the phone, and Tim could feel that the attraction was not only mutual, but was preparing to build to a new level. He didn’t want to destroy any hope he had with her.

But he knew that in the grand scheme of things, what was happening to him and his family was very serious. For his sake, for the sake of his future, for the sake of his parents, they had to leave.

A sudden knock on the front door snapped Tim out of his thoughts. He turned down the TV’s volume with the remote, then got up and headed to the front door.

Gordon Smith stood on the front porch. He tilted his head in a greeting. “Hey, Tim. What’s up?”

Tim’s stomach clenched. A burst of anger flared within him. “What do you want?”

“I need to talk to you.”

“Really? Maybe you should talk to me through my attorney. I’ll get you his number.” He was just about to close the door in Gordon’s face, the anger and rage racing through him now so much it took all his will-power to control it.

“Wait! I need your help!”

Tim paused and something in Gordon’s voice and demeanor diluted his anger.

“You need my help? Are you out of your mind? I tried to help you before but you framed me!”

“I know and I’m sorry!” For the first time Tim saw a look on Gordon’s face he’d never seen before. Fear. “But you’re the only person I can come to with this. It’s about—“

“You think I can trust you now after you lied to the police?”

“No, I don’t.” Gordon hesitated a moment, and now Tim’s anger subsided even more. The look of fear in Gordon’s eyes was genuine.

Tim dropped his guard slightly. “What’s going on?”

“It’s about that book you loaned me and why the police found it at Reamstown Cemetery,” Gordon began. “And its about…some really fucked up shit that’s been going on because of it.”

“The only fucked up shit is you vandalizing a cemetery and trying to blame me for it,” Tim muttered.

“I admit, I vandalized that grave,” Gordon said. “But it wasn’t done with the intention of framing you, I swear. It was to…gather material…to cast a spell…”

Now it was Tim’s turn to be surprised. “What?”

Gordon glanced around the neighborhood. “Can I come in? I’ll tell you everything.”

Tim almost told him no at that point. Almost told him to fuck off, but something about Gordon’s demeanor spoke to him. He’s scared out of his mind.

That decided it. He opened the screen door. “Come in.”

Gordon stepped inside and Tim shut the door.

* * *

As Gordon began telling Tim the events of the past few weeks, Tim felt a strange sense of disbelief along with a mixture of dread.

Tim was sitting in the easy chair by the living room window, Gordon on the sofa.

He’d retrieved cokes for them, and Gordon sipped his as he told Tim what was going on.

He started by telling Tim about the wilding sprees, which surprised and shocked him. As much as a pack of assholes Scott Bradfield and his friends were, he never imagined they would be insensitive psychopaths. As quickly as that thought came, though, it went away as the memory of that horrible day from six years ago rose in his mind, unbidden.

He’d been walking home from school that late spring day, minding his own business as usual. The day had been largely uneventful. A math test, an assembly for preparation for the sixth grade class graduating ceremonies. Lunch and recess. Same old shit. Scott Bradfield and his stupid friends had been pestering him again, but they were dorks. Tim avoided them whenever possible anyway, and usually spent his time hanging out with his friend Richard Pilson, who would later move out of the area with his family.

During study hall he spent his time reading a really cool book by Stephen King, ‘Salem’s Lot, which was about vampires. Tim was engrossed in the story, and had not been able to put the book down since picking up the worn paperback from the crammed bookshelf that was in the third bedroom of their condo. Good thing he’d completed his homework early.

He was thinking about nothing in particular, only wanting to get home and get back into the book, and was just in the middle of a lonely stretch of road where a large field lay on his right, when he heard them approach from behind.

Scott Bradfield and his friends Dave Bruce and Steve Downing. They were running toward him fast, closing the gap. A yell sounded and Tim caught a momentary glimpse of the look in their eyes before he turned tail and ran.

They had too great a lead on him and caught up with him after fifty yards. Scott grabbed him, holding him back. Immediately Tim had gone on the defensive, trying to talk his way out of a physical confrontation. Scott had beaten him up last year on the way home from school, not enough to raise concern with his parents (who hadn’t noticed he’d been in a fight, nor had he told them; he’d been too embarrassed), but the experience was enough to make him avoid Scott whenever possible. In the year that passed, Scott had occasionally set his sights on Tim, who’d done everything he could to get out of Scott’s radar. It usually worked.

Not this time, though.

“All right!” Scott said, clutching Tim’s jacket. He began herding Tim into the field. “Got something I want to show you, Gaines.”

“Listen, I really got to—”

Dave and Steve were laughing as they stood on either side of him, helping Scott herd him into the field. “You’re gonna love this, Count Gaines!”

Count Gaines? That had been the first time the nickname was used and at the time Tim didn’t know what they meant by it. “What?” he asked.

“You’ll see!” Scott’s grip was solid. As they walked into the field, Tim caught a glimpse of Scott’s features. There was something in his eyes that sent shards of fear through Tim’s body. They were cold, calculating. They spoke volumes, and Tim had the sense that something very bad was about to happen to him.

Tim tried pulling away, tried protesting, but it was no use. They overpowered him and Dave socked him in the upper thigh, giving him a Charlie horse. He tried yelling at the top of his lungs but another blow to the face cut it off. Scott loomed over him, telling him he didn’t have to make a big deal out of this…they just wanted to show him something, just wanted to help him. Tim was out of breath, scared, confused, and he let the three boys lead him deeper into the field where they suddenly stopped.

At first the smell did not register with Tim. He was so worked up with fear that he hadn’t noticed it until they were standing directly over it. Tim was practically touching it with the tips of his shoes. A cloud of flies swarmed up at their arrival, buzzing frenziedly, then landing on what appeared to be a lump of fur.

“I shot it this morning with my .22,” Scott said. “Blood should still be fresh. Go ahead, have a sip, Count.”

Tim had stared down at what he now took to be a dead possum. There was an animal smell of sweat and shit. “What are you talking about?”

Scott’s fingers had pressed down on his neck, forcing him to his knees in front of the dead possum. Scott hissed in his ear. “Vampires drink blood, don’t they, Count?”

Steve and Dave laughed, crowding in closer.

“I saw that book you’re reading,” Scott said, holding him down. “About vampires.

You want to be a vampire, Count?”

Tim almost shouted, almost pleaded, no, I don’t want to be a vampire, I just want to go home! Instead he made one more valiant attempt at escape. He forced himself up only to be brought back down by Scott and his friends. He fell to his knees in front of the possum. The flies buzzed up again, circling.

“Fucking weirdo is what you are,” Scott growled in his ear. His fingers dug into his collarbone. “Always reading books about ghosts and witches and vampires. And that fucking Harry Potter shit! What are you, a fucking devil worshipper?”

Dave and Steve were laughing but Scott was deadly serious. “I don’t see you in church, and neither do people I talk to,” Scott continued. “And all you read is that devil shit. When you read occult books it opens you up to be influenced by the devil. Is that what you’re trying to do? Be influenced by the devil?”

Tim had wanted to shout at him: are you out of your mind? Do you really believe what you’re saying? but he couldn’t. The pain in his collarbone was too fierce, and he was too frightened.

“I know a lot of kids like the Harry Potter books,” Scott said, standing over him, keeping him to the ground. “But you…the stuff you read…it goes beyond that. I’ve seen the kind of books you bring to school. Those comic books. Those paperbacks. Stuff with ghosts and demons on the cover. It’s all you read. I’ve never seen you read anything else.

To me, that spells trouble. It makes sense now why you don’t want to hang out with anybody but that Richard Pilson freak. Makes sense why you aren’t into sports or why we never see you at the park or why nobody sees you at church. Vampire devil-worshippers like to hide, don’t they, Count Gaines?”

Tim could tell that Scott’s logic was not only misguided, it was twisted. He’d dimly followed a newspaper account from earlier in the school year when a local Fire Hall refused to provide security and protection during a YMCA event because of the organization’s sponsorship of a Harry Potter reading event geared toward children. The Fire Hall’s excuse was that the Harry Potter books glorified and promoted witchcraft and Satanism. Mom and Dad had a lot to say about that; the people at the Fire Hall were illiterate morons, obviously. And as they’d explained to Tim later, when illiterate morons gained positions of power, especially illiterate morons who were religious fanatics, all sense of reason and diplomacy went out the window.

Tim had never given much thought to the over-whelming Christian church-going views of the Spring Valley township’s population until that moment. He knew that Scott was a member of some church youth group and that was about it. In the years to follow, he would come to learn that his greatest tormentors hid behind the mask of Christianity, using it as an excuse with which to heap their verbal and psychological abuse. But that day, in the field, with a dead possum at his feet, his mind was a swirling mass of confusion as he tried to connect the dots.

“Do you believe in God, Tim?” Scott’s fingers tightened on his collarbone, pinching a nerve.

“Aaah! ” Tim breathed in pain.

“Is that a yes?”

“Yes!” Tim said loudly. “Yes, yes, I believe in God!”

“How come I don’t believe you?” His grip tightened.

“I don’t know! I believe, I believe!”

“If you believe, how come I don’t see you in church? How come I never hear you talk about going to church?”

“I don’t know, I don’t know!” He just wanted this pain to stop!

“If you believe in God, why are you always reading books about devils and demons and vampires?”

His grip tightened again and he pushed Tim closer to the dead possum. Steve and Dave’s laughter had settled into occasional chuckles as they stood watching.

“Do you like reading about vampires, witches, and demons?”

Tim winced at the pain in his shoulders and neck, which was becoming unbearable. He squirmed in Scott’s grip, trying to ease the pressure, to escape. “Please…”

he panted. “Let me go—”

“Answer the question!” Scott barked, retaining his grip on him.

“Ahh—” Tim winced, his breath held. “Please—”

“Do you enjoy reading about vampires, demons, and witches? Yes or no?”

“No! No, I don’t, now please, just let me go—”

“You’re lying because that’s all you read. You like reading about demons, witches and vampires because that’s what you want to be, isn’t it? You’re drawn to the unholy because you’re not like the rest of us. You’re not a Christian, you don’t go to church, you’re a witch-loving, demon-loving freak who wants to be a vampire!”

“No, that’s not true, please—”

“Then why do you like reading those kinds of books so much?”

“They’re just… stories! Just stories, that’s all they are—”

But Scott wasn’t having any of it. His grip was tight on Tim’s neck. “Just stories, huh? Stories like the Harry Potter books, right? Witchcraft and devil-worship. Those Harry Potter books aren’t just stories, Tim! Witchcraft and devil-worship is real! It’s not Christian, and neither are vampires.”

Vampires aren’t real, Tim wanted to say, but couldn’t. His mouth was dry.

“We’ve been trying to get you to see that it’s bad for you to read that kind of stuff for weeks now,” Scott said, and Tim’s mind instantly replayed to several incidents that had occurred over the past few weeks. Jeering catcalls made in the hallways at school about Tim’s love of spooks and devils. Verbal jabs in the playground that Tim liked the devil more than he liked Jesus. Tim was intelligent enough to dismiss all of this as immature crap. It wasn’t his problem his classmates couldn’t differentiate fiction from reality.

Apparently, though, he was wrong because now it was his problem.

“Now we realize you weren’t listening because you don’t care,” Scott continued.

“You love the devil more than you love God. That makes you a freak. So we decided if we can’t save you, we’ll help you. That’s why we brought you out here.”

Tim struggled once more briefly and Scott applied vice-like pressure to the nerve in his collarbone that sent him to his knees. Tim was barely aware that he was crying now.

“You want to be a vampire so much, we got you something to drink.” Scott’s voice was teasing, mocking. “After all, blood is blood, right? Figure we might need to get you used to animal blood before you start going after people.”

And as Tim realized the mad intent behind Scott’s words, he fought one last time to break free from the grip. The blows crashed down on him again, landing on his torso, his legs. He was driven closer to the ground, Scott forcing his face into the matted, bloodied fur of the dead possum. He screamed, his throat becoming raw, and as he screamed his face was shoved into the animal’s body and he felt the fur, felt the matted blood, barely heard Scott’s voice commanding him to drink! Drink its fucking blood, you freak! He didn’t hear Dave and Steve laughing uncontrollably, wasn’t aware that he was crying, that he’d peed his pants and his strength left him as Scott held his face to the possum’s body, filling his mouth and nostrils, the strong scent of it now overwhelming, triggering his nausea, and that’s when he threw up.

Throwing up had been the trigger. Scott released him and the boys had jumped back, laughing. “Ha ha ha, lookit him!”

“Fuckin’ puked all over himself!”

They’d stood over Tim, laughing, watching him puke his guts out. Then they’d walked away, leaving him lying there on the ground, dry heaving, out of breath from crying, still sick with nausea, pain wracking his body.

That simple, very quick reliving of the incident that had set things in motion for Tim Gaines–the arrest of Scott and his friends, their parents influence on the town which forced the authorities to release them and not press charges, Scott and his friends circulating nasty rumors about Tim in the years to follow–was enough to convince Tim that, yes, Scott Bradfield and his crew could be capable of such cruelty. It was a no-brainer. If he could beat another kid, force him to try to eat a dead animal, he was capable of even worse atrocities.

So he listened as Gordon continued his story. He listened as Gordon told him about their brief excursions into Harrisburg and Philadelphia, where they’d target a homeless person and beat him up, then leave. It sickened Tim to hear this and it once again angered him that a group of kids who cloaked themselves with such holier-than-thou bullshit—who had everybody in town fooled that they were not only such upstanding, caring citizens and perfect Christians—were such monsters.

When Gordon got to the part of the abduction of Neal Ashford, Tim drew in a breath. This crossing the line from random beatings to felony abduction was the final straw. Tim could only listen with bated breath as Gordon told them how they’d abducted Neal and taken him back to Scott’s place and locked him in the guest house. He related how the plan had been to use Neal as their own personal punching bag, that the whole idea was to use somebody nobody would care about, but then the guy had fucking died on them a week later, and that’s when Gordon had come up with the idea of resurrecting him.

Tim blinked. “You what?”

“I came up with the idea of bringing him back from the dead,” Gordon said.

Despite the therapeutic nature of the confession, Gordon looked amazingly calm. “I thought…if he came back…it would be better. Because then we wouldn’t have to worry about getting another one. We could just use this same guy over and over again. Just beat on him without having to worry about killing him.”

Tim didn’t see the logic in that. They’d already killed the guy. But then, they never saw Neal as a fellow human being. They saw him as an object to pummel and pound on, to use as a human punching bag. With that thought it was now clear to Tim.

He was speaking to a stone-cold sociopath.

Somehow he kept his fear in check as he nodded at Gordon to continue.

As Gordon segued into his borrowing of Back From the Dead from Tim, everything became clear. He finished this part of the story himself aloud. “When I told you what the book was about, you realized it contained the elements you were thinking about,” he said. “That’s why you were asking me about the zombies, how they were made.”

“Exactly,” Gordon said, nodding. He took another sip of coke. “And that’s why I asked you to show me the parts in the book that told how to make the zombies.”

“But…I don’t understand…that book is just a horror novel. It’s not real. It was just a story!”

“You said yourself that zombies are real in Haiti!” Gordon argued.

“Yeah, but what takes place in Back From the Dead is fiction. It isn’t real! It’s made up.”

Gordon shook his head. It looked like he was struggling with this basic fact. Tim tried to remember if Gordon came from an overtly religious family, the kind that believed the fantasy novels of J.K. Rowling were as real as thunderstorms. “It might be a story, but it mixes fiction with reality. All fiction does that to a certain extent, right?”

“I suppose,” Tim said. “But…” But you can’t resurrect the dead! That’s impossible!”

And then in the back of his mind came one of the oldest stories of the dead being resurrected. That son of a Jewish carpenter who’d been nailed to a tree, was entombed in a cave, then rose from the dead three days later.

He banished that particular thought from his mind, focusing on what Gordon was telling him. He nodded for Gordon to continue.

Gordon wrapped it up quickly, telling him about the second abduction, how that homeless guy was killed quickly in a fit of rage by Scott, how they’d taken the body out to Zuck’s Woods that night and waited while the spell did its work. He felt a sense of disgust as Gordon revealed that the other guys wanted Neal Ashford’s corpse to eat the second homeless man, and he was even more horrified when Gordon told him about John Elfman. His jaw dropped. “You killed John?”

“I didn’t kill John!” Gordon protested. He was showing a faint sign of nervousness. “Scott…Dave and Steve… they killed him.”

Tim almost blurted, but you helped! but didn’t. For the first time, the thought that Gordon was making everything up as some sort of elaborate practical joke occurred to him, but he kept that to himself. “Okay, Scott and others did it. But…why?”

“They wanted to feed somebody to the zombies,” Gordon explained. His features had a sense of pleading in them, as if he were begging Tim to understand the nature of their actions. “It was like…once we started talking about doing this, all the talk of zombies and stuff…and when it really happened with Neal…they wanted to see if all the stuff you see in movies was real.”

“And was it?”

Gordon nodded. It seemed that with Gordon safe within the sanctuary of his living room he felt comfortable in letting his true emotions through. He looked visibly affected by what he’d seen. “Yeah,” Gordon said. “Once John was pushed into the zombies it was like…they turned on him. It was just like those Dawn of the Dead movies. They just…tore into him.”

“They ate him?”

Gordon nodded. “Yeah.” Gordon’s eyes were haunted. They reflected the depths of the horror he’d witnessed.

As horrible as it all sounded, Tim still had a hard time trying to wrap his mind around it. They’d resurrected their murder victims and turned them into zombies…not just Haitian zombies, but a combination of Haitian and Romero zombies, the latter of which weren’t even real! How was this possible?

Gordon wrapped the story to its conclusion. “I helped the guys clean up. It was…pretty messy. Steve got sick…I did too. We finally got the worst of it out of there and—”

“How’d you get John’s body out without getting attacked by the zombies?”

“Scott brought a bunch of gardening tools. Rakes, shovels and shit like that. We used them to fish the…body parts…over to us.”

“And the zombies didn’t try to lunge at you?”

“Not really. They were pretty sedated at that point. Like munching on John had made them lazy. You know?”

Tim didn’t know, not having ever seen a zombie consume a human being before.

“So you got the rest of John out of there and then what?”

“Scott spread lime on the floor and the rest of us went out and got air fresheners.

We hung them up to mask the smell. We…burned the rest of John in the fireplace.”

Tim’s mind was turning everything over. The events Gordon was describing had occurred five nights ago. He had yet to hear of John’s disappearance in the news, but then he supposed the local media hadn’t run anything on it yet. “Do you know if John’s parents have reported him missing?”

Gordon shook his head. “Not that I know of.”

“Scott’s mom is home now?”

Gordon nodded.

“Have you heard from Scott or Dave or Steve since then?”

“Just phone calls. We’ve been checking in with each other, to make sure everything’s okay.”

“And is it?”

Gordon was silent. He wouldn’t look at Tim, and Tim wondered again if this was some elaborate joke. His old instinct told him not to trust Gordon due to their history, but the other boy’s tone of voice, his fearful expression, his body language, was clear evidence: everything Tim was being told was the truth.

Gordon looked at him. “If you’re thinking I’m fucking with you, I’m not. I swear to God it’s the truth. I never thought…never thought—”

“I’ve got to admit it sounds…” Unbelievable was the word he wanted to use.

“Crazy?”

“Yeah.” Tim nodded.

“I know. But I’m telling you man, that shit worked. Everything in that book worked, right down to the last—”

“Tell me again what you did.”

Gordon backtracked a bit and related how he’d read over the passages from Back From the Dead where the houngan in the story resurrects the corpse of an ally for use in an upcoming battle with an enemy. The passage itself wasn’t very long, but it was enough to mix fact with fantasy to paint a very vivid, realistic picture. “I just gathered the stuff that’s mentioned in the book. Those roots and herbs I got at Madam Crosswell’s in Lancaster. I got the candles and salt and purchased a rabbit at Mill’s Pet Store in Hempfield. And then I went to Zuck’s Woods and found a nice secluded spot and just did the spell, the one that hung…how do you pronounce that?”

“Houngan,” Tim said, carefully enunciating the words.

“Right. I just followed how he did that spell in the book, the one that consecrates the ground for use in a ritual designed to raise the dead. It was kinda hard because it was dark and I had to keep looking from the book to what I was doing. Some of the words were hard to pronounce, so I just did it the best I could. In fact, the rest of that spell is just plain gibberish. I skipped that part and just recited the stuff in English—”

“You skipped some of it?”

“Yeah. Why?” Gordon looked at Tim as if he’d done something wrong.

What are you going to tell him now? That skipping over parts of a make-believe spell, from a make-believe book, might have altered the spell he was trying to conjure?

Tim knew enough about the occult from his scant reading of it to know that rituals and formulas had to be followed precisely. Any deviation could alter the effects of the spell drastically. He kept this to himself. No need to tell Gordon, especially when he was having a hard time coming to grips with Gordon’s story.

“So you consecrated the ground and then the next night you brought Neal’s body back and did the resurrecting spell,” Tim said, choosing his words carefully. “Did you deviate from it at all?”

“No. Some of the words were hard to pronounce so I might have…skimmed over some of them.” Gordon looked frustrated. “You think I fucked it up by mispronouncing them?”

“I don’t know.” Tim’s mind was racing. He still didn’t know what to make of this, but he had to keep Gordon on his side. Had to maintain Gordon’s trust. After all, Gordon had come to him for help. “It sounds like everything worked, though.”

“So how do we get it to unwork?” Gordon asked. “Is there a spell in the book to counteract what I did?”

“No,” Tim said. It was obvious from that last question that Gordon had not read Back From the Dead in its entirety.

“So what can we do?”

“What can we do?”

“Yeah.” Gordon was looking at him expectantly. “You’ve gotta help me, Tim.”

“To be honest, I’m having a hard time believing this.”

“Would it help if I showed you?”

“You can show me?”

“Yeah. I can take you to Scott’s place. Sneak you in the back.”

“I don’t know…” Tim’s instincts were screaming don’t trust him! It’s a gag!

“I can take you tonight. Scott’s going out with Rebecca, and his parents either won’t be home or won’t notice. It’ll be a quick sneak into their yard, a peek through the door, and you’ll have all the proof you need.”

It still didn’t sit right with Tim. He tried not to let his nervousness show. “I don’t know. I’m kinda on house arrest now since…you know.”

“We can do it real late at night,” Gordon said, and now his expression changed. It became more animated, more persuasive. “I know you want to put this whole thing behind you and maybe…maybe this can be the thing that’ll do it.”

“How would my going over to the Bradfield estate, and seeing what you’re telling me are zombies, help?”

“You’re having a hard time believing what I’m telling you, correct?”

“Yeah.”

“So you’ve got to see them. If you see them, you’ll believe me.”

“Okay, say everything you tell me is true, and by this time tomorrow I’m a believer. Then what? How am I supposed to help you outside of calling the police?”

Gordon’s enthusiasm faltered. “You don’t want to do that, Tim.”

“Why not? I thought you wanted help.”

“I want to help myself get out of this. That means ending the spell, ending Scott’s insanity, so he won’t do this again.”

“You think he’s going to try it again? Kill another homeless person, bury them in Zuck’s Woods and make another zombie?”

“Yes.”

Tim contemplated this. Gordon still spoke with the air of somebody who was deadly serious and not joking around. Still, the very idea of what Gordon was insinuating just wasn’t very believable. “You think I can stop it somehow?”

“If you see, you’ll believe that what I’m telling you is the truth. And maybe that’ll help you find a spell to stop this.”

Why the hell do you think I’ll know a spell to stop this? I’m not the fucking devil-worshipper you and your idiotic friends have made me out to be! I wouldn’t know the first thing about casting a spell! Of course, saying this would be useless. Gordon not only believed Back From the Dead was real, he believed black magic was real.

And with that thought, something tugged at him.

Suppose some of it was real?

Tim had a healthy interest in the supernatural. He was fascinated by it. The romanticism of life after death was highly intriguing, and part of him wished there was some merit to his spirit living on after death. He had no solid belief in any form of organized religion. While the idea of ghosts, of spirits, of some form of supernatural power that could be used for good or evil purposes was intriguing and held his interest, he pretty much rejected all concepts of a supreme diety that ruled from the sky. That didn’t mean he’d slammed the door entirely on that particular school of thought, just that he’d pretty much rejected all the traditional dogma of Judeo-Christian thought.

But that didn’t mean he’d rejected everything entirely.

“I’ve gotta be honest with you,” Tim said, choosing his words carefully. “I’m finding this hard to believe, and even if I did see what you’re…alleging is true…I don’t know how I can help. I don’t know much about the occult and black magic, just what I’ve read in horror novels and a few non-fiction accounts. I’m no expert.”

Gordon acted as if he hadn’t heard Tim. “Let me spell it out for you. You have to help me out of this. If you do, I can help get the Dean of the school off your case and I can persuade the police to drop their investigation of you and your friends in that grave-robbing thing. I can also ensure that nothing like that happens to you guys again.”

Tim felt his face flush with anger. “I’ve listened to enough.” He rose to his feet.

“You’re going to have to go now, Gordon.”

Gordon didn’t budge from his space on the sofa. “If you don’t help me I’ll make it worse for you.”

“How are you going to make it worse?”

“I kept some of the bones from that corpse I dug up. I planted some last night in your garden while you were asleep.”

“Bullshit!”

“Wanna try me? Say no to my offer now, the minute I leave I’m calling the police and leaving an anonymous call that the remainder of that corpse is buried in your garden.

They’ll find it, too. They’ve got a hard-on for you, Tim. It won’t take much for me to get them out here.”

“You’re full of shit!” Tim got up and strode to the kitchen. He looked out the window that overlooked the garden his mom had tended ever since they’d moved in, the one where she planted tomatoes, beans, turnips, and red peppers every year.

There was a spot two feet from the wooden edge of the garden where the ground had recently been turned over and stomped down again. The earth was a darker shade than the rest, giving the appearance something had been planted there.

Mom doesn’t plant anything in that section, he thought. And I haven’t seen her back here recently…so why is it—

Gordon approached from behind, keeping his distance. “I really don’t want to blackmail you, Tim. Honest to God. I just want you to help me, and I swear when it’s all over you’ll never hear from me again.”

Tim whirled to face Gordon. He could barely contain his anger. “You fucking asshole.”

Gordon pulled out his cell phone from his pocket. He flipped it open, pressed a button, and started to walk away. “Fine, you don’t want to help me, I’ll leave. I’ll be placing that call though.” He stepped away and headed toward the front door.

“Wait!” The urge to placate Gordon temporarily and dash outside to see what was buried in his mother’s garden pulsed strongly through him. “Hold on, I’ll help you.”

Gordon paused at the front door. “You will?”

“Yes.”

Gordon put the phone back in his pocket. “Great!”

“But I need to see them first.”

Gordon nodded. “Of course. I’ll take you tonight.”

“Not tonight. Now.”

Gordon shook his head. “No can do, buddy. Scott’s home, and he’d freak if he saw you there. We’ve got to sneak over tonight.”

Tim sighed. His mind raced, trying to come up with an alternate plan. Something to dig himself out of this. He didn’t want to have anything to do with Gordon, wanted no part of this lunacy, but he also didn’t want to put his parents and George and Al and their families through any more trouble. It had to end, tonight if possible. “Fine,” he said.

“Tonight then.”

Gordon nodded and opened the door to leave. “One final warning,” he said. His features were impassive as he faced Tim. “Don’t call the police. They’re not only not going to believe you, they’re going to believe everything I tell them.”

“And why would they believe you?”

Gordon rolled his eyes. “Do I have to spell it out for you? C’mon, Tim, you’re a smart guy.”

“Okay, I get it.” Tim said, the reality of what he was about to say stinging to his soul. “Nobody likes me in this town. It’s pretty much evident from what I’ve been through for the past five years. It’s also evident from the fact that nobody believed me when my copy of Back From the Dead was found at the cemetery and the police dismissed me when I told them I’d loaned it to you.”

“Yeah, sorry about that.” Gordon looked at Tim and for a moment that softness came back again. “I admit, I lied to the police about returning that book to you. Judging by what’s happened with you and your friends, they believed me.”

“No thanks to you,” Tim muttered.

“Just remember…they’re going to continue to believe me, and they’ll especially believe Scott, Steve, and Dave. They’ll believe me when I tell them more evidence is planted not only in the garden, but somewhere else on your property.”

Tim sputtered. “What?”

Gordon ignored the outburst and continued. “If the police come and say you’d told them I just tried to blackmail you, I’ll make sure they know about this other hidden spot where the bones are buried. There’s other incriminating evidence buried there, too. It might even point to you being involved in John’s murder.”

Tim was so stunned by this that he didn’t know what to say. It was like he’d temporarily lost the ability for speech. His heart pounded fiercely in his chest and he felt his body grow light. “You wouldn’t,” he managed to whisper.

“John picked on you too, right? And with all that horror and occult stuff the cops probably hauled away the other night…” Gordon shrugged and turned to exit the house.

“I’ll pull up to your place at two A.M.,” he said as he left. “If you aren’t waiting for me at the curb, I’m placing that call to the police tomorrow morning. And remember.” He paused at the foot of the walk that led to their parking pad. “Not a word of this to anybody. Things will only get worse for you if you call the cops. Nobody’s gonna believe you.”

And with that final threat, Gordon Smith turned and walked down the driveway.

Tim closed the door and leaned against it. Despite the coolness of the living room brought on by the air conditioner, he was sweating.

This can’t be happening. There’s no way any reasonable adult in his or her right mind would look at everything that’s happened logically and determine that Gordon Smith and Scott Bradfield are telling the truth…especially if what Gordon is saying is even partially true…that they’ve kidnapped homeless people and murdered them on Scott’s own property…

… and John! My God, they killed John Elfman?

As much as Tim tried to rationalize it, he couldn’t see how the authorities would believe Gordon over him. He had alibis. He had a solid academic record. He had—

You have a police record, a school disciplinary record that includes allegations of Satanic ritual, witchcraft, vandalism, and all kinds of bogus, trumped-up shit. Gordon, Scott, Steve, and Dave, on the other hand, are good upstanding Christian citizens in the eyes of pretty much everybody in town and can do no wrong. Who do you think they’re going to believe?

And with that it was clear to Tim what must be done. What he had to do.

He had no other choice.

He had to go with Gordon tonight. He had to see for himself.

Chapter Seventeen

Sneaking out of the house was easy enough. His parents were sound sleepers.

His only worry was getting through the next hour or so and sneaking back in without being caught.

The neighborhood was silent as he stood by the curb waiting for Gordon. It was a warm night and a slight breeze brought much needed relief to the ninety-five degree heat the region had experienced the day before. Despite the warm night, Tim had dressed in a pair of jeans, tee shirt, and sneakers. He also had his cell phone, which contained a digital camera. If the possibility availed itself, he was going to snap a picture of the so-called zombies.

A pair of headlights stabbed the darkness and drew closer. As the car pulled up quietly at the curb, Tim noted Gordon’s pale features behind the wheel.

Tim got in the front seat and Gordon pulled away without a word.

“You sure Scott’s still gone?” Tim asked as they headed out of the development.

“Yeah,” Gordon said. He yawned. “He’s at Rebecca’s tonight.”

“He’s spending the night at her place?”

“Oh yeah.” Gordon grinned at him. “Her parents must be cool, eh? Imagine being able to spend the night fucking your girlfriend at her parents home!”

Chelsea popped into his mind and Tim felt a short tug to his heart. She’d been over to the house earlier that evening where they’d watched TV and hung out on the back deck. Mom and Dad had given them their space and mostly stayed inside. Chelsea could sense something had been bothering him and the one time she’d asked, Tim had told her everything was fine, he was just worrying about the latest court appearance. They were due in Lancaster Superior Court in a few days regarding the motion to dismiss the criminal investigation that was currently ongoing against Tim. That seemed to satisfy her, and Tim had tried to be a happy-go-lucky boyfriend the rest of the evening, but felt he’d failed miserably.

“His parents are gone, too?” Tim asked.

“His dad’s home. Not sure about his mom.” Gordon was silent for a moment.

“Two A.M. is pretty late for Mr. Bradfield anyway. He’s probably in bed.”

Tim said nothing else as Gordon drove them to the Bradfield estate.

As they entered the road that took them into the hills that led to the estate, Tim felt his apprehension rise. He was prepared for pretty much anything tonight, having rehearsed several scenarios multiple times in his head. If this were a trick, he’d know the minute he stepped on to the property. He would activate his cell phone, would have the pre-set 911 button ready to dial and then if something or somebody so much as jumped out at him, he was sending the call. He’d yell out his location during whatever physical confrontation happened and do his best to get the hell out of there.

Otherwise, if he saw the zombies and had the opportunity, he would try to snap a photo. He had a plan if the zombies were real and this was a ruse to get rid of Tim by feeding him to the creatures; he would make Gordon enter the guesthouse first, would hang outside for a moment to make sure nobody else was around, then enter with extreme caution, making sure Gordon was in plain sight.

Regardless, he was nervous about what was going to happen tonight. He had no idea if he was really going to see what Gordon claimed were zombies. He had no idea what to expect.

He still couldn’t believe what Gordon told him.

He’d spent the rest of yesterday and last night thinking about it and had consulted a copy of Back From the Dead for the passage in question (Al had picked up another copy for him at a used bookstore). The scene that contained the spell was only three paragraphs long and consisted mainly of dialogue and narrative exposition. Hardly a recipe for a spell, but somehow Gordon had gotten it to work.

The question was, how?

Tim had leafed carefully through the book, looking for any other reference or clue that might give him some idea. Aside from a vague reference to the Liber Salomonis and the De prestigiis daemonum, which were no doubt fictional black magic tomes, there were no other references to spells, hexes, or black magic. Google searches were vague. It was only when Tim had exhausted his efforts in perusing Back From the Dead did he get the notion to do some research on Richard Long, the author of the book.

He was surprised to discover Richard Long was the pseudonym of a writer named William Sawyer, who maintained a detailed website that included a full bibliography.

Tim had spent over an hour going over Sawyer’s biography and bibliography. In addition to the five Richard Long paperback originals, all horror novels, Sawyer was also the author of almost forty other books, most under his name, some under other pseudonyms.

He’d written crime novels, SF, fantasy, thrillers, and horror fiction. Not only was he quite prolific, he’d made several best-seller lists and had won an award or two.

Tim found a contact form on the site and quickly composed a brief message to William, asking him about the occult source material for Back From the Dead, specifically the spells for resurrecting the dead. He noted that he realized the book was fiction but he’d read of similar accounts in supposed non-fiction sources and was wondering if Mr. Sawyer had access to more definitive information. He’d closed the message by telling the author he was a big fan, included his address and phone number, and signed off.

Tim had checked his inbox every hour since he sent that message shortly after supper, and checked it again briefly before leaving the house to meet Gordon. So far he’d received no response.

The Bradfield estate came into view and Gordon slowed the car down. “Here we are,” he said quietly, more to himself than to Tim. Gordon pulled up to the side of the road and turned off the lights. He turned the engine off and they sat in the vehicle for a moment, looking at the house.

Tim didn’t realize he was holding his breath until Gordon nudged him gently.

“You ready?”

“Yeah,” Tim said. His mouth was suddenly dry, his limbs heavy, as he exited the vehicle.

With Gordon leading the way, they headed across the road and down the driveway that led past the six car garage. Tim had never been to Scott’s place before, had never even driven past it. Looking at the sprawling house–mansion was a more accurate word to describe the structure–Tim was struck by the fact that Scott lived in such an immense place with only two other people: his parents. It had to be at least four thousand square feet. For the first time, Tim wondered why Scott attended public school when it was obvious his parents were wealthy enough to send him to private school.

And with that thought came something out of memory lane, something Tim had nearly forgotten. The day Scott, Dave, and Steve had set on him in that field had occurred at the tail end of the school year, shortly before he was set to graduate from Spring Valley Elementary School. The year had started, however, with Scott’s introduction to his sixth grade class as a new student to Spring Valley Elementary. In the days to follow, Tim learned Scott had previously attended a series of private schools and had lived in Spring Valley all his life.

His parents did send him to private school, Tim thought as they approached the guest house. But he was kicked out. This thought came to him unbidden, and the more he turned it over in his mind, the more it made sense. Scott Bradfield had been out of control and a total psycho since day one and had been kicked out of every private school his parents sent him to. Public school had been their last resort, and the attack on Tim had almost been the end of that. Tim wondered if Scott’s parents had tried suing the private schools that expelled Scott; his guess was they had and were unsuccessful.

His thoughts were interrupted by Gordon creeping up to the front door of the guesthouse. It resembled a little cottage, with tan trim and little windows that flanked the lone door. Gordon turned to Tim. “Okay,” he whispered. He bent down, felt under a doormat and retrieved a key. He fitted the key in the lock while Tim stood nervously behind him, looking beyond at the vast estate, which was dark and brooding. He hoped Scott didn’t change his mind and decide to come home early from Rebecca’s.

Gordon opened the door and stood aside. He reached inside, looking at Tim.

“You’ve got five seconds to get your look and then we’re getting the hell out of here. You got me?”

Tim nodded, relieved that this wasn’t going to be the trap he’d worried about.

Gordon turned on the light.

Standing just outside the front door of the guesthouse, Tim had a direct line of sight. What he saw almost knocked the wind out of him.

Sitting on the floor at the far end of what was obviously the living room were two men who were very dead.

In the five seconds Tim saw them, several things became quickly apparent. The dozens of air fresheners that were hanging from the ceiling gave the interior of the guesthouse a scent of pine that masked a sweet scent of rotting meat. The buzzing of flies gave way to their appearance, both outside the guesthouse and inside, where they buzzed and landed on the two corpses. The faint stains on the floor and walls that could have been dried blood, and the men themselves–both wearing dirty, threadbare clothes, their faces and bodies stained with gore, their skin turning a blue-black color in spots, white in others. They looked blankly at Tim with those dead eyes, fixing him in their stare, holding Tim rooted to his spot at the front door, unable to tear his gaze away until–

Gordon flicked off the light and shut the door with one fluid motion.

Tim could hardly breathe. His fear had returned tenfold now, blossoming through him to create an undeniable urge to make trails and get the hell out of there.

Gordon quickly replaced the key and was at Tim’s side. “Let’s go.” Gordon lightly but firmly urged Tim to turn around and, together, they made their way back the way they came, down the driveway and around to the front of the house. They made it to the car and Tim hunkered down in the front seat as Gordon started the car and did a U

turn, heading back down the street and out of the development.

Gordon turned on the headlights as he exited the street and he cast a glance at Tim, who was still trying to get over his shock at what he’d seen. “Believe me now?”

Tim could only nod, still trying to calm himself down. His heart was beating hard, his stomach was doing slow flips in his belly. Trying to calm down was not very easy.

What did I just see in there? his mind kept repeating.

“Well?” Gordon asked.

“Well, what?” Tim managed.

“You believe me. You saw the zombies. So now what are we going to do?”

Tim was at a loss for words. What he wanted to do was go to the police, but he knew if he voiced that opinion now, Gordon would do something. If Gordon was capable of participating in murder, even if he never laid a hand on the guys in that guest house but merely aided and abetted, he would be capable of keeping this a secret at all costs.

“You’ve got to have some kind of idea on how to stop this,” Gordon said. They were heading out of the development, making their way toward Route 501, which would take them to Broad Street.

“I don’t,” Tim said.

“You saw them, though. You believe me now, don’t you?”

“Oh, I believe you all right,” Tim said. Gordon sounded nervous and he had to placate him, assure him he was trying to think of a solution. “I just…let me think about it for a minute.”

They drove in silence for a while. Tim looked out the window, his mind racing, turning everything over. He had no idea what to do short of going to the police. He didn’t know a thing about black magic or Wicca other than what he’d read in a few books. He wasn’t a practicing witch or warlock despite what Gordon and his moron friends thought, and he was half tempted to simply not do anything but let Gordon suffer for his actions. If he was stupid enough to go messing around with things he didn’t know about, he deserved what was happening to him.

At the same time he couldn’t allow Scott, Dave, and Steve to continue kidnapping and murdering homeless people, much less turn them into zombies. Gordon was right…this had to stop. But at the same time, Gordon and his friends had to pay for what they’d done.

As if he’d read Tim’s thoughts, Gordon issued another threat. “No police. If you tell the police, I’ll not only make things worse for you, I’ll make things worse for Chelsea.”

Tim looked at Gordon, his heart lodged in his throat. “What?”

Gordon cocked a grin at Tim. “Didn’t realize I knew about the two of you, huh? I saw you guys sniffing around each other the last few weeks of school. I heard you went out with her last week, too.”

“Just…take me home,” Tim said, turning away from Gordon. “I’ll figure something out.”

“You better. Because if you don’t, Chelsea might end up as meat for the zombies.”

Tim glared at Gordon. “You wouldn’t dare.”

“Try me.”

The anger Tim felt at the threat directed to Chelsea was enormous. It almost eclipsed his rational side, making him want to lash out and bash Gordon’s face in. He reined it in, turned away and looked out the window as Gordon drove north on 501.

“I’ll call you tomorrow morning to hear your plan,” Gordon said. The street was deserted as they passed the Red Rose Shopping center on the left and went up the hill that would take them down into Spring Valley. “I can keep Scott and the guys occupied tomorrow. That should give you time to come up with a spell to make all this stop.”

Damn, he’s stupid, Tim thought. It was obvious Gordon wasn’t taking no for an answer, that he either didn’t care that Tim’s knowledge of the occult was limited or didn’t want to believe it. He’s depending on me to get him out of the mess he created. And if I don’t do it he’s going to hurt Chelsea.

“If those zombies aren’t dead–as in reduced back to the corpses they once were–

by the next day, the police will be getting that anonymous call,” Gordon said. “Don’t bother digging up that garden for the rest of those bones, either. I hid them real well. You won’t find them. And if you call the cops I’ll not only deny everything and tell them where those other remains are, I’ll feed your girlfriend to the zombies.” Gordon regarded Tim calmly. “Are we clear?”

“Yeah,” Tim said.

“Good. Because—”

From behind them came the brief whoop of a police siren, accompanied by swirling blue and red lights.

“Shit!” Gordon cast a quick glance in the rearview mirror, then turned to Tim. “If you so much as say one word about this to that cop, I’ll make sure Steve and Dave get Chelsea. You got me?”

Tim nodded, his brief fear over the sudden arrival of the police car giving way to momentary relief.

The police car whooped again behind them and Gordon pulled to the curb. “Keep your mouth shut,” he said to Tim. “Don’t say anything about what we were doing tonight.

If they ask you, just tell them you and I were driving around talking.”

“We were trying to air out our differences,” Tim said, the ruse coming quickly.

“Right! We were just trying to air out our differences. They’ll believe that.”

Gordon glanced in the rearview mirror, straightened up in the driver’s seat. He reached for his wallet and rolled his window down. “Remember what I said would happen to Chelsea if you tell them anything.”

“Yeah,” Tim said, his heart racing, not knowing what to do now that the cop was approaching the vehicle from the driver’s side, only knowing that he had to do something to stop this madness and do whatever he could to protect Chelsea and his family.

Chapter Eighteen

When the police officer approached the vehicle, Gordon put on his best smile.

“Hey officer.”

A flashlight shined in the interior of the car. When its beam hit Tim’s eyes, he squinted at the sudden intrusion of light. He didn’t recognize the officer at first. It wasn’t until he spoke that Tim placed him. It was Officer Frank Clapton. “Mr. Gaines! What are you doing with Mr. Smith at 2:30 in the morning?”

“I can explain,” Gordon said.

“I think I’d rather hear this from Mr. Gaines, if you don’t mind.” Officer Clapton stepped toward the front of the vehicle and motioned for the boys to step out of the car by wiggling his fingers. “Exit the vehicle, boys. Let’s talk.”

Gordon cast one last look at Tim that said, don’t try anything you and Chelsea are going to regret. Then they stepped out of the car and joined Officer Clapton on the sidewalk.

“Care to tell me what you’re doing driving around town past curfew?” Officer Clapton asked.

“We were just talking,” Gordon said.

“Talking?” Officer Clapton looked at Tim. “What were you talking about, Mr.

Gaines?”

Tim shrugged, trying not to let his nervousness show. “Nothing much. We were just…trying to air out our differences.”

“At two-thirty in the morning?”

“It was the only time we could talk without getting hassled by Tim’s parents,”

Gordon said. “They haven’t been entirely courteous to me.”

“I can’t say that I blame them,” Officer Clapton said. He looked from Gordon to Tim and when a voice cracked forth on his shoulder-mounted radio, he picked it up and spoke into it. “That’s affirmative. I’ve got both suspects out of the car and on the sidewalk.”

Suspects? Tim felt his stomach twist at the word. Was he suspected in some other wrong-doing now? Something Gordon hadn’t told him about yet?

“This is serious business, boys,” Officer Clapton said. “Not only is it four hours past curfew, but Mr. Gaines is the suspect in the Reamstown Cemetery desecration. I find it hard to believe he would be out with you, Mr. Smith, just to air out your differences.”

“It’s true,” Tim murmured softly.

Another police car pulled up behind Officer Clapton’s car, its dome lights swirling blue and red. The officer exited his vehicle and took his time joining them on the sidewalk. Tim looked down at the sidewalk, the thought of being in some kind of trouble the least of his problems. If this were any other time he would have been nervous. He would have been frightened at the thought of being in trouble. Despite the seeming severity of the situation, he was more nervous about what Gordon was going to do and how much of an influence he might wield with the police.

“So what’s it going to be?” Officer Clapton said. “You guys going to tell me the truth or do I have to call your parents, maybe take you to Brendan Hall?”

Tim looked up quickly, his stomach doing another cartwheel. Gordon only shrugged. Tim’s voice quavered as he spoke. “I’m sorry we violated curfew, but really, we were just talking. We weren’t doing anything wrong.”

The second officer approached and Tim noticed Officer Clapton nod at him.

“Take Mr. Smith home. I’ll escort Mr. Gaines to Brendan Hall.”

Now Tim did begin to get scared at the implications. “Brendan Hall? Officer Clapton, please, I didn’t do anything, just take me home to my parents—”

Officer Clapton took Tim by the elbow and gently guided him to his squad car.

“Can’t do that, Tim. You’re the main suspect in the Reamstown Cemetery desecration and you’re out past curfew with the kid you tried to blame for it. I’m sorry, but I have no choice. I have to transport you to Brendan Hall Juvenile facility.”

Tim cast a glance back at Gordon, who was being led to the second squad car by the other officer. Gordon looked back at Tim and said, “Sorry, Tim. Everything will turn out okay.” The message in his eyes was completely different, though: don’t tell that cop what you saw at Scott’s house or Chelsea will be zombie meat.

Tim heard the other officer tell Gordon, “Your folks aren’t going to appreciate being woken up so late at night, Mr. Smith.”

“I guess not,” was Gordon’s reply and that was all he heard as Officer Clapton opened the rear door of the squad car and ushered him inside.

* * *

Tim’s thoughts were such a jumbled chaotic mess that he couldn’t get things straight as he sat in the rear of the squad car. Officer Clapton was talking to the other cop outside. Gordon was sitting in the back of the second squad car, his own vehicle still parked at the curb in front of them. He wondered what the officers were talking about.

Were they comparing notes? Had new evidence been found that would perhaps exonerate Tim? If that was the case, why was he being taken to Brendan Hall?

The thought of spending the rest of the evening in Brendan Hall brought a heavy feeling of dread to Tim. He knew Brendan Hall was the Lancaster County Juvenile facility, and the idea of spending even an hour within its walls was unthinkable. Images of prison rape fluttered through his mind, of being beaten and tortured by seasoned juvenile criminals while his parents frantically tried to secure his release. Juvenile Hall was just another name for jail for kids, right?

Would his parents get a phone call to come immediately to Brendan Hall or would they have to wait until after eight A.M. to get him? Would he be able to call Chelsea and warn her? What happened if criminal charges were filed while he was waiting for his parents to pick him up and they weren’t allowed to get him? Suppose he had to remain incarcerated until his trial? That could take weeks, even months!

The fear and frustration welled to the surface and tears sprang to his eyes. Tim tried to quell them, but his frustration and fear only succeeded in making them flow faster. His breathing was growing rapid as his sobs took over and he fought to control those, too. If he wasn’t such a fuck up, wasn’t such an outcast, none of this would be happening!

Officer Clapton and the other cop stopped talking and Clapton crossed over to his squad car and got in. Tim forced himself to stop crying and wiped his eyes as Officer Clapton started the vehicle. “Do your parents know you’re out, Tim?”

“No.” Tim’s voice was on the verge of breaking down.

“We’ll call them when we get to Brendan Hall.”

“Okay.”

Officer Clapton pulled away from the curb and made a right down Main Street.

The streets were deserted this late at night. Tim sat in the back seat behind the wire-mesh divider, trying to figure out what he could tell Officer Clapton. He’d seen enough cop shows and read enough crime fiction to know they always separated you during questioning to see who tripped up. Gordon was going to stick to his story, that they were just driving around, trying to talk through their differences. If he was smart, that’s all he would say. If Tim acted accordingly, they might get out of this. However, if Tim told the truth he wouldn’t be believed, plain and simple. They’d also check with Gordon, who would not only deny the allegations, but find a way for Scott and the other guys to get Chelsea, get his parents maybe, and then—

What adult in their right mind would believe Scott Bradfield and his friends were making zombies?

Officer Clapton made another right hand turn down Cedar Street, which ran parallel to Broad Street. He was probably going to make a right on Mill Town Road and then a left on Broad Street, which would then take them straight to Lancaster. He was finally getting some semblence of control of his thoughts and emotions when Officer Clapton spoke to him. “So can you tell me what you were doing riding around with Gordon?”

Tim shrugged. “We were just…talking. It was no big deal.”

“Two weeks ago you accused Gordon of the crime you’re under investigation for.

You so much as implicated him by telling us you’d loaned him the book that was found at the cemetery. Why would you hang out with the guy you tried to throw under the bus, Tim?”

“I don’t know,” Tim said, not knowing what else to say.

“You can tell me the truth,” Officer Clapton said. Tim caught his gaze in the rearview mirror. “Gordon’s not around to intimidate you. I know what these guys have done to you throughout the years, and I know Gordon is tight with Scott Bradfield and his crew. The dean of your school is adamant you had something to do with not only that cemetery desecration, but the vandalism at the school, and he’s the main cheerleader for the investigation. I’ve always been on your side, though.”

“Have you?” Tim asked.

“Of course.” Officer Clapton made eye contact with Tim from the rearview mirror. “I always have been. I know what you’re going through is the result of religious persecution. Scott and his friends have managed to convince the entire student body of Spring Valley High that you’re some kind of devil-worshiper, and in doing so they’ve managed to paint not only a horrible picture of you, but an untrue one. I have to admit I was disappointed when that book was found at the Reamstown Cemetery. A book which not only had your name on it, but which you readily admitted owning. I really thought you were involved in the cemetery vandalism. Evidence pointed right to you despite your denial. Gordon has an alibi for that night and I know your folks claimed you were at home, but we were required to follow up. Do you understand me, Tim?”

“Yeah.”

“You’re a good kid, Tim. The principal at Spring Valley High reports no trouble from you despite the accusations against you. You get good grades. Your parents are good people. You aren’t the first kid whose been picked on and harassed by the social elite of a small community. I’ve been in touch with other law enforcement officials in other cities where similar events have happened. We’re consulting with one right now in Colorado where a high school girl suffered what you’re going through. Her parents sued the school district and the city. Received a tidy sum, too. I’d be lying if I told you I’m trying to avoid a similar action from your parents, but I also want to see justice done. I’ve been working at protecting you and keeping you out of trouble as much as the law allows me, but I can’t do my job unless you help me.” Officer Clapton made eye contact with him again.

“Please, Tim. Be honest with me. What were you and Gordon really doing driving around so late for?”

Tim sighed, the urge to tell the truth so strong that he almost told Officer Clapton everything. Once again Chelsea came into his mind. The memory of her caress, her kiss, and then something worse. Chelsea lying dead on the floor of that guesthouse, those dead things crowding around her, their rotting teeth buried in the smooth flesh of her throat—

“You wouldn’t believe me if I told you,” Tim blurted.

“How will you know if you don’t come clean with me?”

Tim said nothing as Officer Clapton drove down 501 toward Lancaster. When they approached the train station, Officer Clapton said, “I think Gordon broke into that cemetery and desecrated that grave to pin it on you. I think he’s blackmailing you. Why, I haven’t quite figured out yet, but—”

“You think I can trust you now?” Tim said, the words tumbling out suddenly as his frustration bubbled to the surface. “Nobody believes me anyway, not the dean of the school, not most of the police force, not the majority of the whole goddamn township!”

“I believe you,” Officer Clapton said.

“The whole town is out to get me!” Tim said, looking at Officer Clapton. “Don’t you get it? They’re not going to care if you believe me. Your boss probably thinks I’m guilty.”

“That’s not true. Chief Landon and I have talked quite extensively about you and your situation.”

“What good is talk if you don’t do anything about it?”

“Certain procedures have to be kept. We can’t just rush in and arrest Gordon on suspicion of—”

“But it’s okay to arrest me because some nitwit thinks I might be casting spells in the woods? Are you kidding me?”

“We have to follow procedure, Tim. When a criminal accusation is levied against a citizen we’re required to investigate. We’re compelled to be impartial and—”

“Bullshit,” Tim muttered, his anger coursing through him. He flopped back in the seat, frustrated this was happening and unable to control his emotions. “The history speaks for itself. Scott and his friends have ruined my life and have convinced damn near everybody in Spring Valley that if a goddamn cat so much as gets mauled by a coyote, they blame me for sacrificing it to the devil. You know how many times I’ve been investigated on such bullshit claims?”

“I understand your frustration,” Officer Clapton began.

“I don’t think you do.”

Officer Clapton sighed. They were in downtown Lancaster now, heading south on Prince Street. Tim had no idea where Brendan Hall was but he figured they had to be close. “I believe Gordon dug up that grave and stole the bones of that corpse. I think he did it to frame you. I don’t know why. Only you can answer that question, Tim.”

Tim shook his head. Officer Clapton slowed down and pulled into a parking lot. A large building stood before them and Tim felt himself tense up again. They were at Brendan Hall.

Tim felt on edge. Despite wanting to confide in Officer Clapton, despite knowing that the opportunity to do so was presenting itself to him at this very moment, he was still scared for Chelsea and his family. If past events were indications of how things would turn out, the truth would be met with skepticism by most of those in authority. Gordon and his friends would deny everything and the Bradfield’s family clout would delay the search of the guesthouse, giving Gordon and Scott plenty of time to dispose of the corpses. Even with such advance crime investigation techniques like blood spatter and DNA, by the time that was gathered and a case was built against them, they’d be free to strike back. They could snag Chelsea at any time, Scott’s dad could essentially crush Tim’s parents with a lawsuit and there was no way they could afford an attorney competent enough to go up against the kind of money the Bradfield’s had at their disposal. They’d be ruined.

“We weren’t doing anything,” Tim finally said, the confession sounding false to him. “We were just talking. Trying to sort things out.”

Officer Clapton parked near the entrance and turned off the engine. He regarded Tim from the front seat. “Okay,” he said. “If that’s what you say happened, fine.”

Officer Clapton exited the vehicle and opened the passenger side door for Tim. As they walked toward the entrance to Brendan Hall, the dread that was coursing through Tim’s system solidified. “What’s going to happen now?” Tim asked, his voice cracking.

“You’ll be fine,” Officer Clapton murmured. “You’ll be in a room by yourself so you don’t have to worry. I’ll process you at the front desk and make a call to your folks, then we can talk some more in private if you want.”

“Will my parents be able to get me tonight?” Despite the trouble he felt he would be in with his folks, he wanted to see them as soon as possible.

“Yes, they’ll be able to pick you up as soon as they can get here.”

Tim heaved a sigh of relief as they entered the lobby of Brendan Hall.

As Officer Clapton led him to the administration desk, which was sealed off by bullet-proof glass, he casually asked, “By the way…do you know John Elfman? He was reported missing yesterday by his parents.”

“I didn’t know that,” Tim said, trying not to let the surprise show in his voice.

“Didn’t know him, or didn’t know he was missing?”

“Both.”

They stopped at the front desk and a civilian clerk dressed in dark slacks and a dark shirt looked up at them. Officer Clapton nodded at the clerk. “Hi, Phil. I need processing papers, please.”

“Sure thing,” Phil said. He reached beneath his desk and retrieved two forms, which he slid through to him.

Officer Clapton took the papers, retrieved a pen from his breast pocket and began filling them out. “I understand from several sources that John used to pick on you a bit.

Not as much as Scott and his group, but enough to arouse interest with your guidance counselor. You’re sure you haven’t heard about his disappearance?”

“I’m sure,” Tim said, looking at the paperwork Officer Clapton was filling out. “I tried to stay away from John as much as I could. Besides, I don’t think John hung out with Scott and his group.”

“They were rivals, weren’t they?” Officer Clapton asked casually. He was filling out Tim’s name and address and began filling in the section about why he was being brought to Brendan Hall.

“I guess you could say that,” Tim said.

“Is there anything you want to tell me?”

Tim shook his head. “No.”

“Okay. If you change your mind, I’ll be on duty until noon. You can always ask a warden to talk to a detective and I can come down. I can always come to the house and talk to you and your parents. Understand?”

Tim nodded sullenly. “Yeah.”

Officer Clapton paused in filling out the paperwork, as if waiting for some outpouring of confession. Tim remained stoic and sullen, not looking at him. He just wanted to get out of here, he wanted to see his parents, wanted to warn Chelsea. He had to find some way to stop this.

“Okay,” Officer Clapton said, and he turned his attention back to the paperwork that would admit Tim to custody at Brendan Hall Juvenile Facility.

Chapter Nineteen

What the hell is that?

John Lombardo was sitting on the back deck of his home at three A.M. watching the fireflies when he saw the animal. He couldn’t sleep, so he’d wandered downstairs and watched infomercials for a little bit, then headed out to the deck to smoke a cigarette.

Barbara couldn’t stand the smell of cigarette smoke in the house, so he had to feed his nicotine habit outside. Can’t say he blamed her. Their three thousand five hundred square foot home was not only immaculate, it still had that new house smell despite their ten year residence. Barbara hated it when he smoked around the kids, too. Can’t say he blamed her for that, either. Their oldest son, Mike, had just turned twenty-one, and while he still lived at home, he had not picked up John’s nasty smoking habit. Their middle child, Mary was thirteen now, and Billy was three years younger, and both were at the age where their parent’s habits, including the bad ones, would influence the habits and traits they would carry for the rest of their lives.

John took a step forward, peering into the gloom of the yard. He’d initially been surprised, figuring it was a possum or something. Now he wasn’t so sure.

The thing was hobbling funny, like it was hurt. John was pretty sure it was a possum judging by its overall appearance. He took a step back. If it was hurt it might be aggressive.

As the animal came within the light of the porch John saw that it was a possum…

…or used to be a possum.

John gasped and backed up against the closed screen door. The possum looked up at him with a face that was devoid of much of its flesh. Maggots writhed in its eye sockets. Its fur was dull and appeared in rough patches on its brittle skin. John saw portions of its skeleton peek through the rotting tatters of its flesh.

“My God,” John muttered and that’s when the thing launched itself at him.

It covered the ten feet from the edge of the porch to the screen door quickly. John scrambled to get the screen door open and yelled as the thing landed on the back of his right leg. He felt its claws dig into the bare skin and he screamed as he felt its teeth sink into flesh.

John scrambled to get the thing off him, swinging his arms behind him, trying to knock it off, but it climbed his leg, seeking purchase with those sharp little claws. John was yelling now, hoping Barbara would hear him, but the thing was so goddamn fast, and his mind was still reeling at the unbelievability of it all that when it launched itself at his throat he was too slow in his reflexes to deflect its fatal bite.

The last thing John thought as he fell against the screen door, his jugular spurting blood as it ground its jaws into his throat, was that he hoped Barbara had been woken by his screams and would get herself and the kids out of the house.

* * *

Mary Lombardo was a light sleeper, so when her dad’s screams woke her up she looked out her bedroom window that overlooked the back yard.

The porch light was on, but she couldn’t see beyond the brief expanse of yard due to the canvas that covered the porch in the summer. There was a rustling noise down there, as if somebody was falling against the screen door, and then another sound, like a grunt, and then nothing.

Mary looked out the window, trying to see if there was movement below. Was Dad outside? Sometimes he liked to sit on the back deck and smoke, but it was pretty late–after three A.M., according to the digital numerals on her clock radio. Dad had to go to work in four hours. He worked some kind of office job in Lancaster. Surely he wouldn’t be outside that late.

Mary got out of bed and exited her bedroom. The hallway was silent and dark.

Bill’s room was next to hers, the door closed. She didn’t hear anything from Bill’s room.

What used to be Mike’s room had been converted to a guest bedroom—Mike had converted the living space in the basement as a bachelor pad where he lived and worked on those weird low budget horror movies he liked to produce. Mary padded down the hall toward her parent’s room. She pushed the door open softly and tip-toed inside.

Mom lay in deep sleep on the king-sized bed, her back facing the door. Dad was absent from his side of the bed.

Concerned that Dad was hurt, Mary exited her parent’s bedroom and entered the landing, which served as a kind of bridge across the entryway and great room of the house. She stood at the railing overlooking the great room, trying to look out the large floor to ceiling plate glass windows that looked out to the back deck. “Dad?” She called out. “You okay?”

There was a sound from the screen door. A rustling noise. She instantly became worried. “Dad?”

The screen door opened and she saw her dad shuffle in the house. He looked beat.

Mary sighed in relief. “Dad! You okay?”

Dad looked up at Mary, who drew in a sudden intake of breath.

The entire right side of Dad’s body was drenched with blood. He looked up at her with wide eyes, his face pale. He mouthed her name.

“Mom!” Mary yelled. “Mom, Dad’s hurt!” Mary darted back down the hall to her mother’s room to get her up, so she wasn’t aware of her father as he made his way up the stairs, his dead eyes wide open and unblinking as he was guided to the warm, living flesh of his family.

* * *

Living at home had its disadvantages, but one of the perks was not having to get a career-minded job while he worked at trying to build his low budget film production company from the ground up.

Mike Lombardo was in his basement living room/office, sitting at his desk performing the final edits on his horror film Dr. Chud. He yawned. He and his partner, Milano, had been working non-stop since they shot the final scene earlier that evening in the back yard. They’d stuck their friend Bob in a gas mask for the final scene and all had gone well. Now it was the task of assembling three hours of raw footage and editing it down to an hour of good narrative.

Bob was sacked out on the sofa, snoring softly. Milano was sitting next to him, glassy-eyed. He shifted his stocky frame in the chair and Mike could tell he wanted nothing more than to crash. Bob just didn’t give a shit; he could sleep anywhere, at any time, and had done so accordingly.

“Just one more scene,” Mike said. He was wearing a black T-shirt with the Dr.

Chud character on the front. Dr. Chud was going to be a recurring character for future films, and Bob was the perfect actor to portray him. He was a little guy, for one thing.

The Dr. Chud character was written to be slight in stature, and Bob fit the bill perfectly.

And despite the fact that Bob was a horrible actor, when he donned the gas mask it transformed him—he was actually a good actor when he was in costume. Maybe it was because his inhibitions were down and he could actually let loose and play the character.

Whatever the case, Mike had been forced to rewrite his screenplay to remove Bob’s dialogue from much of the film, since he was such a horrible actor. Restructuring the screenplay had allowed him and Milano to build Dr. Chud’s backstory in a different way but the end result still worked. When you operated on a budget of less than a few thousand dollars, you had to work with what you had. That meant relying on your friends to play pivotal roles in your films, even if they couldn’t act.

Milano cocked his head toward the ceiling. “Sounds like the rest of your family is up now.”

“Huh?” Mike said. He had multiple files open in Adobe Premiere. Let me just finish this and we can catch some sleep. We can take a look again tomorrow and if it still works, we’re done. If it doesn’t work, we’ll just do a few more edits. No problem.

“Your family,” Milano said. He yawned again, took off his glasses and began polishing the lenses with his T-shirt. “Your dad was outside yelling about something, then he came in the house. Then Mary started yelling about something. I figured they were arguing.”

That stopped Mike cold. He looked at Milano. “Mary never argues with my parents.”

“I know. That’s why I thought it was weird.”

“I haven’t heard anything.”

“You’ve been too focused on trying to finish this.” Milano gestured at the PC.

“Seriously man, it’s late, and we’ve been at this for over twelve hours. Let’s call it a night and–”

The door to the basement opened and they turned toward the sound. Mike immediately moved to save the last edit. Milano scooted out of the way and Mike could hear the fumbling footsteps of several people trumping down the stairs. Probably both his parents wanting to talk to him about Mary. What the hell was going on?

Milano’s scream came just as Mike caught his first glimpse of what had entered his basement digs, and he screamed in surprise too.

His first thought was that his folks had been badly injured in some kind of fight.

They were bloody, their clothing ripped, but then he saw the dead eyes in his father, saw the gaping wound in his mother’s throat, saw that his sister’s stomach had been ripped open and they weren’t complaining at all, they were heading straight for them like some kind of goddamn–

— zombies—

And before he and Milano could collect their wits and yell out a warning to a slumbering Bob, Mike Lombardo’s family swarmed in like attack dogs.

* * *

By the time Naomi and Jim made it to Brendan Hall at five minutes till four it was already too late. Their drive to the Juvenile facility had been made in vain.

They weren’t going to release Tim to their custody after all.

The bastards were really going to press criminal charges against him.

A Lancaster city detective explained the charges as he led them into a small conference room. Despite being awaken from a sound sleep, Naomi and Jeff were wide awake upon hearing their son had been caught driving around with Gordon Smith after curfew (Naomi was more surprised by Tim sneaking out of the house than the curfew violation). He wasn’t being charged with curfew violation, however. As the Lancaster City detective explained, when Tim Gaines was picked up they ran a computer check (standard procedure) and got a hit.

There was a warrant out for Tim’s arrest.

The detective had explained that the decision had been made late last night to file charges of criminal mischief, vandalism, desecration of a cemetery and theft of a corpse due to the Reamstown incident. “The arrest warrant was signed by Judge Wilkes,” the detective said. “That’s why your son was brought directly to Brendan Hall instead of returned home.”

“Who was the arresting officer?” Naomi asked.

“Officer Frank Clapton.”

“Did he tell Tim why he was being taken here instead of being brought home?”

“Office Clapton didn’t want to upset him any more than he already was,” the detective said.

“So you can’t release him to us?” Naomi asked. Jeff was standing beside her, wide-eyed and shuffling to and fro with nervous agitation.

“I’m afraid not,” the detective said. The detective they were speaking to was in his late thirties, slim, with sandy hair and a slight mustache. “He has to be arraigned and the judge has to set bail.”

“I can’t believe this,” Jeff muttered. Naomi felt Jeff’s frustration and it took all her will power to avoid snapping at the detective.

“I’m sorry,” the detective said. He was calm, soothing. It was obvious he’d been through hundreds of similar conversations with worried parents. “Your son will be okay.

He’s got his own holding cell, so he isn’t in any danger. We don’t put violent youth offenders in the same cells as other youth offenders.”

“You damn well better not,” Naomi muttered.

“When will they set his bail?” Jeff asked. “And how much do you think it will be?”

“I don’t know. It could be as early as nine this morning, could be as late as this afternoon.”

“Can we see him?”

“Yes, but not until visiting hours.”

“When the hell is that?” Naomi was seething.

The detective sighed. “I apologize. I realize you’re under a lot of strain and–”

“You don’t know the least of it!” Naomi snapped.

“Honey,” Jeff said. He took her lightly by the elbow in an attempt to calm her down.

Naomi held up her hands to stop him. “It’s okay! It’s okay!” She took a deep breath, trying to calm herself down. She looked at the detective, trying her best to keep herself under control. “When are visiting hours?”

“Ten A.M.,” the detective said. “It’s possible he’ll be transported to the courthouse before then. If you’d like I can have you alerted to when he’s transported so you can arrange to be there.”

“That will be great.”

And as the detective explained the procedure of the Pennsylvania Juvenile Justice system to them, Naomi was stricken with such a sudden onslaught of helplessness that she almost broke down in tears.

* * *

Tim had been sitting on a sturdy wooden bench in the bare room of his cell for the past hour. The longer he sat there, the more worried he was getting.

They’d only allowed him to make the one phone call to his parents. Despite his sense of urgency in talking to them, he felt guilty when he told his mom where he was and what had happened. Mom had been surprised, yes; angry at sneaking out of the house, of course (he hadn’t detected anger during that phone call, but of course she had to be pissed off–if he were in her shoes he’d be mad). She’d also told him that she and Dad would come to pick him up immediately. Before they got off the phone she told him not to worry and that she and Dad loved him.

Officer Clapton had finished processing his paperwork, then turned him over to a detective named Warren Allen. Detective Allen had escorted Tim to what he supposed was his cell. It didn’t look like a traditional jail cell, but was rather more like a locked room with a long wooden bench that lined one wall and a toilet and sink on the other side.

A thin mattress and pillow sat on the bench. The door to the room had no windows.

Thirty minutes after sitting down on the bench, Detective Warren came in. “Your parents are coming to pick you up but I’ve got some bad news. Turns out we have a warrant for your arrest.”

“What?” Tim’s stomach curled in on itself at the news. And as Detective Warren read off the list of charges he felt a sense of dismay and despair come over him. That bastard lied to me, he thought. Gordon thinks he has connections, thinks he can make it all better if I cooperate. Well fuck him. The gloves come off. I’m telling the police everything I know.

But first he had to ensure the safety of his loved ones.

Detective Warren finished reading him the list of charges, told him he was now formally arrested and that he would be arraigned later in the morning and that he would explain the situation to his parents when they arrived. Tim nodded, feeling strangely calm now that he knew where things stood. He asked Detective Warren if he could see his parents when they arrived. Detective Warren told him he could see them during visiting hours at ten, but it was possible that he would be transported to the courthouse by then. If that were the case, he’d see them in court. They’d probably have an attorney for him by then. Tim had nodded, his mind on auto-drive now.

That had been two hours ago. He’d stayed awake, feeding off the adrenaline that was still running through his system.

And he’d considered his options.

Mom and Dad were probably going to retain the services of Doug Fenner, the attorney George’s dad had gotten. It would make sense if they did since Fenner was already familiar with their case. This latest incident was going to push Mom right over the edge regardless of Tim sneaking out of the house and getting picked up by the police.

He was pretty sure he could count on Mom (and Dad) to be angry enough to not only go to their lawyer, but press him to sue the city.

Fenner would probably advise him to plead not guilty for his arraignment. After the arraignment, Tim was going to request a closed-door meeting with him and his parents.

And then he was going to tell them everything.

It would sound crazy, but Tim was confident he could at least get the police out to the Bradfield estate to question Scott’s parents. Mr. Bradfield probably had no idea what his son was up to, not to mention having any knowledge of the zombies in his guesthouse.

If he could get the police out there as quickly as possible, they’d have the element of surprise. Mr. Bradfield would probably sic his own lawyer on the city, probably even on his folks and if that was the case let him have at it. Either way, Tim was going to expose Scott and his friends for the monsters they were. That guesthouse was going to be investigated even if Scott and his friends got rid of the zombies and cleaned the place up before a proper search could be conducted. There was still DNA, forensics…surely a proper search warrant would ensure a search of that magnitude would be undertaken. He also had Gordon’s own confession, which the bastard would deny, but Tim would insist the police follow through with the allegations that Scott and his friends murdered John Elfman. Scott couldn’t buy the silence of every kid that was at Susan Zimmerman’s party the night John had gone missing. Somebody would have seen something.

And as for Chelsea, he would make it clear that she was in danger, that Gordon had threatened her specifically. Surely they had to take threats like that seriously.

Of course the police, and possibly his attorney and parents, were less likely to believe that Gordon and his friends had killed those homeless people for the purpose of raising them from the dead, but he didn’t need to tell them that. All he had to reveal was that they’d kidnapped and imprisoned them in the guesthouse and tortured them until they died. He could say that Gordon was trying to extract himself from Scott, that he knew what was happening was wrong and wanted to avoid legal trouble and that’s why he’d sought Tim’s help. He’d dug up the grave at the Reamstown Cemetery to blackmail Tim into helping him come up with a scheme to get out of everything without going to the police. Tim had been appalled by the allegations of murder and wasn’t sure if he was going to help Gordon, was still thinking of what to do, in fact, when Officer Clapton pulled them over.

And that was pretty much the truth.

Tim sat down on the cot, fatigue suddenly coming over him. They’d taken his watch along with the rest of his possessions when he was processed, and last time he’d checked it was 2:30 A.M. It was hard to keep track of time in this room, but he guessed he’d been locked up for the past two hours. That sounded about right because now he was dead tired. He needed to lie down and get a few hours sleep, recharge his batteries for the day ahead of him.

Tim rested his head on the small pillow on the far side of the cot and turned over on his left side. He closed his eyes. He had it all planned out. He was going to remain silent until he could see his lawyer and his parents. Only then was he going to confess to what was happening, leaving out the part about the zombies. But first, he was going to reveal Gordon’s threat against Chelsea and ask that she be protected.

Then he was going to tell them that Scott, David, Steve, and Gordon had been up to no good.

With that decision firmly in place, Tim Gaines fell into a deep sleep almost immediately.

* * *

Gordon Smith waited a good thirty minutes before he called Steve Downing.

He waited with bated breath as the phone rang, sitting in his darkened bedroom.

Down the hall, his parents slept, their anger at him having diminished as quickly as it had arisen. They’d been furious when Gordon was escorted home by the cop, and had made a good show of displaying that anger by yelling at him in front of the officer, threatening to ground him for the rest of the summer, but the moment the officer left Mom had muttered, “I’m tired and going back to bed. We can talk about this in the morning.”

Gordon had experienced many of these proclamations in the past. What this meant was she was going to forget about it come morning. Dad might bring it up in passing, and it was possible the idea of grounding him would be floated between them, but it would never happen. It never happened before.

Steve picked up on the fifth ring. “Yeah?” His voice was groggy.

“It’s me,” Gordon said. “We need to talk.”

“Gord?”

“Yeah.” Gordon spoke in as low a tone as possible. “I’m sorry for waking you up.

Your folks didn’t hear, did they?”

“Fuck no, they’re on the other end of the house. What’s up?”

“We might have trouble,” Gordon began. “It’s about Count.” Gordon told an abbreviated version of what happened that evening, leaving out any notion that he’d gone to Count for help in the first place, as well as leaving out the part where he’d showed the zombies to him. He might have been dumb enough to get mixed up with Steve, Dave, and Scott, but he wasn’t dumb enough to admit that he was planning on ending everything.

“So you were driving around with Count Gaines because the little shit tried to blackmail you?” Steve asked.

“Yeah,” Gordon said, repeating the story to Steve again. “Like I said, he called me earlier in the day. Said if I didn’t go to the police and confess I robbed that grave that he would furnish them with proof. He said he’d snuck over to my place and planted evidence, but wouldn’t tell me where. He said he wanted to make a deal with me. For us to leave him alone, so I told him I’d talk to him.”

“That little fucker.”

“Yeah, tell me about it. That’s when we got picked up by the cops for violating curfew.”

“Violating curfew? There’s a curfew?”

“Yeah. If you’re under eighteen you’re not supposed to be out after eleven P.M., or some shit.”

“You aren’t? When’d that law go into effect?”

“I don’t know,” Gordon said, changing the subject quickly. “The point is, we lucked out. Count Gaines got taken to Brendan Hall and—“

“Brendan Hall? Oh man, is he in deep shit!”

“Yeah. I don’t know what for, but maybe they got a hard-on to really bust him now.”

Steve laughed. “That’s great! Bet he’s finally going to take the fall for all that shit we blamed him for!”

“Maybe,” Gordon said. “But it’s not gonna be so great if Tim and his parents fight the allegations, get a lawyer and raise a big enough stink that the cops are forced to do a thorough investigation. They might not only come poking around my place, but Scott’s.

What do you think they’re gonna find there?”

“That’s not gonna happen,” Steve said adamantly. He sounded more awake now.

“The cops asked me if I’d heard about John going missing,” Gordon said. “I’m positive Count was asked the same thing.”

Steve went silent.

“I played dumb,” Gordon continued. “Count didn’t know shit, of course, but I played dumb. Suppose somebody at the party saw John leave with us?”

“Nobody saw us.”

“Suppose they did?”

“Even if somebody saw John leave with us, it means nothing.”

“It will if Count Gaines raises a stink and the cops decide to search Scott’s place and find those zombies in the guesthouse.”

“Shit!” Steve sounded frustrated now. Gordon held his breath, hoping he’d conveyed his point. Of the four of them, Gordon had been the most reluctant to go along with the crimes they’d been committing. Scott had obviously noticed this, and Gordon wondered if Steve and Dave were aware of it and what Scott might have confided in them when Gordon wasn’t around. He had to tread carefully.

“When the cops pulled us over,” Gordon continued, “I told Count that if he started shit with me, his girlfriend Chelsea was toast.”

“Count Gaines has a girlfriend?”

“He’s been going out with Chelsea Brewer. You know, that little art chick from Mrs. Farner’s class.”

“That little thing?”

“I told Count Gaines that if the cops came around and questioned any of us, that we’d hurt her. I didn’t tell him how. I didn’t really have to. He’s afraid of us already.”

“You think that’ll work?”

Gordon thought about that for a moment. A month ago if he was asked that question, he would have said yes. Now he wasn’t so sure. “I don’t know,” he said. “He seemed pretty freaked out at the thought of any of us hurting Chelsea in any way. I’d like to think that put the scare into him.”

“How’d you like to see that bitch’s skinny little ass getting’ chomped by the zombies,” Steve said, the hint of a smile in his voice. “It would be even better if we made Count Gaines watch!”

“Yeah, it would,” Gordon said. No need to tell Steve that Tim had already seen the zombies. He’d explode if he knew. Gordon was counting on Gaines to keep that to himself, to not stir any trouble, which was why he’d threatened to have Chelsea hurt if he squealed.

“So what should we do?” Steve asked.

“You know where Chelsea lives?”

“Yeah. She lives near Danielle Sawyer, over on Fourth Street, just west of Cedar Street. In fact, she lives two doors down from Danielle. Right in the corner house.”

“You have any way to keep tabs on her?”

“Not really. I can drive by her house.”

“What about Scott or Dave? Do they know Chelsea’s friends? Even casually?”

“I don’t think so. I can check.”

“Do that. Tell them what I just told you. We need to watch what happens with her and keep our ears open to the rumor mill.”

“Well shit, that means we just gotta hang out with my neighbor, Joyce. You know, the crazy cat lady that lives next door to me?”

Gordon grinned. Joyce was a middle-aged woman that lived by herself in a large ranch house next to Steve’s. She’d been single as long as Gordon knew her, and had adult children who often dumped their spawn at her place on the weekends. Joyce was a nice enough lady, but could talk the ears off a donkey and sometimes talked to herself when she was tending to the garden in the back yard. She also had a lot of cats, somewhere in the neighborhood of seven. Or maybe it was ten. It was hard to keep count. Despite those annoying qualities, Joyce had the uncanny ability to know what was going on in town before it made the local weekly newspaper. She was like the little old lady in movies who spied on her neighbors with a telescope and then got on the phone to gossip with her friends about who was sleeping with whom, who’d lost their job at the paper mill, who’d been arrested for DUI the previous evening, what family tragedy had befallen the Green family who lived on the other side of town. Only instead of gossiping about it on the phone with her friends, Joyce kept the information bottled inside her because she had no friends.

She was always eager to share the information if you so much as paid the slightest bit of attention to her, though.

“That’s actually not a bad idea,” Gordon said. “Joyce seems to know everybody in town.”

“That’s the plan, then.” Steve seemed agreeable. He also sounded more awake now.

“I still think we should do something to get rid of the zombies permanently,”

Gordon said. “At least bring the idea up to Scott. If he feels the threat of discovery, he’ll agree.”

“You would think,” Steve said. He sounded more sympathetic to Gordon’s point of view now. “I can bring it up to him. Besides, we can always make more zombies, right?”

“Of course,” Gordon answered. Not if I can help it, he thought.

A police siren sounded in the distance, fading away in the early morning. “I’ll call you tomorrow.”

“Okay. Talk to you later.”

“Later.” Gordon hung up the phone. Another siren rose in the distance, joining the first one as it headed to some unknown disaster. For a minute Gordon wondered what would happen if the zombies locked in Scott’s guesthouse broke out. What kind of havoc would they cause? How would the police respond? He felt a brief flare of panic at the thought those police sirens were heading to Scott’s place, but then he realized they were heading elsewhere, out toward the northeast part of town. Zuck’s Woods lay toward the northeast side of town.

Gordon frowned at the thought.

It bothered him and it was hard for him to fall asleep.

Chapter Twenty

Not far away from where Gordon Smith had performed his impromptu spell, something stirred beneath the ground.

The dark forces that had been summoned had been growing steadily stronger all night. They’d harnessed the energy that had been bestowed on them, drawing more from the tear in the veil that had been opened. Seeking living organisms, the dark force had possessed all the available life forms in the surrounding area and duplicated itself by infecting more.

And it was working.

From the dead mole, to the squirrel, to the possum, it had moved up along the chain until it duplicated itself on to a human being. The human had been lounging at the very edge of Zuck’s Woods, looking up at the night sky when the force had driven the possum to transfer itself. The force no longer needed the dead to occupy. It was now strong enough to transfer itself on to living beings. First, though, the living being had to be killed.

An insatiable need to duplicate itself as rapidly as possible was what had driven the force to take down the human. Relying on the remnants of the possum’s instincts had driven it through the forest where it infected other animals. Once it infected the human, it had then ventured into the house, zeroing in on the warm body of a smaller human it sensed cowering behind a closed door. It didn’t take much for the now infected human to make a transfer on to one of its own.

And once the humans in the house were infected, they ventured out into the night.

The possum, still powered by the force, did the same.

And the force continued to replicate itself. One life form at a time.

It also learned.

Once in possession of the humans, it realized it had to hold back a little. Retreat into the shadows of the woods, observe the other humans who remained in their homes.

The element of surprise had to be used.

And with daylight, it came.

* * *

Jennifer Egan was already in her tights and tank-top and beginning the morning run on her treadmill when a shadow fell across the sliding door of her house.

She looked up and saw that it was Mike Lombardo, the kid from up the street.

Jennifer pressed the slow-down button on the treadmill. “Mike?”

Mike Lombardo slapped his hand on the glass sliding door. It wasn’t until Jennifer approached the door to see what was going on–she couldn’t really get a good look at him due to the lights in the exercise room–that she noticed he was injured badly. His chest was covered with blood, his left cheek bearing a horrible gash. “Oh God, Mike, get in here quick, I’ll call 911!” She opened the door and reached out to pull Mike inside, but he grabbed her. Jennifer barely had a chance to scream as he launched himself at her, ripping her throat out with two savage bites that brought her down in a rain of blood.

Two doors down, John Lombardo entered the back door of the Cyrus family home and managed to get halfway up the stairs before being confronted by Henry Cyrus. Henry stood at the top of the stairs, bearing a black handgun. Henry pointed the gun at John.

“Stop or I’ll shoot!”

John ignored the warning. Henry fired three shots, striking him in the shoulder and chest. John kept coming and was on Henry quickly in a flash of gunfire and blood.

The gunfire woke up Henry’s common-law wife, Maggie, and her two kids. The transfer was handled so quickly, though, that Henry was able to quickly subdue Maggie and make the transfer to her by his ownself. John took care of the two kids.

The gunshots woke up Nancy Armstrong, who lived in the home behind the Cyrus family. Nancy sat up in bed, the residue of her lover’s touch still on her skin and inside her. Her lover, Carl Boyd, had left the house a few hours ago and she’d been dozing, reliving their lovemaking in her dreams when the gunshots shattered them. Nancy sat up in bed, startled as three more gunshots rang out in quick succession, then reached for the phone on her nightstand. She picked it up, called 911, waited.

“911, what’s your emergency?”

“My name is Nancy Armstrong and I live at 3587 Oak Street in Spring Valley. I just heard gunshots coming from the house behind me.”

“How many gunshots did you hear Ms. Armstrong?”

“Six.”

“Are you sure they were gunshots?”

“Yes, I’m sure!” Nancy knew the sound of a gunshot. She’d accompanied her husband to firing ranges enough times to distinguish between a gunshot and a firecracker.

Her husband, Paul, was out of town on business. He was out of town on business a lot.

Every week, in fact. The thought that Paul suspected she’d taken on a lover was in the back of her mind constantly, and the first thing she’d thought of when she heard the shots was that, somehow, it was Paul gunning down Carl in cold blood outside the house. The gunshots had come from the house behind them, though, not from out front.

She was looking out the curtained window, trying to see if there was movement in the house behind her, when she heard what sounded like a faint scream that quickly cut off. “I just heard a scream!”

“Who lives in the house behind you, ma’am?”

“The Cyrus family.”

“We’re sending a car to your house and to 4321 Cedar Drive, ma’am.”

“Thank you.”

“Do you want me to—” But Nancy never heard the rest of the dispatcher’s question. She’d hung up the phone.

She’d been so engrossed by what was happening at the house behind hers that she never noticed the presence of somebody in her bedroom.

She never got to see the face of the person who killed her. Never got to see the ravaged face of Mary Lombardo as the teenager’s teeth sank into her soft throat and transferred the presence to her body.

In time, shortly before the sound of police sirens could be heard in the quiet, rural cul-de-sac, the reanimated bodies left their homes and darted quickly into the woods while the dark force continued to reach ever onward and outward, awakening the dead and the living alike.

* * *

When Officer Frank Clapton arrived at 4321 Cedar Drive, he had a feeling something wasn’t quite right.

He got out of his patrol car, mentally checking that he had his baton and side-arm, and walked to the front door. A second squad car had been dispatched to the home of Henry and Ellen Cyrus, one street over. Clapton knocked on the front door of 4321 Cedar Drive and waited.

He heard no sound from within. Something was not quite right…

Clapton knocked on the door again, harder. “Spring Valley Police, Ms.

Armstrong. You called?”

There was no answer. Only a slight breeze in the air, the chirruping of the crickets in the woods.

Clapton tried the door. It was locked.

Speaking into his shoulder-mounted radio, he said, “I’m getting no answer from Ms. Armstrong. I’m going around the back to check things out.”

A squawk of static, and then Officer Walsh, who’d been dispatched to the call from the next block, responded. “That’s affirmative. We’re not getting an answer at the Cyrus residence either.”

Clapton stepped off the porch and began making his way to the side of the Armstrong residence when there was another sound over the radio. Walsh came back on, his voice high and excited. “Dispatch, this is Officer Walsh reporting from the Cyrus residence. Request additional backup. I repeat, request additional backup units now!”

Clapton’s pulse spiked at the sound of Walsh’s voice. The worst thing for any officer was to hear the sound of a fellow officer in fear of his or her life. Officer Walsh sounded not just afraid, he sounded panicked.

He sprinted around the corner of the house, gun drawn, and activated his shoulder-mounted radio. “Officer Walsh, this is Clapton. I’m approaching the Cyrus residence from the direction of the Armstrong house on the north side.”

A female dispatcher called for more backup. “Officers request assistance at 4321

Cedar Drive and 3587 Oak Street. Code 412.”

And as Officer Clapton made his way around the side of the Cyrus house and saw what Officer Walsh was looking at, he felt another spike of panic. Officer Walsh was standing with his back against the wall of the house, his eyes wide with fright. Officer Clapton saw the large puddle of blood on the ground, the tattered flesh that lay in a pile near the wall, and then the panic began as things began to rapidly unravel.

* * *

Tim Gaines must have been in a very deep sleep because the next thing he remembered after lying on his cot in the cell, he was being shaken awake.

Tim blinked and sat up quickly, growing confused when he saw who it was that had woken him up.

Detective Andrews and Officer Frank Clapton stood before him. Both of them looked worried. Clapton looked almost fearful. He was still wearing his uniform from the night before. Tim rubbed his eyes and tried to straighten up. “What’s up?”

“We don’t have a lot of time, but you’ve got to come clean with us,” Officer Clapton said.

At the sound of his voice Tim was instantly awake and aware. “What are you talking about?”

“Tell me the truth,” Officer Clapton began. “What were you and Gordon really doing when I pulled you over last night?”

“I told you, we were talking.” The explanation came out so quickly that Tim realized the officer was probably looking for another answer. He looked at the cop and the detective as they stood in front of him and the expressions in their faces told him all he needed to know.

Something happened.

Tim felt all the blood drain from his face.

“Can the bullshit, Gaines,” Detective Andrews said. Gone was the calm, soothing voice and demeanor from last night when he was booked. Now Andrews sounded not only mad, but worried. “We know you have information regarding the disappearance of John Elfman.”

“And I know you’re not being truthful with me,” Officer Clapton said. “I can read it in your face. You just went dead pale.”

“No I didn’t,” Tim said, instantly feeling stupid for the denial.

“I can’t go into details,” Officer Clapton said. “But I have at least one dead man and over a dozen people missing from a neighborhood near Zuck’s Woods. They’re believed to be seriously injured or dead. The Pennsylvania State Police have been here since five o’clock assisting us and by nine we’re going to have a hell of a mess on our hands if you don’t tell us everything you know.”

“What’s happening?” Tim asked, his voice shaky.

Clapton and Detective Andrews glanced at each other. When Clapton spoke he did it with careful reserve. “We’ve found John.”

Tim’s throat was dry. “Is he dead?”

“He is now,” Clapton said.

Tim didn’t know how to respond to that. “What do you mean?”

Detective Andrew spoke to Clapton. “What exactly has this kid been accused of?”

Officer Clapton held up a hand to Andrew. He was looking directly at Tim.

From outside the cell, Tim could make out the faint sound of somebody crying.

Tim was worried. He couldn’t say anything without knowing the full extent of the events that had transpired. Had Gordon said anything? Were Gordon and his friends now accusing Tim of murdering John?

“I’m waiting, Tim,” Officer Clapton said. “I’ve got a dozen people missing and it looks like somebody is either on a killing spree or—”

“What are you talking about?” Tim felt the fear spike through his system, overwhelming him now.

“We’re not going to get shit out of this kid,” Detective Andrews said.

“You said John was dead,” Tim said, ignoring Andrews’ outburst. “What’s going on?”

“You tell us!” Officer Clapton said. Tim could tell the officer was struggling to contain his emotions, that he was trying to retain a professional edge in the face of chaos.

“I’ve got a dozen people missing from their homes in a neighborhood near Zuck’s woods, and I’ve got the remains of John Elfman lying dead in the city morgue, cut up into little pieces. Looks like he was chewed up by some kind of animal or something.”

“But that’s not the best part,” Detective Andrews said. He had his hands on his hips. He regarded Tim with a menacing glare. “The best part has to do with what Officer Clapton told me about the trouble you’ve faced the last few years. The allegations of devil-worship and the like. Especially the latest allegations of grave-robbing. Want to know why?”

Tim could only shake his head slowly.

“Because what we’ve been witnessing defies all logic and flies in the face of rationality,” Detective Andrews continued. “Now you either tell us what you know or so help me, I’ll do all within my power to make sure you’re fingered for much of the chaos that’s been exploding in Spring Valley since—”

“Enough!” Officer Clapton held up a hand to silence the detective. Looking directly at Tim, he said, “John wasn’t entirely dead when Officer Walsh and I found him.

Pieces of him were strewn over a one block area. The parts I saw were crawling toward a house on Oak Street near Zuck’s Woods.”

“Wh-what?” Did Officer Clapton say parts of John were crawling?

“I didn’t stutter,” Officer Clapton said. “They were crawling. Like they were still alive.”

“And on top of that, we have a dozen people missing in that neighborhood, and whoever took them wasn’t very nice about it,” Detective Andrews said. “There was blood in all the houses we entered. These people didn’t go quietly.”

Officer Clapton’s gaze was imploring him. Please tell me everything you know.

And as much as Tim wanted to, as much as he wanted to tell them everything, something made him hold back. The fear of being blamed for everything that was going on.

Tim took a deep breath. “I’ll tell you what I know, but first I need to talk to my lawyer.”

“Goddammit, we don’t have time for this!” Detective Andrews sputtered.

“My lawyer,” Tim said, looking at the detective with a steely gaze. A sudden burst of confidence thrummed through him, the knowledge that whatever was happening wasn’t his fault the overriding influence behind it. “Now!”

And with that, Officer Clapton and Detective Andrews left Tim’s cell to summon Doug Fenner, the lawyer George Ulrich’s dad hired for them.

* * *

Billy Thompson and Candace Drombowsky’s bodies had lain undiscovered in the thick forest of Zuck’s Woods for almost forty years.

Yet their spirits had always remained.

Trapped by something that held them to the spot, they’d waited for the right moment to break free when they could venture forth and seek vengeance on the people that murdered them.

Thanks to the malevolent force Gordon Smith unwittingly conjured, they now had their chance.

Billy and Candace’s essence directed the force into the ground where their bodies lay, and that was all that was required to ignite the spark they’d been waiting for in order to depart this place.

The force could have done that itself, but only to a limited degree. It really had no overwhelming power over remains that had been reduced to bones, but because of the ethereal spirits of Billy and Candace had remained in the area, it had sufficient power to fuel them, to give them enough strength to take control and use their brittle remains to dig their way out of their grave.

It took most of the night. By the time they reached topsoil the sun was up, the birds were chirping and darting among the tall grass, snatching insects. From two miles away at a distant farm, a cock crowed. Five hundred yards down, water burbled in a stream. Candace and Billy did not hear any of this, nor did they need to as they dragged their dessicated bones out of the soil. The earth had preserved some of the tendons that glued their limbs together, as well as their surface skin, giving their corpses a dried, mummified appearance. The tattered remnants of the clothing they’d been buried in crumbled into dust around their feet as they turned their attention to the north.

The presence that directed their movements was the main force that drove them forward, picking their way through the forest. But within the memory of their essence were those that had done them harm. It burned deep in their memories, giving the dark spirit a focus. A sense of direction on where to spread itself. It pushed its two new vessels forward, working at what it was called forth to do.

The spirits of Billy and Candace cared not one whit about what the dark force wanted. They had their own agendas.

Revenge.

And like a beacon in the night, Billy Thompson and Candace Drombowsky shambled their way through the woods, heading toward the Bradfield estate as if they’d known it was there all along.

Chapter Twenty-One

Tim didn’t know what was going on beyond the confines of Brendan Hall, but when his parents arrived a little after seven-thirty with Doug Fenner, his mother shot him a worried glance.

As they filed into the interrogation room, Tim noticed his parents looked worried.

Officer Clapton still had that look of fear on his face. Detective Andrews didn’t even look at him. Two other people joined them, a man and a woman dressed in business attire.

They took seats across from Tim as Officer Clapton closed the door.

His parents sat on either side of him with Doug on Dad’s right. Mom squeezed his hand. “Are you okay?”

Tim managed a smile for her. “I’m okay.”

Dad gave Tim a nod, then conferred with Doug in quiet tones for a moment as everybody settled in. Mom leaned close to Tim. “I know you’re scared honey, but Clapton is on our side. We had a talk with him in the hallway.”

“You did?”

Mom nodded. “We talked to him and Detective Andrews. They’re going to work on getting the warrant for your arrest revoked so we can get you out of here.”

Tim was watching his dad and Doug Fenner talk among themselves in low tones.

Dad nodded at something Doug said and caught Tim’s gaze. He smiled, gave him a thumbs up sign. Tim relaxed. The tension in the room, which had been unbearable a moment ago, suddenly eased.

“Somebody needs to get out to Chelsea’s place,” Tim told his mother. “Gordon Smith threatened her.”

Officer Clapton heard him. “When did Gordon threaten Chelsea?”

“Last night. When you pulled us over he told me that if I told you anything about what was really happening, he would hurt her.”

“And what’s really happening, Gordon?” Detective Andrews asked.

All eyes centered on Tim.

Tim felt his breath draw in, felt his nerves getting frayed the way they always did when all the attention was focused on him. He glanced around the conference table at the people assembled here–Mom, Dad, Doug Fenner, Officer Clapton and Detective Andrews and the two people Tim had never seen before. One of them was a slim, attractive woman dressed in a burgundy suit with dark hair pulled back from her face. She smiled at Tim.

“Hi Tim, I’m Diane Keller with the District Attorney’s Office.” She reached across the table to shake his hand.

Tim shook her hand as she introduced him to the man seated next to her, who was older with graying hair and a ruddy complexion. “This is Pat Brown, my associate.”

Tim shook Pat’s hand and then Doug Fenner said, “We’ve all discussed your case prior to coming here to talk to you. We want to hear the truth of what happened, Tim.

Like your mother said, your arrest warrant is going to be revoked this morning. You aren’t in any trouble.”

“What about for any so-called future crimes Gordon and Scott decide to frame me for?” Tim asked.

“The Lancaster County Prosecutor’s Office is well aware of the history of harassment leveled against you,” Diane said. “We’re already looking into filing criminal charges against Gordon Smith, Scott Bradfield and possibly others for making false statements to police and for filing false criminal charges against you.”

Tim glanced at Doug Fenner, who nodded. “She’s correct,” he said. “Go ahead, Tim. You’re among people you can trust now.”

Tim could feel that this was the truth. For the first time in years he felt things were finally turning his way. He glanced at each person in the room. Officer Clapton nodded at him, his features open and kind, ready to listen. Likewise, Detective Andrews had lost that hard-assed edge he’d possessed last night. And his parents didn’t look angry the way he thought they would.

“Some of you are going to think this is pretty crazy,” Tim said.

“After what I saw a few hours ago, I think I can believe anything,” Officer Clapton said.

“John Elfman’s body parts moving around?” Tim asked him.

“Yep.”

The adults weren’t laughing at this. They appeared to be taking it quite seriously.

“So he told you about that?” Tim asked them. “About John Elfman being found in pieces? And that his body parts were moving?”

Nods all around the table. Even his parents nodded, their expressions grave. Diane said, “Yes, he did.”

“And you believe him?”

“What Officer Clapton saw was backed up by his partner and several other officers,” Pat Brown said. “I’m not inclined to disbelieve several credible witnesses at this point, especially in light of other events that have happened this morning.”

“What else happened?” Tim asked.

Detective Andrews cut in. “In a minute. For now, whatever you have to say, please tell us. It can’t be any crazier than some of the shit that’s been going on.”

“Before I go any further, I need you to do something.” Tim turned to Officer Clapton. “Can you send somebody to Chelsea Brewer’s house to watch over her and her family?”

Officer Clapton nodded and rose to his feet. “Give me her address.” Tim rattled off Chelsea’s address and phone number and Clapton exited the room. He returned a moment later. “Done. I’ve got a squad car heading there now.”

Tim breathed a sigh of relief. “Thanks.”

“How exactly did Gordon Smith threaten Chelsea?” Detective Andrews asked.

“He said if I told you anything about what was really happening that he would kidnap her and feed her to the zombies in Scott Bradfield’s guesthouse.”

Despite the weirdness of the threat, none of the adults in the room appeared taken aback by it. Only Pat Brown seemed surprised. He glanced at Diane, then turned to Tim.

“Zombies?”

“Please start at the beginning, Tim,” Diane urged.

So Tim did, beginning with the day Gordon Smith approached him that afternoon at school about the novel he was reading, how he’d only seemed interested in the scene where the protagonist utilizes a black magic spell to raise the dead. He touched on some of his past history with Gordon, Steve, David, and Scott, then brought the narrative to the Reamstown Cemetery incident. “Gordon told me last night that he did rob that grave, but that he hadn’t intended to drop my book there. He said that was an accident.”

“You don’t have to defend him,” Mom said.

“I know.” Tim looked at the prosecutors. “Gordon told me he needed the remains for a ritual. That’s why he was so interested in my book. He and his friends have some weird idea that this novel, Back From the Dead, is real. That’s kinda what started this whole thing.” He gave them all a brief recount of that long ago first assault when he was in sixth grade, how they’d equated his reading interest with who Tim was personally. As he talked, Diane frowned. Pat Brown gave a slight chuckle, his features displaying astonishment. “Anyway, he thought Back From the Dead was real. And he must’ve thought if he utilized the black magic formula that’s described in the novel for what he wanted to do, well…” He glanced at his mom, who nodded. “He said that he and…Scott and those guys…were involved in some pretty heavy stuff.”

“What kind of heavy stuff?”

Tim told them. About the trips to Philadelphia and Harrisburg to kidnap homeless people, how they were transported back to Scott’s house and tied up in the abandonded guesthouse on the property and beaten and tortured until they died. Mom and Dad looked surprised and shocked by these allegations, but the prosecutors and police weren’t. It almost seemed like they’d expected something that twisted to come from the mind of Scott Bradfield.

It wasn’t until he got to the part about the spell being used to reanimate the dead homeless people so they could be put through more abuse that gasps of shock went around the table.

“Gordon told you this last night?” Officer Clapton asked.

“Yes sir,” Tim said. “I saw them, too.”

“What do you mean you saw them?”

Tim told them about Gordon’s visit to the house yesterday morning and his proposition, the blackmail attempt. As he related this, Mom and Dad became visibly angry. Mom turned to Officer Clapton. “So it’s okay for Gordon Smith, Scott Bradfield and the creeps they hang out with to threaten and psychologically abuse my son and get away with it, but the moment some religious nut gets a hair up their ass about a harmless horror novel he’s reading, you throw him in jail? Tell me what rationale you use to justify the actions of your department, Officer Clapton? I’d really like to know.”

Officer Clapton didn’t acknowledge Mrs. Gaines verbal barb. His attention was focused on Tim and his testimony. “What was it Gordon told you? What did he threaten you with?”

“He said if I didn’t help him get out of the situation Scott and the others were involved in, that he would plant evidence that I robbed that grave. He also said he’d make it hard for me to get out of it.”

“Hard to get out of it?”

Tim shrugged. “He…he made it sound like he had an in with you guys. With the police. You know, because of my reputation and all the shit that’s happened.” The words were tumbling out of his mouth now. “I can’t say I blame him. If I’d gone through life pushing a guy around that always got in trouble for fighting back, I’d think I could get away with it, too.”

“Gordon convinced you that you wouldn’t be believed if you went to us?”

Detective Andrews asked.

Tim nodded. “Yes.”

“How did he think you could help him?” Diane asked.

“I think he’s afraid of being caught,” Tim said. “He told me that he didn’t want to get in trouble for participating in the crimes Scott and the others were committing, but he didn’t want to make it seem that he was formally getting out of it. If you ask me, I think he was scared to tell Scott that they were taking things too far. I think he just wanted to ease his way out of it and hope Scott and the others would eventually get bored and do something else. That’s what he wanted me to do. Find a way to make the spell not work, so Scott and others would lose interest in what they’re doing.”

Mom muttered. “What could be possibly worse than what those cretins were doing?”

“So he blackmailed you into helping him?” Diane prodded.

“Yeah.” Tim drew forward in his chair, posture straight. “He told me about the spell, told me what they’d been doing, and he didn’t know how to stop it. He thinks I know how to end the spell, but of course I don’t. I tried telling him that, but he wouldn’t listen. He just said I had to come up with a way to end the spell or he’d make the police aware of the evidence, that he’d frame me for the grave robbery. And…well…” He shrugged and looked at his parents. “My folks and my friends, Al and George, they’ve been through enough because of their association with me anyway. I didn’t want to put them through any more. You know?”

“Oh, honey,” Naomi hugged him. Dad patted him on the back.

“So you felt compelled to help him?” Officer Clapton asked.

“At first I didn’t believe him,” Tim said. “He told me he’d show me proof, so he took me over to the Bradfield place last night and showed me.”

“And what did you see?” Diane asked.

Tim told them how they’d snuck onto the property, how Gordon had instructed Tim to stand back while he’d opened the guesthouse door and shined a flashlight into the interior of the structure. He told them about the two things inside, chained and shackled up against the far wall. “They certainly looked like zombies. I guess.” Tim scratched his head. The five seconds or so he’d gazed into that house had seared itself into his memory but had also scarred him. “They looked dead, they were all messed up, covered in blood and one of them looked…I don’t know…kinda bloated and rotted, I guess.”

Tim concluded the events by relating their drive through town, how he’d tried to come to grips with what he’d seen. “That’s when you pulled us over,” Tim said, nodding to Officer Clapton. “And that’s when Gordon threatened Chelsea. Said that if I told you any of this, if the cops even came around his house to talk to him about it, he’d make sure Chelsea was hurt.”

“Don’t worry about that,” Officer Clapton said. “She’ll be under protection.”

“Her family, too,” Detective Andrews said.

“So did they kill John Elfman?” Tim asked. He looked at Officer Clapton.

“We don’t know that for sure,” Detective Andrews said.

“When was the last time you saw John?” Officer Clapton asked Tim.

“At Susan Zimmerman’s party a few nights ago,” Tim said. “I was there for a little bit with Chelsea, Matt, George, and Al. We didn’t stay long. I don’t think we barely spoke two words with John.”

“Did you see Gordon and his friends hang out with John that night?”

Tim thought about it. For the life of him, he couldn’t remember. He shook his head. “I don’t know,” he said. “Sorry. I didn’t even know he was missing until you told me he was dead.”

There was a lull in Tim’s narrative for a moment. Diane and Pat conferred quietly with each other, then Pat whispered something to Detective Andrews. Officer Clapton tried to smile in encouragement at the Gaines family. Dad and their lawyer were talking quietly while Mom patted Tim’s hand. “Everything’s going to be okay,” she told him.

Tim nodded and tried to feel better about everything. That was hard to do when he wasn’t entirely convinced Chelsea was safe and Gordon and his friends were in custody.

“What happened this morning?” Tim asked.

Detective Andrews nodded at Officer Clapton.

“We have several people missing from a cul de sac near Zuck’s Woods,” Officer Clapton said. “One of the 911 calls said a neighbor was trying to break in to her house.

When I arrived I made my way around the rear of the property and saw John lying on the ground. At first I didn’t know what I was looking at, but then I saw his arm. It was moving. Like something out of a horror movie. The hand was dragging itself along. Like this.” Clapton demonstrated by crab-walking his hand across the conference room table.

“That’s when I made out it was a body and that the pieces…they were all moving. I didn’t know who it was at first until my partner shot the shit out of it and stopped it.”

“So it was moving?” Tim asked.

“It was trying to get me!” Officer Clapton’s voice was adamant. He fixed Tim with a stare that told him he was serious.

“His partner can verify this,” Detective Andrews said. “I wouldn’t have believed it either if other officers didn’t see it.”

“You don’t know what happened to these people?” Tim asked.

“No, but it doesn’t look good,” Detective Andrews said.

“What do you mean by that?”

“The State Police are investigating,” Diane said. “I’m sorry we can’t reveal more, but we’re trying to keep as tight a lid on this as we can. We don’t want to start any kind of panic.”

“What the hell is going on?” The tone of Tim’s voice must have cut through the beauracracy because Diane and Pat started slightly. They glanced at each other and Pat nodded at Diane.

“We believe the people missing have met with foul play,” Diane said. “Their residences are empty, in some cases there are signs of a struggle. The State Police are organizing searches in Zuck’s woods.”

“Send somebody out to the Bradfield place,” Tim said. He could feel his heart racing with the urgency. “Do it now.”

As if the law enforcement personnel present sensed his urgency, they all rose as one. Tim and his parents got up too, along with Doug Fenner. Detective Andrews exited the room while Officer Clapton addressed the Gaines family. “We’ll get a team of Detectives out to the Bradfield residence and we’ll have officers pick up Scott’s friends.”

“If the State Police are searching Zuck’s Woods, they should look for places that appear to have been dug up recently,” Tim said. “Gordon said the area he held the ritual in was where he and his friends buried those homeless men.”

Officer Clapton nodded. “We’ll get them. Don’t worry.”

Pat stepped forward. “I think until we can formally have the arrest warrant withdrawn through the court, Tim should remain at Brendan Hall in protective custody.”

Naomi looked like she was going to protest but Doug put his hand on her shoulder. “I’d like that withdrawal faxed to my office by noon.”

“You got it,” Pat said.

As they filed out of the interrogation room with his parents on either side of him, Detective Andrews said, “We’ll get a team out to the Bradfield residence and we’ll have Gordon, Steve, and David picked up and brought in for questioning. Don’t worry Mr. and Mrs. Gaines, we’ll get to the bottom of this.”

“You’d better,” Naomi said.

“Let me know when Chelsea is safe too,” Tim said. He caught Officer Clapton’s gaze in the hallway. The officer nodded.

And then Tim was led back into the cell he’d spent last night in. His parents hugged him one last time and then he was ushered inside. Detective Andrews poked his head inside quickly. “Are you hungry? Can I get you anything from the cafeteria?”

At the mention of food, Tim’s stomach rumbled. He hadn’t eaten a thing since last night. “Yeah, I am.”

“I’ll bring you some breakfast. Be right back.”

And with that, the door was closed. Tim sat down, then got up again and began pacing the room, unable to get Chelsea out of his mind and hoping against all odds that she was safe.

Chapter Twenty-Two

Scott Bradfield had a feeling Tim Gaines would rat on Gordon, so he’d done the only logical thing he could think of. He told his father that the fuckwad was cooking up another bullshit scheme, another lame attempt at discrediting and defaming him.

Tom Bradfield listened as Scott told him a simplified story of what he’d made up shortly after talking to Dave and Gord early this morning. He’d been woken out of a sound sleep by his cell phone after a rousing night of bong hits and sex at Rebecca’s house. He’d snatched the phone up and was instantly awake when Gordon told him what happened between him and Tim.

There was no doubt Count Gaines’s parents would hound the DA about pursuing criminal charges against Gordon. That was what Gordon was trying to warn him about and Scott agreed with him. “If they come after me, they might come poking around at your place,” Gordon had told him. “And I ain’t going to say anything–you know me better than that–but you have to know that even if I do everything I can to steer them away from going to your place, they’re going to do it anyway. And I don’t want them to find the zombies.”

That had been the pisser, the thought that the cops would find the zombies.

Thinking about it infuriated Scott, but he’d quickly calmed down and told Gordon he would take care of it. Then he thanked him for the warning. “Don’t mention it,” Gordon had said. “I told Count that if the cops came around our places, that his girlfriend Chelsea would be hurt.”

“You what?” It was that confession that pissed Scott off more than Gordon getting picked up last night for a truancy violation.

“I just wanted to scare him, okay?” Gordon had protested. “I didn’t mean anything by it!”

Despite the fact that such a threat was something Scott would have levied against Tim himself, he didn’t like the idea of Gordon pulling something like this. He wondered how it was handled; did Tim take the threat seriously? Would he tell the cops Gordon had threatened Chelsea? If Tim’s folks got involved, the cops were bound to find out. “You better get ready to start denying you ever told him that shit,” Scott advised Gordon. He hadn’t been in the mood, nor in the proper space, to unleash his anger fully at Gordon–

he’d retreated to the end of the hall near the lone bathroom at that end of the house for privacy. “Listen, we’ll talk about this later. In the meantime, call David and tell him what’s going on. I’ll take care of things here.”

“What are you going to do?”

Scott didn’t have an answer for Gordon at the time, but he assured him the problem would be taken care of.

Tom Bradfield listened patiently as Scott told his father about Tim Gaines attempting to blackmail Gordon Smith, how it all went back to that horror novel Gaines claimed he’d loaned to Gordon being found at the cemetery after it was ransacked. He told his father that Tim had been acting strangely the past few weeks at school; not talking to anybody, reading more weird books than was usual for him, and hanging out with George Ulrich and Al Romero, with the latter known for being a social outcast and a real weirdo. He also told him about Chelsea Brewer, how Tim had been hanging out with her lately, and he revealed some of her backstory to him: her penchant for gothic clothing and music, how she’d withdrawn from school briefly in the tenth grade and admitted to a hospital for self-mutilation. His father had visibly reacted to that, raising his eyebrows in a gesture that told Scott his father did not approve of such actions. Scott wrapped it up by telling his father about running into Tim and his friends at Susan’s party the other night and how Tim had made a cryptic statement to him. “He told us to be ready, that something was coming,” Scott said, the lie flowing effortlessly. “Then he kinda chuckled and left with his friends.”

Tom Bradfield took a sip of his coffee. He was a lean, handsome man, in his mid-fifties with short brown hair that held only a hint of gray. He’d arrived home from a business trip late last night and was already up bright and early, the Wall Street Journal spread out before him, already dressed for his morning golf game in a white tank top and gray shorts. “That doesn’t sound like much of a threat to me, Scott.”

“It will be if his parents get another hair up their ass and make noise again.”

“On what grounds?” Tom raised his coffee cup to his lips, his eyes daring.

“He’s told me more than once that he’s going to get even with me for what happened when we were in sixth grade,” Scott said, making up the lie as it came to him.

“He’s had it in for me ever since. You know it, too. I just don’t want the cops to come around here. I know that took a lot out of you and Mom last time. I don’t want it to happen again.”

Tom appeared to consider this. He kept his gaze on Scott as he thought about it, sipping his coffee. Scott held his old man’s gaze; he could tell his father was trying to see if he was telling him the truth. Scott had deliberately lied about a few things to set a precedent; he’d established a few tell-tale signs that indicated he was lying about something and every time it happened, Dad caught him. Not this time, though. Dad was buying this story entirely.

“So what do you think we should do about it?” Tom Bradfield asked.

“I didn’t do anything wrong,” Scott said. “I was at Rebecca’s all night. I was also with Rebecca the night the Reamstown Cemetery was broken into.”

Tom Bradfield nodded and sipped his coffee casually. “That’s true. I can’t see how Tim could frame you for something like that. And you’re sure someone can vouch for you? Were there witnesses who can say they saw you?”

“We were at the movies the night the cemetery was broken into. I still have the receipts. After the movie was over, we went to Ruby Tuesday’s, then we went to her place. Her mom was home and we hung out with her all night. As for last night.” Scott shrugged. “We hung out with her mom until midnight, then she went to bed. Rebecca and I sat up and hung out in her room and I fell asleep.”

“I see.” Tom Bradfield took another sip of his coffee, his gaze not leaving his son.

If he disapproved of Scott sleeping over at Rebecca’s last night, he didn’t show it.

“Anyway, I just have a feeling Tim’s parents are going to get the police involved again and I wanted to let you know.”

“Well, now I know.” Tom nodded at Scott. “Don’t worry about it. If they come around, I’ll talk to them.”

Scott smiled good-naturedly. “Thanks, Dad.” He left the kitchen, letting his faux relief shine through as he exited the kitchen.

He did not see his dad’s features change as he left the room. It was subtle, and if you did not know the elder Bradfield it would not be noticeable.

Tom Bradfield’s easy-going disposition had turned into a frown of suspicion.

* * *

Scott had just finished getting dressed after taking a quick shower when the doorbell rang.

He made as if he was casually going downstairs. He didn’t want to make it known to his dad that he was hanging around the house to see if the police showed up, so he’d darted upstairs to shower, being careful to be as leisurely and casual about it as possible.

The more he could stick to his normal schedule, the better. Mom was in the master bathroom getting showered and dressed for the day, and Dad would no doubt be getting ready for meeting up with his golf buddies. Mom would probably go to the Country Club for whatever it was she did on Saturday. That left Scott with some time to get rid of the zombies.

He’d placed a quick call to Dave and Steve before he took his shower. “Get over here by ten,” he’d told them. “When my parents are gone, we’re getting those fucking zombies out of the guesthouse and getting rid of them.” Dave and Steve were already hip to it, having been tipped off last night by Gordon. They were only too eager to lend a hand.

Scott descended the last few steps quietly.

Dad was talking to somebody at the front door. He didn’t sound too pleased.

Scott hung back near the stairs trying to listen. From where he was standing, whoever was on the porch wouldn’t be able to see him, but Scott could hear them perfectly. They sounded like cops.

“…just like to have a word or two with your son about it.”

“I’m afraid not,” Dad said. “If you wish to speak to my son, it will be through our lawyer.”

“He isn’t a suspect, Mr. Bradfield. We just want to talk to him about a missing classmate of his. Can we please speak to him?”

“Tell you what? How about we schedule a meeting? You can question Scott in the presence of our lawyer. You can come here, or we can do it in my lawyer’s office.

Whichever you prefer.”

“Can we come in and talk with you, then?”

“You’re talking with me now.” Even though Dad’s back was to Scott, he could tell Dad was putting on that smiley face that seemed to say, don’t fuck with me. “Now if you’ll excuse me, gentlemen, I have an appointment. I trust you can see your way down the driveway and to your vehicle?”

There was a short pause. Then: “Give us a call then, Mr. Bradfield. We’ll schedule something.”

Scott watched as Dad took a business card one of the detectives handed over.

Then the detectives retreated off the porch and down the driveway.

Dad stayed at the front door the whole time. Watching them leave.

When Dad closed the door and turned around, Scott was still standing at the bottom of the staircase. Dad gave no indication that he was surprised to see Scott standing there. “That was easy. We’re going to have to get them off your back, though.”

“Are we going to set up a meeting with Leon?” Leon Hagar was the Bradfield family attorney.

“Yes. Probably for sometime in the next few days.” Dad fished into his pockets and extracted his keys, which he tossed to Scott. “Do me a favor. Wait until those clowns are gone and then take the Corvette down to Landis Wash and have them do a hand wash.”

“Sure thing, Dad!” Scott grinned. Driving the Corvette was always a treat, one he hardly ever got to partake in. “I’ll leave in a few minutes.” He dashed back up the stairs to his room.

Once again, he didn’t see his father’s features change as he left his presence. That look of concern had grown stronger.

* * *

The moment the Corvette was out of sight Tom Bradfield got up from his favorite chair in the living room, crossed over to where he left his sandals, put them on, and headed to the kitchen. Carol had left fifteen minutes ago for the Country Club. She belonged to some social group, probably some kind of club for rich Country Club women, and the group held their monthly meetings in one of the conference rooms at the Bent Creek Country club. Tom had almost bought a house in the area, which was an exclusive, gated community, but he’d decided against it. He liked it where he was just fine.

Being in his development, which was close to the edge of Zuck’s Woods, was exactly where he wanted to be.

It had been easy to get Scott to take the ‘Vette out for a wash. Scott loved that car, and Tom had almost bought him one a few months ago, but Carol talked him out of it.

She said they were giving their son too much. She was right, of course. Despite Scott’s involvement in extra-curricular activities at school, and his seamless academic and sports record, he and Carol did not require Scott to work a part-time job. They gave him a weekly allowance of three hundred dollars, which Scott was allowed to spend however he wished. Tom had given Scott his old SUV, and while that was a fine car for a boy to have, when Scott expressed such unbridled enthusiasm for the ‘Vette, Tom had almost given in and bought him one. “We buy him too many things,” Carol had argued. “If he wants one, let him work for it.”

Tom exited the kitchen through the side door. He paused at the side deck, making sure he was alone, then headed toward the rear deck.

The guesthouse sat lonely and forlorn a hundred yards away from the house. It was a shame they’d never done anything to the place. When Tom bought the house five years ago he’d had every intention of using it as a bona fide guesthouse. It was built by the original owner, but was left unfinished when Tom and Carol bought the property.

They just hadn’t had the time to complete it.

Tom frowned as he drew closer to the guesthouse. The detectives hadn’t accused Scott of anything, but the first thing they’d asked was to speak to him. The second thing they’d asked was to conduct a brief search of the property. Tom had said no to both. The detectives told him they only wanted to question Scott about a missing classmate of his, a guy named John Elfman. They had reason to believe John was hurt and might have wandered onto the property, that he might even now be lying somewhere hurt and unconscious in the woods that bordered the yard, or maybe behind the guesthouse. As the detectives related this, Tom watched them casually and noticed something that troubled him.

One of the detectives had been glancing around the property, making sweeps with those robo-cop eyes police officers and detectives always seemed to possess. He supposed it was standard procedure for a pair of detectives to give locations the quick once-over, only this guy seemed to be really interested in the area where the guesthouse was located, which he could see thanks to a direct view through the large windows in the living room of the house, which opened up to the rear of the property. He kept darting his gaze toward it, then averting it during the conversation. Tom feigned ignorance as he denied their requests to talk to Scott.

So naturally, Tom wanted to see what it was that had interested the detective.

He noticed the smell about ten yards from the guesthouse. It was masked with an underlying scent, one of freshly-scented pine. Tom wrinkled his nose. His limbs grew light, his heart raced as he approached the guesthouse and stopped.

The sun beat high overhead, already bearing down on what was going to be an unbearably hot day. Tom listened for any sounds within the guesthouse. He heard nothing.

Tom fished the key to the guesthouse out of his shorts and unlocked the door.

He pushed the door open.

The smell wafted out of the guesthouse, nearly bowling him over with its intensity. Tom took an involuntary step back and gagged.

Then he got a look at what was inside the guesthouse and choked back a scream.

His heart raced faster. His stomach lurched in his belly.

All the breath seemed to run out of him.

And then, tapping into a sudden burst of energy, he took a quick step inside, grabbed the doorknob and pulled the door closed.

Then he turned and ran like hell back to the house.

* * *

Tom Bradfield was waiting for Scott on the side deck when he came home an hour later, the Corvette newly washed and shining in the morning sun.

Scott grinned as he exited the vehicle. “Here we go! Clean as the day it rolled off the lot!”

Tom Bradfield was nursing a scotch—no ice, no water. He hardly drank alcohol before noon and here it was, barely a quarter till ten in the morning. “Scott, we need to have a talk.”

Scott was on his way to the side door of the house when Tom said this. He froze.

“What’s up?”

“It’s about those detectives that came here earlier.”

“What about them?”

“They told me they wanted to question you about a guy named John Elfman. He’s gone missing. They asked if they could search the property. I denied their request.” Tom fixed his son with a steely gaze. “They didn’t bring up Tim Gaines at all. They didn’t mention the Reamstown Cemetery. Why did you lie to me?”

Scott rebounded from that direct question very well. He looked startled, then made a remarkable save. “I didn’t know anything about John Elfman. Honest. I thought they were going to razz me about Tim Gaines again.”

“I saw what you have in the guesthouse.”

There was no quick save for such a direct statement. Scott’s face went deathly pale. Tom could see his son’s hands twitch as he fought to remain casual. “Wh-what do you mean?”

“I mean, the two corpses in the guesthouse.”

“Corpses?”

“Scott, come up here on the deck. Sit down.”

Scott remained where he was, hesitating between bolting toward the house and approaching the deck.

“We need to talk about this, but I can’t do it if I have to shout at you from the deck. Your mother isn’t home, and we need to talk about this now before she gets home. I also don’t want to make a scene in case somebody happens to see it. So please, come here. Sit down.”

Scott looked like he was going to hesitate again, but common sense got the best of him. He quickly strode up the deck steps and slid into a chair on the other side of the glass table that so many late afternoon deck parties had been held around.

Tom saw Scott glance quickly at the guesthouse and he felt a momentary brush of shame as he saw the fear in his son’s eyes. This was the first time Tom had ever confronted his son about any of the crimes he’d participated in. When he was threatened with expulsion from Spring Valley Elementary School for his part in the assault on the Gaines boy, Tom had wanted Scott to see a child psychiatrist. Carol vehemently opposed it, and they’d had a bitter fight over it. Tom had relented. Carol had always been the one to coddle the boy; when Scott was thrown out of two private schools for his behavior toward other students it had been Carol that met with the school administrators. Her attempts at smoothing things over hadn’t been successful, and she’d never been one to discipline Scott. Carol was on the fast track up the ladder at her current firm at the time, and there was no way she could afford the time off to deal with the administrators, so she’d made a deal with their son: as long as he kept a clean academic record and didn’t cause them any trouble, they would support him financially through school and into college.

In hindsight, Tom should have held his ground. Should have insisted Scott be seen by a child psychiatrist. Should have insisted on having more influence on the way the boy was being raised. Should have insisted that with the bad actions Scott partook in that there were consequences.

On the other hand, Tom should have been around more to insure the boy never wound up like him.

He and Carol should have had a firmer hand in raising Scott. They shouldn’t have been so focused on their careers and maintaining their status in the neighborhood.

As Tom sipped from his drink, looking at his son, he didn’t see a monster sitting across from him. He saw himself almost forty years ago. A scared, troubled kid who had no guidance, no way to unleash his frustrations. A kid who had potential but was in danger of sabotaging it due to some unspeakable streak of violence that thrummed inside him that sometimes took control unexpectedly.

Tom had been in his son’s shoes before. He’d committed a similar crime. And despite that, he’d changed that part of himself. Became a contributing member to society.

And kept his dirty secret buried.

“I want to help you, son,” Tom said gently but firmly. “I saw those corpses in the guesthouse and they couldn’t have gotten in there by themselves. You and I know that our family has the key to the place. I also think Gordon and your other friends had something—”

“They did it, Dad. It wasn’t me.” Scott was looking at his father with a new sense of urgency, but it wasn’t working. Tom had knocked Scott out of his senses with that simple statement, I saw the corpses in the guesthouse, and he wasn’t even thinking ahead of how the lie would affect his body language, his facial expression. Tom could read Scott like a book. He kept fiddling with his hands on the table, one of the habits Scott displayed whenever he was lying. “Honest, I had no idea. They’ve been…threatening me the whole time to keep quiet about it and–”

“I don’t believe you heard me the first time, Scott,” Tom said, injecting menace in his voice and body posture. He leaned forward over the table. “I said I want to help you. If I’m going to help you, you’re going to come clean with me. It’s the only way I can help keep you out of jail. I can’t do it if you’re going to feed me this bullshit story that Gordon, Steve, and Dave led you into this because you and I know that’s not how it happened. Is it?”

Tom glared at Scott, who wouldn’t meet his gaze. “I know about the trips out of town. The nights you told me you were going into Lancaster to the skating rink were bullshit stories. You and your friends went into Philly and Harrisburg and assaulted homeless people.”

Scott looked at him again and this time the evidence was clear in his eyes. Guilty as charged. “No! That’s not what happened! I swear!”

“I noticed the bruising on your knuckles one morning,” Tom continued. “I never brought it up, though. I should have asked you what happened, and if you would have told me you’d gotten into a fight I would have asked you why you didn’t have any other marks or bruises. You don’t go through any fight without getting a little banged up. Trust me, I know. I was in plenty when I was your age.”

“I wasn’t fighting with anybody!”

“No, you were only beating the crap out of somebody who couldn’t fight back.

That’s how your knuckles got bruised and torn up. Isn’t that right?”

Scott averted his gaze. “No. That’s not it.”

“I did a quick check on the internet before you came home. If I hadn’t been so busy I would’ve noticed what’s going on, so I blame myself for letting this happen. You can’t bullshit me anymore, Scott. I know what you’ve been doing.” He lowered his tone, trying to be the buddy, the best friend to his son, something his father had never been to him, something he told himself he’d always do for his own boy but never did because he was always so goddamned busy. “I saw news items on John’s disappearance. I know you went to Susan’s party the night he disappeared. I also know you guys were at odds with each other.”

“That’s not true!”

“I also read about the wilding incidents in Philly and Harrisburg. I was especially interested in the few cases that reported white teenagers driving a dark SUV being seen speeding away from each crime.” Tom leveled his gaze at his son. “You drive a dark SUV, Scott. I’m surprised the cops didn’t come poking around earlier.”

“Coincidence.”

“It’s not a coincidence that a man named Neal Ashford, who was reported missing in Philly three weeks ago, was wearing a white coat, blue jeans, and dark tennis shoes.

One of the corpses in the guesthouse is wearing a white coat. The article also said Neal’s black. So is the corpse in the guesthouse.”

This time Scott didn’t say anything. He sat stoically, arms crossed, not looking at Tom.

“I didn’t want to believe it, but I can’t help but see the pattern,” Tom continued.

“The times you were kicked out of school in fourth and fifth grades for picking on other kids, and not just picking on them either, downright torturing them—”

“That’s not true!” Scott began, his voice raised.

“And then there’s the Gaines incident. We couldn’t protect you from the fallout of that, Scott. We tried, but we just couldn’t. The school board and the police had you dead to rights and it took our resources to keep you in school and get the administrators off your back. We couldn’t deal with the fallout of what might have happened if we hadn’t threatened to sue. We wanted to protect you, too. I wanted to get you into counseling but your mother, she had different ideas.”

“I don’t need counseling!” Scott banged his fists on the glass table.

Tom faced his son. Inside he wanted to shout back at him but he reined it in. He couldn’t lose control now. He’d learned to harness his anger a long time ago. “I can’t help but see the pattern. It needs to stop and I’m going to help you.”

Now Scott did meet his gaze. This time, the younger Bradfield didn’t turn away.

“How?” Scott asked. Tom thought he caught a slight tinge of pleading in that question. That was all he needed to know that he’d broken through, had gotten his son to see the severity of the situation.

“The first thing we have to do is get rid of the bodies.”

Now Scott visibly relaxed. He seemed to slump in his chair, as if a great weight had been taken off of him. He was nodding. “Okay, yeah…definitely. Get rid of them.”

“You don’t have to tell me why you did any of this,” Tom said, choosing his words carefully. “That isn’t the issue now. The issue now is to dispose of those bodies and make that guesthouse look immaculate.”

Scott let out a big sigh. He leaned over the table, clasping his hands in front of him. “You think the police will come back today?”

“They might. We need to take care of this as quickly as possible. Before your mother gets home.”

“What time is it?”

“Almost ten.”

Scott nodded. Carol was usually gone until four or five on Saturday afternoons. If the police didn’t return, they could take care of this little problem with no trouble.

“I’ve already called Dave and Steve,” Scott said. “They’re on their way. They should be here any time now.”

“Good.” Scott understood the severity of the situation and had no doubt taken the appropriate measures before Tom confronted him with it.

“Fuckin’ Tim Gaines,” Scott muttered.

“What about him?”

“If it wasn’t for him, we wouldn’t be in this mess.”

Tom said nothing. He liked to think he would have put two and two together eventually and confronted Scott about the dead men in the guesthouse, but the potential trouble Gaines posed did present a problem. It was obvious he’d talked to the police while in custody, otherwise Tom wouldn’t be having this conversation with Scott now.

“We can’t get distracted by other things,” Tom said.

“I’m not distracted. I’m just pissed off.”

Tom thought back to that long ago night when he’d been pissed off and killed that hippie couple. He remembered the rage that had coursed through him, made him do something he never thought he’d do, something he’d been trying to cover up and keep buried ever since. It was because of his attempt at keeping that murder a secret which led to his keeping tabs on Zuck’s Woods, which led him to buy neighboring property when it came up for sale shortly after he graduated from college. He’d had to borrow money out the ass to do it, but Harry Eckman and Victor Beck had gone in on the deal with him and things had been fine. They’d formed a corporation, the three of them, then leased some of the land out, reinvested the profits into other businesses, and within fifteen years time Tom saw himself as CEO of D’Anno and Harris Financial, a private equity firm. It was through his business clout that he managed to get on the board for Lancaster County Development, and thanks to his influence, he’d kept most other developers from trying to turn that land into subdivisions. It was only recently that he’d been able to buy Zuck’s Woods in a very quiet, very private deal with the state gaming commission. He’d done everything he could to keep his sin buried. Likewise, Harry and Victor, his old high school friends, had done their part and kept their crime a secret.

“The detectives didn’t say anything about this,” Tom continued, “…but while I was on the news websites, I noticed that something is going on in another neighborhood that borders Zuck’s Woods. The Elm Grove development.”

Scott got that surprised look again. “What’s going on?”

“Missing people. A bunch of them. They’re talking about conducting a search in Zuck’s Woods.”

“Really?” Tom couldn’t tell if Scott was nervous; he was certainly acting like he was.

“Do I need to be concerned about a search party in Zuck’s Woods?”

“What’s to be concerned about?”

“I’m a shareholder in a corporation that owns Zuck’s Woods.”

“Oh!” Scott seemed to think about this. He looked at Tom. “I don’t know…you might.”

“Okay.” That settled it. He had to call Harry and Victor.

“So what are we going to do?”

“When Steve and Dave get here, take some blankets from the linen closet and wrap the corpses in them. Bring them to the house. We’ll burn them in the basement fireplace.”

“Won’t Mom notice the missing linens?”

“No. I’ll get them replaced. Do you think you guys can handle that?”

Scott nodded. “Yeah. What are you going to do?”

“I’m going to make some phone calls and get some friends out here. Then we’re going to take care of the guesthouse.”

Tom only hoped they had enough time to cover Scott’s tracks.

And keep his own covered as well.

* * *

Tom reached Harry Eckman on his way to the golf course and told him to come to the house. “We playing at your place?” Harry joked.

Tom told Harry what was going on and Harry instantly eased up on the joking.

“I’m heading over right now.”

He got a similar reaction from Victor Beck, who was watching the game on his widescreen TV in the living room of the new home he’d bought in River Court. “Should I call our lawyer?” Victor asked.

“Not yet,” Tom said. “Just get over here. And stop by a Home Depot and buy paint. Make it a dozen cans of white paint. I don’t care what brand. Just enough to paint the interior of a living room and the floor.”

“You want to paint your floor?”

“I’ll explain when you get here.”

By the time Victor and Harry arrived at the house a little after ten-thirty, Scott’s friends had already arrived and the boys had removed the corpses from the guesthouse.

Tom had given the boys a brief recap. Steve and Dave looked grave and scared. They kept glancing at Scott, who refused to meet their gaze. The three boys hovered in front of the guesthouse for a moment as Tom trekked back to the house. He tried to ignore the sounds the boys made as they entered the guesthouse, the muffled grunts and curses accompanied by what sounded like beatings– Christ, the homeless people in there weren’t dead? Tom could have sworn they were deader than shit!–along with mangled squeals of surprise and pain that were suddenly cut off. More pounding followed. Scott and the boys pounding their heads in to make sure? Whatever they had to do to cover their tracks. As long as they scooped up the blood and brains that would stain the floor and walls.

David was throwing up outside as Harry Eckman arrived and Tom called out to him to wash the vomit up with the gardening hose. Dave waved a hand weakly, then proceded to do just that as Harry trotted up the deck steps. By the time Victor arrived and the men were sitting at the large glass table, Scott and his friends had gotten a handle on the task at hand and were carrying the wrapped-up remains into the house.

And as the boys worked, Tom told Victor and Harry what his son had been up to and how it was imperative they do whatever it took to keep the bodies of that long dead couple from being discovered.

“How are we going to do that, Tom?” Harry asked, his voice a strangled whisper.

“We don’t know what’s going on or—”

“You guys are going to monitor what’s happening in that neighborhood and if it appears that a civilian search party is going to be formed, you’re going to volunteer.”

Harry and Victor glanced at each other, understanding dawning on their features.

Tom nodded at them. “You still remember the spot?”

“I’ll never forget it,” Victor said.

“All it’s going to take is to keep detectives and dogs out of the area.”

“What if something happens though?” Harry asked. “What if…something happens beyond our control…like a dog digs up a body or they find it through some kind of infra red equipment or something?”

“Then you’ll be on the ground to hear everything that goes on and you can report that back to me,” Tom said.

Scott’s voice called up to them, interrupting their meeting. “Guesthouse is clear!”

“Thanks, son,” Tom called down. He gestured toward the guesthouse. “I’ve got changes of clothes for you guys. Let’s get to work on painting that guesthouse before Carol gets home.”

Chapter Twenty-Three

Chelsea Brewer couldn’t help but be worried about Tim.

She was sitting in the middle of her bed in her room, not watching TV, not reading a book or magazine, not doing much of anything. What should have been a perfect summer day seemed tainted somehow. Chelsea couldn’t quite explain it. It just felt wrong.

The visit she had from the police shortly after her parents left for work was the main reason for the way things seemed out of whack. Another reason was the vibe she was getting.

Something was happening.

Her father had come home from work to be with her after getting a phone call from Spring Valley Police Officer Frank Clapton that a credible threat had been made against her. Dad had freaked out and came right home. He’d called at least twice on the drive, once to tell her he couldn’t reach her mother, the second to tell her he was going to get in touch with her grandmother so Chelsea could stay with her for the rest of the summer. That was something Chelsea didn’t want to hear. She didn’t want to be away from Tim. The thought of spending even a day apart from him was unbearable. Plus, her grandmother was a very religious woman who lived in rural Virginia. She was a nice enough lady, but she and Chelsea just didn’t see eye to eye on a lot of things. If she had to spend the rest of the summer with Granny Beth, Chelsea was going to freak. She liked to think she wouldn’t get as bad as she did that summer two years ago when she’d resorted to cutting herself, because the therapy she’d engaged in after all that helped. Still, it was Granny Beth’s influence that had helped contribute to the cutting. All the old woman did was pick at Chelsea, belittle her, make her feel guilty about being a young woman. It didn’t help that the social elite at Spring Valley High had done a good job of whittling away at her self-esteem prior to the last time Chelsea spent at her grandmother’s. Her father hadn’t been much help, either. Despite his outwardly macho he-man nature, he was a softie at heart and he truly did love her. Chelsea just wished he had more common sense. Dad was the type of person that would do anything to fit in with the status quo just to be accepted. Chelsea never gave a good goddamn about impressing people she didn’t care for. No wonder she’d taken out her frustrations on her own flesh. Dad was more hip to things now, was more accepting of her as a person, and surely he’d made the suggestion that she stay at Granny Beth’s out of desperation due to their current situation.

When Dad got home, he’d talked to the officer, who’d met him at the house.

Chelsea had sat on the living room sofa. She still couldn’t believe what was going on.

According to the officer, the police had received a very credible threat against Chelsea by Gordon Smith. The officer didn’t admit this, but when he asked Chelsea if she knew Gordon and his friends, she’d put two and two together. She’d told the officer everything she knew about Gordon, which wasn’t much. And no, she had no idea why anybody would threaten her.

Dad had been worse, though. He’d grilled the officer relentlessly. He demanded complete protection from the police until he could make arrangements for Chelsea to be sent out of the state. The officer agreed that sending Chelsea away would be a good thing, at least until they had the person responsible for making the threats in custody. Until then, the officer suggested keeping Chelsea inside. “We’re stretched very thin right now,” the Officer said. “Otherwise, I’d have a car parked outside standing watch.” The Officer left with the understanding they call 911 if Gordon or any of his friends came by the house.

“Don’t worry,” Chelsea’s dad told the officer as he escorted him to the front door.

“I can handle it.”

Shortly after the officer left, Dad had gone into his home office and extracted his handgun. Chelsea didn’t know what kind it was, just that it was black and looked dangerous. She didn’t like guns, felt uncomfortable around them, but Dad put her at ease by explaining he was simply going to have it on his person until they got the word that Gordon Smith and his friends were in custody.

Dad’s reasoning made sense.

Still, Chelsea felt nervous about it.

Chelsea looked out her bedroom window into the back yard. Dad was downstairs on the phone. Despite taking his laptop home, he wasn’t working. He was too wound up with worry. So was Chelsea, for that matter.

Chelsea had tried calling Tim five times this morning and had left messages. He’d said nothing about not being home today. She’d gone online to see if he was in IM. He was MIA in cyberspace, too.

When Tim’s mother finally called shortly after ten A.M., Chelsea’s momentary relief turned into further concern and fear as she learned the full details of what was happening. The threat Gordon Smith made against her to Tim last night and–worst of all–

Gordon’s admitting to have taken part in murdering homeless people.

She’d been getting updates from Naomi as the morning dragged on. Dave and Steve were nowhere to be found, nor was Gordon. Scott Bradfield’s father had refused a search of his property—a search warrant was apparently being drawn up now. And something was happening in a neighborhood near Zuck’s Woods.

Chelsea had heard police sirens off and on all morning, which was strange considering the low crime rate of Spring Valley. It reminded her of the summer she’d spent visiting her cousins in Richmond, Virginia. She’d heard sirens there all the time, or so it seemed.

This morning, though, was especially troubling. It almost seemed like she heard more sirens coming from different directions.

Naomi called her one last time to tell her she and Jeff had to drive to Lancaster to retrieve something from their respective offices, but that they’d be home with Tim later in the afternoon. “I’ll have Tim call you when we get back,” Naomi said. Chelsea could hear the dim sound of a police siren in the background.

“Is everything okay over there?” Chelsea asked.

“Yeah.” Naomi paused for a moment and the siren grew louder, then cut off.

When Naomi came back on the line she sounded concerned. “There’s a lot of police activity around here, though.”

“Tim’s okay where he is?”

“Tim is perfectly safe. We’re leaving in about five minutes to get him. Don’t worry, I’ll have him call you when we get back.”

“Okay,” Chelsea said. At least Tim was safe where he was. Naomi had assured her that Tim wasn’t with the general juvenile delinquent population at Brendan Hall. “I’ll be here.”

She was just thinking back on that conversation when her dad called her from downstairs. “Chelsea! Get down here, quickly!”

“What?” Chelsea got up off the bed and headed to the second floor landing. Dad’s voice had taken on a tinge of fear. “Are you okay?”

“Something on the news,” Dad said, and now she could hear it. Dad had the living room television turned to the local news.

Chelsea darted down the stairs. “What’s going on?”

And as she entered the living room, she saw what was happening, and what had made her father call up to her with that tone of fear in his voice.

A local female newscaster was broadcasting from what appeared to be downtown Lancaster. She looked distressed. “…have been reports of two dozen people missing and apparently the mass wave of disappearances is spreading beyond Spring Valley and into the neighboring town of Lititz. The Pennsylvania State Police have been called in and sources tell me that the National Guard is arriving to quell what is—”

“Daddy, what’s happening?”

“Nobody is really saying, honey,” Dad said. He gestured for her to sit down beside him on the sofa. Chelsea sat down and Dad turned up the volume.

“—only thing we can say with confidence is that several things are happening.

One, people are turning up missing and authorities tell us they believe foul play is involved due to the signs of violence. Two, we have at least a dozen people confirmed dead and here’s where it gets strange.” The newscaster looked at the camera with an expression that suggested to Chelsea that she didn’t know how to proceed. “One source tells me that the victims are attacking other people, like something out of a horror movie.”

A horror movie, Chelsea thought. She immediately thought of movies like 28

Days Later, where infected people turned into ravenous zombies.

“Third and most disturbing…” the newscaster said, and here it was obvious from her eyes that the woman was running scared. Chelsea had no doubt that if she didn’t have to be at work, the newscaster would be getting the hell out of town. “…is what’s going on at a local churchyard cemetery. Grace Brethren Church in the small community of Spring Valley, which is located about a mile south of the initial site of the mass disappearance, has reported what can only be described as something out of a Stephen King novel. A church elder has reported—and I’m not making this up, folks, this is the real deal—that the corpses of those buried in his churchyard are clawing their way out of their graves and… attacking and biting people they come across.”

Chelsea and her father gasped at exactly the same time. Chelsea said, “Oh my God!”

“Police are advising residents of Spring Valley and Lititz to remain indoors. If you are out on the street, seek shelter in a secure location. In the meantime, citizens of surrounding communities are advised to—”

From that point on it was really like watching a horror movie for Chelsea. She could do nothing else but watch the news with her father, entranced by what she was hearing and seeing. She became even more self-absorbed as various local and state law enforcement officials were interviewed, as live feed was played back showing exhumed graves at the Grace Brethren Churchyard, as a State Official was interviewed and claimed they were working to contain the “sudden and bizarre series of events that are taking place.”

She was so absorbed in what was happening that she didn’t even notice the sound of a muffled thump coming from the basement.

* * *

Gordon Smith almost let loose with a curse when he tripped over the coffee table in the darkened basement and tumbled to the carpeted floor.

He bit back a scream and clutched his right shin, fighting back the pain. Fuck, shit, piss, motherfucker cocksucking piece of shit motherfuck that hurt! Gordon sat on the floor and rubbed his shin, trying to control his breathing. He had to make his way back to the closet he’d been holed up in for the past few hours before Chelsea’s dad turned on the basement lights and came downstairs.

Gordon began inching his way back toward the spare room. His eyes were pretty much adjusted to the dark, but when he’d exited the spare room, the basement living room or den or whatever it was, had been pitch black. He’d inched forward, feeling his way like a blind man, and that’s when he’d smacked his shin against the coffee table and taken a tumble.

He made it back to the room and paused briefly to try to control his breathing. The tumble had scared him; he was sure somebody heard him upstairs and would head down to see what the sound was.

But nobody did.

Gordon waited just inside the spare room, rubbing his shin, trying to discern what was going on upstairs. The dim sound of the television warbled from above. The news.

Gordon couldn’t tell what was going on, but nobody was getting up to investigate what had happened down here. He thought he’d caught Chelsea and her father talking, but he couldn’t make out what they were saying.

When it became apparent that his tumble would go uninvestigated, Gordon let out a little sigh of relief and relaxed.

Gordon had left his house before his parents got up. His little brother was still asleep down the hall, and he’d made his way over to Chelsea’s place on foot, sneaking around and between other houses, threading his way through back yards and parks. A couple of dogs barked as he made his way to his destination, but they stopped as he receded from view. He had to stay off the streets to avoid being seen by the police.

When he reached Chelsea’s he snuck onto the driveway and, very quietly, very stealthily, crept around the property. When he reached the back yard, he’d tried the rear doors and windows. They were locked.

He’d sat behind some shrubbery at the side of the house and waited. In time, the garage door opened. Gordon peeked around a bush and got a good view. Chelsea’s mother was getting into a tan sedan. He’d remained hidden, being careful to hide further between the bush and the wall of the house, and waited until she backed out of the driveway and drove away. She did not close the garage door, probably because Chelsea’s dad, who most likely drove the white Acura that remained, hadn’t left yet.

Gordon quickly got to his feet and darted into the garage. He’d placed his ear to the door that presumably led to the laundry room and, hearing nothing, opened it gently.

There’d been nobody downstairs, and he could hear movement upstairs, so he opened a door to what he thought was the closet and discovered it was actually the entrance to the basement.

He’d made his way quietly downstairs to the finished basement, found the spare room, and secreted himself in the closet.

And at some point he’d fallen asleep.

He’d woken up suddenly, cursing himself for falling asleep. He had no way of knowing what time it was, so he’d sat in the closet for a little bit, straining to hear what was going on upstairs. That’s when he’d tried venturing out of the closet and the room, into the main area of the basement.

He sat on the floor listening, his back against an interior wall. Chelsea and her father were home, that much was certain. But he had no idea what time it was or what was going on. He pulled out his cell phone and debated turning it on to see if he had any messages.

Gordon flipped the phone open and got the device powered up. Once it was on, he quickly navigated through the user menu and disabled the ring feature, setting it to vibrate. He checked the time—it was almost eleven A.M.—and then he checked his messages. There were two voice mails. He retrieved them and listened, frowning.

Both messages were from Scott. The shit was hitting the fan at his house. He’d had to tell his father about the zombies but his old man was helping him cover everything up. Dave and Steve were at the house helping to clean up. The cops had already been there, trying to question Scott about John Elfman. Scott closed the message by warning Gordon to keep his mouth shut.

Scott’s second message was much clearer. Lie low. Stay away from Spring Valley—hell, stay out of the county if possible. If the police pick you up, tell them you just had to get away because of everything. But lay low.

Gordon was lying low for the most part. Nobody knew where he was.

And that was a good thing for what he intended to do.

It was time to teach Tim Gaines a lesson.

Gordon thought he was pretty explicit with Tim when he told him he would hurt Chelsea. He’d seen Tim’s reaction and knew he’d gotten through with that simple message.

Apparently that hadn’t been enough to keep Tim’s mouth shut. Judging by Scott’s phone call this morning, it was obvious Tim had tipped the police off to what was in Scott’s guesthouse. If the zombies were discovered by the police, and Scott was brought in for questioning, everything was going to come down. He, Steve, and Dave would be busted and his future would be automatically erased thanks to that squealing shithead.

Gordon was only somewhat relieved that Scott and the other guys were working their tails off at getting rid of the evidence and he could only assume Mr. Bradfield would step up to the plate and use his financial clout to put pressure on the police, probably even Tim’s parents, to stop whatever investigation was currently being launched.

Gordon replaced the cell phone in his pocket and caressed the other object he’d placed there before slipping out of his house. He rubbed the smooth oak handle, marveling at the dexterity of its construction, the simplicity of its architecture. He brought the object out now and turned it right side up. After assuring himself he was holding it the proper way, he pressed a button and six inches of stainless steel sprang from the sheath.

Gordon felt a momentary burst of adrenalin and grinned in the dark.

He had to wait for the right moment. He was positive that if Tim told the cops, they knew about his threat against Chelsea. He just had to wait for the right opportunity to slip upstairs and use the blade to send another warning. Despite all evidence to the contrary, if he could do this and slip back out again, he was confident he could twist things around again, make all evidence point away from him. He’d been thinking about this since earlier this morning when he left his house. Thanks to Chelsea’s reputation for cutting herself back in Junior High School, it wasn’t going to take much to convince the police that what was to happen later today would be self-inflicted.

Gordon retracted the blade and, feeling a sudden burst of confidence, stood up. He listened.

There was the faint sound of the television from the first floor living room. He hadn’t heard Chelsea get up and head back upstairs yet. She’d come down earlier after being called to the living room by her father. He could probably sneak up to the second floor. Judging from the way the house was laid out, he could sneak upstairs, do his thing and be out before Chelsea and her father knew what was going on.

What if I get caught? He thought. What if she comes upstairs while I’m there and—

Simple. If he heard her coming up the stairs, he would dart into a hiding space. A closet. Behind a door to another room. She’d see what was done and rush to her father, probably yell at him to come upstairs, and once he saw Gordon’s handiwork they’d most likely both go downstairs to call the police. Gordon could then slip back downstairs and out the front door quickly (if they were in the kitchen), or out the back (if they were in the living room), and be out of the neighborhood by the time the police showed up.

It would be risky but he could do it. No sweat.

He’d have an alibi. Heather Watkins would vouch for him, no problem. Her folks left for work early and she was the only one home. Besides, when it came to Chelsea Brewer and Tim Gaines, Heather would do anything for Gordon. She hated Tim and Chelsea.

Heather just lived one block over from Chelsea. He could make it over to Heather’s place in less than five minutes.

Gordon Smith moved through the darkness of the basement and placed his right foot on the bottom stair. He pulled out the switchblade and paused. Took a deep breath.

Time to get going.

Stepping silently, Gordon made his way up the basement stairs.

* * *

They’d taken the TV out of the holding cell an hour after the Brendan Hall employee wheeled it in. Tim had asked them repeatedly to keep the set in the room but it was no use. Whatever was going on outside, they didn’t want him to know anything more about it.

It was shortly after eleven A.M. Despite eating a light breakfast of cereal and milk, Tim was ravenous again. When the TV was first brought in, the first thing Tim turned on was the local news. So far nothing bearing any relationship to dead people rising out of the ground was being reported but that had quickly changed when WLAN, the local CNN affiliate, broke in on the breaking story.

Tim had watched spellbound. Part of him still couldn’t believe what was happening, while another part of him was growing increasingly worried about Chelsea and his parents. Mom and Dad had left Brendan Hall shortly before ten o’clock, telling him they were going home to gather some paperwork, then they were going to the courthouse to secure the dismissal of the charges and his release. They were due back any minute. Officer Clapton was supposed to give him an update on Chelsea and he hadn’t heard anything since then. In the meantime, corpses were pulling themselves out of their graves, attacking people, biting them ( but not eating them, Tim observed… they’re not eating people, just attacking them), and, as a result, there were over two dozen people missing. It wouldn’t be long before the national press picked up on the story. Tim had flipped around to CNN and Fox but so far they weren’t reporting on the phenomenon.

Yet.

Every time an officer came near the holding cell, Tim changed the channel to something innocuous. The Cooking Channel, the History Channel, Cartoon Network. He asked to use a phone. He wanted to call his mom on her cell phone, find out what was going on. Each time he asked this, his request was denied. When he asked why, no response was given.

Officer Clapton paid one final visit that morning. He’d told Tim that he’d spoken to his mother on the phone and they’d been heading home to pick up a few things, then they were heading back to Lancaster for their meeting with the DA, who would formally file the paperwork to have the charges dismissed. Once again, Tim asked to use a phone so he could call them. And once again, his request was denied. It was then that Officer Clapton noticed the television (at this point turned off), in the holding cell.

“How’d that get in here?” Officer Clapton asked.

“I asked for it,” Tim said.

Officer Clapton didn’t say anything. He left and Tim turned the TV back on.

When he was sure Clapton wasn’t in the near vicinity, he switched over to CNN.

What he saw stunned him. The rising dead of Spring Valley was now national news.

Soledad O’Brien was reporting on the local current events with something like disbelief. “…the locals are adamant in saying that the attackers are dead. We go to our local affiliate WLAN for more.”

Tim watched, stunned, heart racing, as one of the local talking heads reported from what appeared to be downtown Spring Valley. “Soledad, the events that are transpiring in this small Pennsylvania town in the heart of Amish Country can only be described as unbelievable. When Spring Valley police responded to a frantic 911 call earlier this morning, they found a deserted neighborhood with disturbing signs of foul play. It wasn’t until the State Police were called in that things took a turn for the macabre.”

The footage switched to a pre-recorded interview with a man in a smartly dressed shirt and tie. The caption on the screen identified him as Reverend Burns, of the Brethren Church of Spring Valley. Through a combination of the local newscaster and interviews with Reverend Burns, Tim learned that most of the occupants of the good Reverend’s churchyard had clawed their way up and skedaddled. “Some of them were little more than bones dressed in the clothes they were buried in,” Reverend Burns said. He looked like the survivor of a plane crash; his eyes were haunted, shocked.

Tim turned the volume low, listening in growing shock and fear as the newscaster related that there were reports of the dead attacking the living, killing them, only to have the victims immediately rise and shamble off to join the legions of the dead. One of the witnesses, a guy Tim recognized as the owner of the deli on Main Street, related rather calmly that he watched, from his apartment window, a gaggle of zombies pounce on the mailman and tear him to pieces. “He wasn’t dead for long,” the man said. “As soon as they killed him, they left. They didn’t eat him like you see in the movies. They just wandered off down the street, and a moment later the dead guy got up and sort of stumbled off in a different direction.”

“And you’re sure he was dead?” the reporter asked.

“Oh yeah. He was torn the hell up. His jugular was severed, you could tell when one of those things bit into his neck. I’ve never seen so much blood.”

There was a switch back to CNN headquarters in Atlanta. Soledad O’Brien looked grim. “I’m just getting word that the National Guard has been called in by the Governor.

We will, of course, stay on top of this story—“

The door to the room opened and Officer Clapton stood there as two officers stormed in. They turned the television off, unplugged it, and began wheeling it out of the room. Tim’s protests to keep it fell on deaf ears.

And now he had no idea what was happening.

They’d removed the TV fifteen minutes ago. He could tell things were getting worse by the voices outside his holding cell. Twice Tim pounded on the locked door, demanding to know what was happening. Officer Clapton stopped by and told him it was best that he stay put. “What about my parents!” Tim yelled back.

“When they come back they won’t be allowed to leave until the situations in Spring Valley and Lititz are under control,” Officer Clapton said.

“But what about—“

“Your folks called and told me they were making a pit stop at the house for something, then they’re coming to get you. Don’t worry, Tim, you’re safe here.”

If he could only believe that.

Chapter Twenty-Four

The guesthouse smelled like an oven that had been cooking a spoiled dead pig, but Tom told Harry and Victor to shut the hell up about it and get to work painting.

Victor muttered that he wasn’t the one that had killed that couple and Tom almost exploded. He’d said, “You raped that girl and you withheld and helped bury evidence.

That makes you just as guilty. You’re an accessory. If I get pinned for anything, you guys are going down with me. Got it?”

That had shut Victor up, and the three of them worked at painting over the bloodstained floor. Tom had to drag the garden hose in from the yard and wash away the bulk of the blood and meat that littered the guesthouse. They didn’t even have time to let the floor dry; they just started painting over it. If the shit hit the fan, extracting a DNA sample would still be possible, but if he could contaminate the scene as much as possible…

“We can apply another coat after this one has dried,” Tom said. Harry and Victor nodded, working silently.

Tom made sure Harry and Victor were working at covering the obvious crime scene. He assisted by applying a coat of paint in the living room near the door so he could keep a watch toward the front of the house. Scott and his friends were in the basement dismembering the bodies and feeding the pieces to the fireplace. Scott had given the boys brief instructions, had shown them his basement workroom with all its tools (including a power saw), and then left them to their task while he went to tackle his own. He’d left Scott with one final admonition: “Don’t worry, we’ll get through this.” Scott had nodded, and Tom had a feeling his son was handling this pretty well. He was a tough kid.

Tom was lost in his thoughts on what the next step should be when Harry broke the silence. “Like father, like son.”

Tom stopped and turned to Harry. “Excuse me?”

“Scott. He’s grown up to be just like you. He’s an arrogant, sadistic, bully.” Harry glared at Tom. He’d stopped his work and was standing in front of a freshly painted wall.

“He’s a fucking asshole. I guess that saying is true—the apple doesn’t fall far from the tree.”

“I don’t have time to get into this with you,” Tom said, forcing the words out of his mouth. What he wanted to do was leap across the room and pound Harry’s face in.

“So please, shut the fuck up and get to painting.”

“I don’t care if the cops bust us for keeping what you did a secret,” Harry said.

“I’ve been living with what we did—what you did—for too long. Do you know how that’s affected me, Tom? Do you have any idea what kind of nightmares you’ve put me through?”

“Harry, we don’t have time for—“

“Shut up! ” Harry yelled. The intensity behind that command startled Tom. He stopped, the adrenalin spiking through his system now. Victor stopped what he was doing and listened. “You just shut the hell up and listen to me, Tom, because I’m only going to say it once. You understand me?”

Tom met Harry’s gaze, not backing down. “I’m listening.”

“I’ve hated you ever since the night you killed Billy Thompson and Candace Drombowsky,” Harry snarled, his eyes blazing pits of hate. “The only reason I cooperated was because I was a scared, confused kid who didn’t want to get caught.”

“None of us wanted to get caught, Harry,” Tom said.

“Let me finish!” Harry barked. “If you hadn’t killed them, we wouldn’t have had to go through what we went through. Aren’t you getting that through your thick skull?”

Tom set down his paintbrush. He couldn’t let this go on. “Harry, let’s just take a quick break and—“

“I used to hope the police would catch you,” Harry said. “I realized you would have dropped a dime on us, but I didn’t care. I always figured I’d get some kind of lesser sentence. But at the same time, part of me was afraid of getting caught, just like you, so I said nothing. And…I’ve never been able to live with myself since that night.” Harry cocked a questioning gaze at Tom. “Do you understand what I’m talking about?”

Tom didn’t know what to say. He’d re-lived that night multiple times, and through the passing of time had only just recently felt the faint twinges of regret over his actions.

At the same time he was so far removed from the person he’d been so long ago that he felt disconnected with him. The Tom Bradfield that murdered Billy Thompson and Candace Drombowsky was not the Tom Bradfield he was now.

“I’ve thought about Billy and Candace every day since that night,” Harry said. “I know you haven’t cared and have gone on with your life, but I’ve never gotten over it. I was so afraid of what might happen, that I never lived up to my full potential. I dropped out of college and worked in jobs I hated. I’ve had trouble with women, drugs and alcohol. I’ve been a shitty father to my own kids, and I’ve been a shitty person because of my alcohol problems, all of which are a direct result of what you did that night and how I helped cover everything up for you.”

“It wasn’t my fault you turned to booze and dope,” Tom said.

“Maybe it wasn’t,” Harry said, not backing down. “But I blame you for it anyway.

I blame you for a lot of things that went wrong with my life. But you know what? I’m past all that now. Coming here today, seeing what’s been going on here and learning what’s happened…” Harry gestured around them at the splotchy paint-work in the guesthouse living room, the bloodstains on the floor and walls they were trying to cover up. “I see things have come full circle with Scott. And you know something? Scott’s much worse. Killing Billy and Candace may have been something that was carried too far that night, something that was just spur of the moment.”

“That’s right,” Tom said, his back to the front door of the guesthouse. “It was spur of the moment. I never thought it would go that far. You know that, and Victor knows it.

We’ve talked about it so many times, Harry, that’s why we—“

“That’s why we covered it up, I know. But things are different with Scott. You can see that, can’t you?”

“All I see right now is we have to cover this up or the police will not only be all over this place, they’ll be traipsing through the woods and they might find where we buried—“

“As far as I’m concerned, Scott belongs in prison!” Harry cut in, overriding Tom, who started, shocked that Harry made such a bold statement. “The only reason I’m even here is for my own self interest. I don’t want those woods searched either. I don’t want those bodies found for the simple reason that I don’t want an investigation started. I’d like to think enough time has passed that any witnesses or evidence or whatever is so old it can’t be used. I mean, none of us were questioned back then, right?” Harry looked from Victor to Tom. They shrugged and shook their heads. “But still, you never know what can happen with DNA and stuff. So I’d rather have them where they are. Buried, where they can’t be found. I think that’s a shitty thing to say, but…for the first time in years I’m sober, I’m on a good track with my job, I’m married to a great woman, and I’m connecting with my kids. I’m even going to be a grandfather. I want to be there for my grandchild, I want to be there for him more than I was for my son when he was growing up. I want to make that up to him by being there for his kid.” For the first time Harry looked like he was imploring Tom and Victor to understand his position. And for the first time, Tom understood completely where Harry was coming from.

Tom said, “I understand, Harry.”

“Do you?”

Tom nodded. “Yeah, I do. Now can we finish this?”

“We’re going to finish this, all right. But remember what I just told you. I’m only here for my own self-interest. I don’t care about you or Scott. When this is finished, I don’t ever want to hear from you again. If the police question me, I’m going to deny I even know you. You got me?”

You self-righteous prick, Tom thought. Despite his sudden flare of anger, Tom fought it down. “Whatever you want, Harry. Let’s just cut the shit and get back to doing this.”

Harry bent down and picked up his paintbrush. He glanced back at Tom and the sudden change on his face was so swift that Tom had no time to react. Harry’s features went from sullen anger and defiance, to sudden stark shock and fear within a second. He opened his mouth and managed a quick “What the fuck is that?” and that’s when Tom felt the presence of somebody approaching from behind, at the front door.

When Tom turned around he caught a quick glimpse of a kid in dark jeans and a black and white T-shirt. He caught a glimpse of the words “Dr. Chud” on the T-shirt. The kid’s eyes were vacant, his throat ripped open, and Tom saw that his T-shirt wasn’t black, it was dark red from the great cascade of blood that had poured out of his torn throat. The kid, a young guy in his early twenties with brown hair, lurched forward and launched himself at Tom.

Tom stepped back, trying to scramble out of the way, and more people swarmed into view: another young guy who might have been Dr. Chud’s sidekick, his guts hanging out, and a short skinny kid with a horrible head wound that made his left eye protrude from its socket. Others swarmed in from the yard, about half a dozen, and as Dr. Chud slammed into him, propelling him onto the ground, the others entered the guesthouse and scrambled past, heading toward Harry and Victor, and the last thing Tom heard before Dr.

Chud ripped his throat out with his teeth were the sounds of Harry and Victor screaming.

* * *

“Did you hear that?”

Scott stopped from the grisly task of separating Neal Ashford’s arm from its socket. They’d broken one of the blades of the power saw while trying to saw through Neal’s legs and had replaced it with a sturdier one. Dave had tried hacking away at the other corpse with an axe and wasn’t having much luck. Bones were harder to break than he thought, which was weird considering he’d broken facial bones with his bare fists in past wilding sessions. “Hear what?”

“That noise.” Steve was crouched by the fireplace in the den, pausing in his task of feeding dismembered remains into the roaring flames. The basement was stiflingly hot and sweat was pouring in rivulets down their bare backs and chests.

“What noise?” Scott called out. It was hard enough to hear in the workroom with the power saw going and Dave trying to cut Neal into little pieces with the axe. Had Steve heard police sirens?

“Sounds like somebody’s outside,” Steve said.

Scott turned off the saw and stepped away from the workbench. As the silence settled into his system he heard something from upstairs. Somebody entering the house through the kitchen.

“Hold on,” Scott said. He brushed past Dave, who set the axe down and followed Scott to the den where they joined Steve. The only remains left of the zombie to dispose of in the fireplace was an arm, a foot, a lower torso, and the head. Neal’s disarticulated pieces were still back in the workroom.

They stood in silence, listening. There was definitely somebody upstairs. Scott relaxed. It was Dad. Who else would it be?

“Did you hear sirens?” Scott asked. “Or the sound of a car pulling up?”

Steve shook his head.

They listened some more. In addition to the sound of footsteps in the kitchen there were other sounds; something was being dragged across the floor, more footsteps outside, and footsteps tramping their way in from the side door. Scott felt his stomach clench as the footsteps exited the kitchen and traveled through the living room.

Scott stepped forward. “I’ll go up and see what’s going on.”

As Scott headed upstairs he heard another sound, a tinkling of glass breaking. He was just opening the door to the basement, peeking out, and was having second thoughts about heading up the stairs when Dad stepped into his field of vision. Dad had his back turned to Scott and was looking toward the kitchen, presumably toward the sound of breaking glass. Scott opened the door and stepped out of the basement. “Everything okay?”

Dad turned around and Scott yelled.

Dad was dead. His throat was ripped out and by all rights his head should have been lolling forward on his chest. Scott could see a part of Dad’s spine through the meat and gristle of his neck. Dad stepped toward Scott, arms reaching toward him, and that’s when the rest of them poured into the living room from the kitchen.

Dad’s friends Victor and Harry were first, similarly torn up, bloody and very dead.

They shambled in and immediately zeroed in on Scott as other figures tumbled into the room, several of them young guys, also dead and bloody, one of them wearing a tattered T-shirt with the words “Dr. Chud” emblazoned on the front. From the opposite direction, a woman Scott didn’t recognize strolled into the living room. She was naked from the waist down; her gutted abdomen trailed loopy ropes of intestine behind her.

Dad reached Scott first and the force of his momentum catapulted Scott backwards down the stairs. Dad clung to him, his fingers clawing into his flesh. Scott’s head cracked on the stairs and he saw stars. He was dimly aware of Steve and Dave in the basement yelling out in surprise, then fear as the rest of the zombies piled down the basement stairs and swarmed the room, then his Dad bit into his face with his strong jaws, working the flesh off with savage shakes of his head, the pain filling him with an intensity he’d never experienced before, and then everything exploded and he knew no more.

Chapter Twenty-Five

Naomi Gaines was doing one more quick check to make sure she had everything in her purse when the phone rang.

Jeff was in his basement office gathering some paperwork and she quickly picked up the receiver. “Hello?”

A male voice she didn’t recognize asked, “Hello, can I speak to Tim Gaines, please?”

“This is his mother. Can I ask who’s calling?”

“My name is William Sawyer. I’m responding to an email Tim sent through my website. I’m a writer.”

Recognition set in. William Sawyer was the author of half a dozen suspense novels she’d picked up at the Barnes and Noble Bookstore in Lancaster. “You wrote the novel Scream.”

“That’s me.”

“May I ask why you’re calling my son?”

“He read a novel of mine. Back From the Dead.”

“You’re the author of Back From the Dead?”

“Yes, ma’am.”

“I thought that was written by somebody else.”

“It’s me. I did that book under a pseudonym.”

“Oh. I see. Tim contacted you?”

“He did.” There was a short pause. “Um, how old is your son, Ms. Gaines?”

“Tim’s sixteen,” Naomi said. “He’ll be seventeen next month.” Jeff was coming up the stairs and she turned to the kitchen. She held her hand up to him as he emerged and mouthed hold on a minute. “Let me guess. Tim contacted you about the ritual that’s depicted in your novel.”

“He did. I was hoping I could—“

“Did Tim tell you what is happening?”

Another short pause. “I’m afraid he didn’t, Ms. Gaines. He simply asked where I got the background information on the spell that’s mentioned in my novel. It was…well, it was another question of his that prompted me to call, actually.”

“And what would that be?”

William Sawyer paused. Naomi had the feeling the author was uncomfortable.

Jeff was standing beside her now, asking who she was talking to, and Naomi had to shush him so she could hear. “Ms. Gaines, do you live in Lancaster County, Pennsylvania by any chance?”

“We do,” Naomi said, all thoughts to personal privacy set aside.

“The reason I called was due to what’s on the national news.”

Naomi turned to Jeff and mouthed, turn on the news. Jeff nodded and scampered to the television in the living room. “Let me guess. Tim asked you if there was a counter-spell to the one depicted in your novel.”

William sounded surprised. “He did. And he didn’t tell me why he wanted to know, either. It wasn’t until I turned on the news a moment ago and saw what was happening…” William’s voice verged on borderline fear and panic. “What’s happening now is only touched on briefly in my book, Ms. Gaines. I can’t believe its happening, but the events…what I’ve been seeing on TV and the way Tim worded his email…I had to call to find out what’s going on…”

An irrational person would have told William Sawyer that he’d been reprehensible to include that kind of information in his book, even if it was fiction. Suppose somebody mentally unstable took it seriously? Of course, Naomi realized such arguments were bullshit. Detailed concepts of death and destruction were laid out in thousands of novels, plays, and movies every year and the only example Naomi could think of something disastrous happening due to somebody not getting it was a decade ago, when two boys mimicked a scene from a movie by lying down in a busy street during rush hour traffic.

Instead of the vehicles driving over them and escaping unscathed as depicted in the movie, the boys weren’t as lucky. They were turned into roadkill.

William Sawyer must have been on her wave-length. “I wrote five horror novels under the Richard Long byline,” he said. “They’ve done moderately well, but they aren’t my bread-and-butter novels by any means. Most of my fiction is pure psychological suspense like Scream, which sells much more than the horror stuff under the Richard Long pseudonym. Prior to today, I would have thought it was more likely for some nut to get inspired by a scene from Scream and smear her cheating husband’s genitals with honey and leave him in the woods for the ants. That book’s sold almost a million copies.

My novel Mother Love was even worse. I got hate mail for it, but I got even more letters from women claiming they would have done the same thing if they were in my main character’s position. My psychological suspense novels push buttons, they’re rooted in reality, but they don’t inspire people to do the things I depict. I hardly thought the scenes in a supernatural horror novel would inspire somebody to actually do the wacky shit I describe.”

Despite not having met this man before, Naomi felt an instant kinship with him.

She had the impression he was intelligent and often had a hard time with readers who reacted viscerally to the themes of his suspense novels. It was obvious his horror novels weren’t taken as seriously by his hardcore readership. “I’ll get straight to the point Mr.

Sawyer.”

“Call me Bill.”

From the living room, Jeff was watching the TV. “Oh my God,” she heard him mutter. “Jesus, hon, you should see this—“

“Hold on,” Naomi said to Jeff. She knew what was happening without needing to see the news. The spell was getting stronger, raising the dead everywhere and powering them, gaining strength as it emanated onward. She turned and headed into the kitchen, talking to William Sawyer who, as far as she knew, was hundreds, if not thousands of miles away. “A classmate of Tim’s borrowed his copy of Back From the Dead. He overheard Tim talking about the book to a group of his friends and was interested in the book for one reason. He wanted the formula to perform a spell that is depicted somewhere in the narrative. I’m not familiar with the book Mr. Sawyer, so please forgive my ignorance of the novel’s plot—“

“That’s okay,” William Sawyer said.

Naomi gave William Sawyer an abbreviated version of what happened. She heard him draw in a breath of surprise. Several times he said, “I can’t believe it.” When she got to the part about Scott Bradfield’s wilding spree and the use of the spell to reanimate the bodies of their murder victims for further abuse, William sounded disturbed, to say the least. He spoke in a hushed voice, as if he were holding his breath. “I don’t know what’s more disturbing. The supernatural elements I’ve never believed in, or what you said about this kid and his friends kidnapping people, taking them to his rich parents’ guesthouse and torturing them. Jesus!”

“So what you described in your book is fictitious?” Naomi asked.

“The ritual? Elements of the ritual are taken from non-fiction accounts.”

“So they’re real?”

William let out a small sigh. “Ms. Gaines…you’ve got to understand…what happens in Back From the Dead is fantasy. I’m still trying to wrap my head around the concept that somebody out there took a piece of fiction as…the real thing.”

“If there’s one thing I’ve learned in this life, Mr. Sawyer, it’s that most people are dumber than stumps. Especially the ones I’m dealing with now where it concerns my son.”

“I’m an Agnostic, Ms. Gaines. I approached the supernatural elements of Back From the Dead from a very pragmatic, anthropological view.”

“But the ritual itself is real?”

“Only elements are.”

“Which elements?”

“There’s a scene in the book where the antagonist performs a ritual in the woods,”

William Sawyer explained. “What I describe him doing, the animal sacrifice he makes, the occult items used, the time of year, it’s all based on variations of different occult rituals. A dash of Macumba, a little bit of Santeria, some Wiccan stuff. I threw in elements of pseudo-Satanic stuff for dramatic effect and to give it a more sinister edge.

Other elements were inspired by the writings of Justin Grave, a pulp horror writer from the 1930’s who wrote a handful of stories and a novel utilizing the demon Hanbi. Other stuff I made up.”

“Such as utilizing the bones of a human being?” Naomi asked.

There was a short pause. “Did the boy who performed the ritual…use human bones?”

“He dug up a grave to get human bones for the ritual, Mr. Sawyer.”

The silence on the line spoke volumes. Naomi wondered how Agnostic William Sawyer really was. She was just about to ask him when he cut in. “This is just impossible.

I mean…the ingredients are real enough…the positioning of the stars is all based on known astrological charts, but the spell itself…the dialogue and what’s said. I made that all up.”

“You made it up?”

“Yeah. Do you know anything about the boy who performed the spell?”

“He’s a trouble-maker.”

“Is he Catholic?”

“Catholic?”

“A believer. A Christian, Jew, or even Muslim?”

Naomi shrugged. “I’m pretty sure he’s Christian in name only.”

“You said he believed my book was non-fiction?”

“That’s what Tim said. It didn’t matter how many times Tim corrected Gordon and told him it was fiction, it didn’t work. Gordon was convinced the spell in the book was real.”

“Belief can be strong.” Naomi heard William rummaging around in the background. “Hold on a minute, Ms. Gaines.”

Naomi drifted into the living room to see what was going on. Jeff was sitting on the sofa intently watching the news. He turned to her. “It’s really happening,” he said. For the first time in the twenty years she and Jeff had been married, he looked deathly afraid.

“It’s like…” He was so stunned he couldn’t finish his sentence.

William Sawyer came back on the line. “Are you there, Ms. Gaines?”

“Yeah.”

“When did all this happen?” William’s voice had taken on a new tone. It sounded grave.

Naomi backtracked in her mind. “Three weeks ago. Maybe less.”

“Can you be a little more specific?”

Naomi sighed and tried to do better. How long had Tim been out of school? A week? That would place things at around June 5. Gordon had come to Tim about a week before that to borrow the book, probably May 24. “Gordon borrowed Tim’s copy of Back From the Dead the week of May 24th. I’d say it was May 27th when the police showed up here to accuse Tim of robbing that grave.”

“They showed up the afternoon of the 27th?”

“Yes.”

“So the grave was robbed the night before?”

“Yes.”

There was a pause, followed by an audible whisper. “My God!”

“What?” The tone of William’s voice sent shards of ice down Naomi’s spine.

“I’m consulting a book, Ms. Gaines,” William Sawyer said. His voice maintained that grave tone. “It’s…a rather old volume and technically it’s a piece of fiction, but it’s based on a very old legend. It contains many recipes for magical formulae. Anyway, I remember a reference to the month before the Summer Solstice, so I did some research.

In four years the stars will be in a perfect alignment on the night of the Summer Solstice, but listen to this…” She heard the whispering of pages and then he continued. “The stars align to their position six years before this is to happen, and in yearly increments they continually shift until the night of the Solstice, when they’re in the correct position.

However, in the years prior, if certain rituals are conducted at midnight on May 26th or 27th, depending on the alignment of the stars, it’s enough to throw the gates open and call to certain dark gods.”

“Do you believe that?” Naomi asked.

“I’d like to tell you no, I don’t believe it. But then all I have to do is look at my TV and see what’s happening in your town and…” Once again he trailed off, at a loss for words.

“So if Gordon were to read the spell at a certain time at night and use the correct ingredients, he could make this thing work?”

“If his belief was genuine, yes. Only…and here’s what I don’t understand…the spell I’m looking at says that in order for this particular ritual to work, there must be a human body for the magician to conjure the demon up to inhabit. The demon uses the body as a vessel and it spreads itself by contaminating other living things, usually by killing them. Only then can the demon replicate itself to newly created vessels.”

Naomi drew in a breath. “Oh my God!”

“What?”

“When you wrote that you didn’t realize, did you?”

“When I wrote this I was combining fact with fiction! I was putting in elements of different belief and magical systems for verisimilitude and making stuff up for dramatic effect! When I wrote this I was writing a novel, Ms. Gaines! Fiction! Make-believe! I realize most people today cannot tell the difference between fiction and non-fiction, that many people believe The Da Vinci Code is real, but I don’t write for them. If they’re too stupid to differentiate—”

“But the spell you wrote about was one your characters used to conjure the dead back to life?”

“Yes,” William Sawyer admitted. “The antagonist uses it to ressurect his enemy.

He turns him into a slave, of sorts. But yes, the guy is dead in the book and he’s called back to life.”

“And you’re saying in similar real spells that in order for it to work, the demon must inhabit a dead human body.”

“Yes—“ William’s voice trailed off as he understood what Naomi was getting at.

“Oh no, you don’t think—”

“There was a dead body in the woods when Gordon conducted his ritual,” Naomi stated.

“But that’s impossible! The odds of that happening are a million to one! If I’d known any of this would have been even remotely possible I never would have—“

“Is there a way to stop it?”

“Stop it?”

“A way to get the corpse, or the zombie, or whatever, to be dead again?”

There was the fluttering of pages as William rifled through his research material on the other end. “I suppose there has to be, but damned if I’ll be able to find it in time.”

“Would somebody who is involved with magic be aware of something like this?”

“Do you know anybody local that practices Wicca?”

“No.”

“Any occult supply stores near you?”

“A few.” She knew of a couple in Lancaster.

“I’d try with them. They’re probably glued to the TV wondering how they can assist in trying to stop what’s going on. I’m sure some of the more sensitive ones are already working on rituals in their attempt to reverse the destructive nature of whatever it was Gordon did.”

For a self-proclaimed Agnostic, William Sawyer sure put a lot of faith in alternative belief systems. “I’ll make a few calls,” Naomi said.

“Please keep me posted.”

“I will.” She got William’s home phone number and hung up.

Jeff was in the kitchen demanding to know what was happening. “Hold on,” she told him, as she dialed the number to Brendan Hall.

It took awhile, but she was finally put through to Officer Clapton, who sounded exhausted. “Tell Tim that his father and I will be by in an hour or so,” she said. “I’ve got a few calls to make and—”

“Ms. Gaines, I think you should stay home. Have you seen what’s going on outside?”

“I know what’s going on, Officer Clapton, I’m not stupid!”

“Stay inside!” Officer Clapton was firm on this despite the tinge of exhaustion Naomi detected in his voice. “It’s dangerous out there. Tim is safe here, trust me.”

“I just learned something that I think you need to hear,” Naomi said.

Officer Clapton paused for a moment. Naomi could hear activity in the background; intermingling voices, ringing phones, a scurry of footsteps. When Officer Clapton came back on the line he sounded like he was trying to keep his voice down.

“We’re tearing our hair out trying to keep this under control and all we keep hearing is that whatever is happening…is spreading. What have you got for me, Ms. Gaines?”

And then with Jeff riveted to the news, Naomi retreated to the kitchen and began telling Officer Clapton about her phone conversation with William Sawyer.

* * *

Time slowed to a crawl when you were confined to a jail cell.

It felt like Tim had been imprisoned for days at Brendan Hall. The more time dragged on, the more his nervousness grew. Every time he asked a guard what time it was he was surprised to learn not much time had passed. He was positive hours had dragged by, not minutes.

Officer Clapton had been absent for the past hour. Tim had spent much of his time pacing his cell, his mind racing. He had to get out of here. Mom and Dad would have called by now. They would have been here. They would not have left him at Brendan Hall to worry like this. It wasn’t in their nature.

Not having a TV to keep track of what was going on was killing him.

Listening to the muffled, frantic voices in the offices outside his cell was even worse.

Tim paced the room. There had to be a way out of here!

And then, suddenly, a possible solution presented itself.

* * *

Gordon Smith had made it up to Chelsea’s bedroom and was making quick work with his knife, stabbing and slicing and cutting, and was so into teaching that bitch a lesson that he failed to notice the sound of footsteps tramping up the stairs.

“What the hell?”

Gordon started suddenly, momentarily startled. He turned around quickly.

Chelsea stood at the threshold to her room. She looked stunned and shocked.

Gordon gripped the knife in his fist, still bent over her now slashed-to-ribbons bed and pillow.

Chelsea took a step backward into the hall. “Dad!”

Panic surged through Gordon. Instead of compelling him to flee, he remained rooted to the spot as Chelsea took off back down the stairs, screaming at the top of her lungs for her father.

OhshitohfucknowwhatthehelldoIdo?

Get the hell out of here!

As suddenly as the paralysis hit, it was gone. Gordon leaped for the hallway and headed down the stairs, taking them two at a time.

Gordon hit the living room and bolted for the front door just as Chelsea and her father entered the living room from the den. “Stop right there!” Chelsea’s dad bellowed.

Gordon turned around quickly, the hand holding the knife raised. He got a quick glimpse of Chelsea’s dad raising his arm, saw the black handgun he was holding, and then he heard a deafening BOOM!

The bullet punched through his chest and knocked him against the front door.

Shit, that hurt, he thought, as he felt himself falling to the floor as the darkness overtook him.

* * *

Chelsea could not bear to be in the living room with Gordon’s body lying in the foyer of the house.

She remained at her father’s side as he stood in the kitchen, trying to call 911 on the phone.

“Dammnit!” Her father pressed the disconnect button, got another open line, and tried again. “911 is jammed.”

“Everybody in the world is probably calling,” Chelsea said. She felt weird, like she was viewing everything from an out-of-body point of view. As if it wasn’t bad enough that dead people were climbing out of their graves, that people were turning up missing in their homes, that they were being killed by the newly risen dead and, in turn, were rising from the dead themselves, it was even harder to believe her dad had just killed Gordon Smith.

Dad punched numbers into the phone again. “If I can’t get anybody at 911, I’m just going to call the main number for the Spring Valley Police station.”

“Are you even sure he’s dead?”

“I’m sure. I checked his pulse. He’s dead.”

Chelsea nodded. The shriek of police sirens rose from blocks away, heading to different destinations. Maybe if they headed outside, hiked over to Route 501 and waved down a cop car, they could get somebody to the house.

“Still busy.” Dad disconnected again and pulled the phone book out of the cupboard drawer. He began flipping through it. “Don’t worry, honey, everything will be okay.”

Chelsea barely heard him. She was looking out the window into the back yard, hoping somebody in the neighborhood heard the gunshot. She knew her dad wouldn’t get in trouble for killing Gordon—he’d clearly acted in self-defense and had left Gordon’s body the way it had fallen, even left the knife in Gordon’s hand, didn’t even touch the weapon—but she was still afraid for what might happen anyway. It didn’t matter what she or any of her friends did; if Gordon Smith and his crew were involved, they would make it look like she and Tim, and George and Al, were somehow to blame.

And for the first time in her life she didn’t really give a shit.

Realizing this made her feel more confident. It was exhilarating.

Dad found the listing he was looking for. He’d replaced his handgun in the inner pocket of his sport coat and was dialing the number, glancing at the phone book as he did so. Chelsea watched him from her spot at the kitchen table. Her back was facing the living room and the front door.

Neither of them saw or heard Gordon Smith rise to a sitting position in the foyer, then get to his feet.

Chapter Twenty-Six

He was growing weaker by the moment, but Scott Bradfield was determined to reach his destination or die trying.

He was dying anyway.

Scott didn’t even pay attention to the police cars that were whipping this way and that during his drive to the Gaines house. It was hard enough keeping Dave’s vehicle in a more-or-less straight line. His left eye was gone, and blood continued to drip into his swollen right eye from his flayed scalp, making it sting. The flesh of his right cheek had been torn away, revealing tendons and gristle and a hint of jawbone. His breath was coming in rasping gasps, made worse by the deep gouges in his trachea. Likewise, he’d lost muscle mass thanks to Dad’s strong fingernails—who would have thought Dad would have had the strength to tear his biceps to shreds with his bare fingers?

Well, he had, and he’d done a lot worse.

Scott still didn’t know how he didn’t wind up dead like Dave and Steve. The last thing he remembered was his father launching himself at him, knocking him backward down the basement steps. He remembered fighting his father off in the initial few minutes of confusion, and he remembered hitting the back of his head at some point. Before he blacked out he remembered the other zombies coming down the stairs after Dad. He didn’t remember anything after that.

The next thing he remembered was lying on the ground, his vision blurry, pain rocketing from his head and face and arms. Through blurred vision, he caught a glimpse of Dave being torn apart by the guy in the Dr. Chud T-shirt and he was pretty certain one of the other zombies, the short skinny one, was wandering around the basement with a bemused look in its eyes. Scott could tell he was losing blood, that he was seriously injured, but he was alive. And he had to get out of that basement.

And somehow, amid the violence that had visited his house in the form of his father and those still unknown shambling creatures of the dead, one of Dad’s power tools had fallen off the shelf and now lay within easy reach.

Dad’s chainsaw.

Without even thinking about it, Scott reached out with his left hand and, ignoring the pain, grasped the chainsaw’s handle. He dragged it over and, with his other hand, reached for the ripcord. He sat up, chainsaw held firmly with his left hand, and started it with one savage tug.

As it roared to life, Dr. Chud turned toward him. Scott stood up and cut Dr. Chud in half as the zombie lurched over to him. Dr. Chud went down in a spray of blood, his guts splashing on the floor to land wetly at his feet. Scott stepped around Dr. Chud’s dismembered torso and brought the whirling blade down on the short-and-skinny zombie, who gave one semi-frightened bleating noise before being chewed up and spit out.

The other zombies had left the basement, and presumably the house. Scott had taken a quick look around, then turned his attention back to Dr. Chud, who had fallen in such a way that he’d landed on the open wound that bisected his torso. He looked like he was growing out of the basement floor. Dr. Chud waved his arms toward Scott and opened his mouth in a silent hiss. The floor around his torso was wet with blood; more ran out of Dr. Chud’s mouth. The zombie’s eyes were open and blank, like the eyes of a cow. Scott grimaced and brought the whirring blade of the chainsaw down on Dr. Chud’s head. “Here you go, you fucker.” The chainsaw cleaved through Dr. Chud’s head, dividing it neatly in two. Dr. Chud’s skull split down the middle, presumably his brain separating at their hemispheres perfectly, and the body flopped backward on the floor.

Scott had paused, his eyes lighting on the short, skinny zombie. It wasn’t nearly as mobile as Dr. Chud, and seemed to be having a hard time trying to maneuver itself. No way was it getting out of here without legs.

Scott had headed up the stairs, the blade of the chainsaw wielded like a weapon.

He was able to make it out of the house and outside where he quickly dashed over to Dave’s car. He’d clawed the door open and got inside, dropping the chainsaw on the backseat. For a moment he’d almost passed out in the front seat.

He’d grabbed Dave’s keys—they were sitting in the drink container in the center island between the front bucket seats—and started the car. He’d backed it down the driveway and headed out of the development.

And now he was nearing his final destination.

Scott turned down Maple Drive. He’d taken a roundabout route to the Gaines house because he wanted to avoid driving down Main Street. Every time he passed a street that fed into Main Street he detected heavy police presence. Several times he’d heard amplified voices, had even seen Army vehicles turning into the various residential streets that snaked off from Main Street. Scott had turned on the radio to hear what was going on and the news brought him up to date. The National Guard had been called in. A shitload of them from what it sounded like. The entire county was surrounded by the military, and troops were arriving from Fort Detrick, Maryland. He’d heard sirens and the steady whirring of helicopters flying overhead, so he knew the military and the police were stepping in to destroy as many of the zombies as possible. That was fine with Scott.

In fact, he hoped they would step up their assault.

It would provide him with the perfect cover for what he needed to do.

Scott’s left arm started to twitch and he almost lost control of the car. He stopped, the vehicle jerking, and he took a deep breath. He wasn’t far now. If he could just get there…

It didn’t matter if Count Gaines wasn’t home. As long as he got inside Tim’s house, he would wait.

Better yet, if his parents were home that would be even better.

He was pretty sure Tim’s parents didn’t possess any weapons. They’d always struck him as pansy-assed liberals, the kind that wanted to take everybody’s guns away.

That would make them pretty easy to take down with a chainsaw.

Either way, he was getting even with Count Gaines.

And if that meant getting even with him by killing his parents, so be it.

Scott Bradfield gained control of his arm again. He took a deep breath, then took the steering wheel and crept forward.

A moment later he made a left hand turn down Count Gaines’s street. He ignored the few people who were standing outside, staring up at the military helicopters that were flying overhead toward destinations unknown.

Scott felt a tinge of excitement as he drew to the curb next door to Gaines’s townhouse. Both his parent’s vehicles were in the driveway.

Grinning, Scott turned off the car, reached into the backseat for the chainsaw. He grunted with the effort it took to lift the heavy tool. Another burst of pain exploded through his body, tingling his limbs. He felt woozy again. He fought the feeling, then regained his strength.

He took a deep breath, feeling more in control. Then he opened the driver’s side door and, chainsaw in hand, limped his way to Count Gaines’s house.

* * *

Tim Gaines had been standing with his ear practically to the wall of the cell near the door, listening to what was going on outside, when he heard footsteps approach.

Tim stepped back as the door was unlocked.

Officer Clapton stepped inside. He looked worse than he had earlier this morning.

Dark circles rimmed his eyes, which were bloodshot. “I just talked to your mother. The author of Back From the Dead called your house today looking for you.”

At first Tim didn’t know what he was talking about, but then he remembered his hastily-written email last night to William Sawyer. “Really? What did she say?”

“What she told me managed to confuse me even more.” Officer Clapton’s eyes looked haunted. “Guy couldn’t believe this could happen.”

“I don’t think any of us did,” Tim said.

“I just got word from a unit of State Police and National Guardsmen that had been dispatched to the Bradfield residence.”

Hearing this news was a shock to Tim’s system. “What happened?”

“When the State Police and National Guard got there the place was empty, but it looked like those things had been there.” Clapton entered the cell and stood near the lone bunk. The door to the cell was open and the conversing voices that had seemed only muted before were now more discernable. “They found several zombies that were…well, dead is the only word I can think of to describe them. They’ve been put down. There were at least four, probably five in the basement in various stages of dismemberment. Our guys came across a few that were still mobile that were roaming around at the rear of the property. They were forced to open fire when they came under attack by these things. One of them was identified as Tom Bradfield.”

“Tom?”

“Yeah. We still don’t know what happened. They’re still investigating the scene now, but so far only Tom Bradfield has been positively identified.”

“What about Scott?”

“Don’t know about him yet. They’re still working at containing the scene. But get this…” Clapton leaned forward against the table. “Two of the bodies they found were old.

Officer Slick, from the State Police, tells me they look like they’ve been dead and buried for twenty years or more. The closest cemetery is on the grounds of the Manheim Church of the Brethren, and all of those bodies have been accounted for. Those corpses had headed south, toward Lancaster. Besides, there’s no way they could’ve made it to the Bradfield estate in that time. But get this…your mother told me that William Sawyer told her that in order for this spell to work it would require a dead human body. That if done correctly it probably wouldn’t have worked until they brought the bodies of their victims to the spot and buried them. But the way Gordon did the spell…he must have screwed it up or something, because he actually unwittingly performed another spell, one that was more…liberal in its use of raising the dead.”

“More liberal?”

“Yeah. It had no safeguards built in. But in order for it to work, a dead human body was required. Gordon wouldn’t have known this, but he wasn’t an expert either.

Anyway, he did the spell thinking he was performing the one that would have only resurrected his chosen victims, but instead this other spell was set forth. And…the power or spiritual force it let loose did what it was called forth to do. It occupied the body of a dead human being, in this case two of them that just happened to be buried nearby.”

Tim made the connection quickly. “Those old bodies Officer Slick found at the Bradfield place?”

Clapton nodded. “Yeah. I sent a team out to Zuck’s Woods and they just sent back word of a grave that had been dug up. Said it looked like whatever was in there dug its way out, not in. We’re working at getting a forensic team out there now. We should know more shortly. Your mother passed on my cell phone number to William Sawyer; he’s researching this thing now.”

Tim’s mind was racing. “Do my folks know about the bodies found at the Bradfield place?”

“Not yet.” Officer Clapton sighed. He sat down. It looked like the events of the past twenty-four hours and being up for the past two days were taking their toll. “We’ve got the National Guard and troops from Fort Detrick coming in, and they’re doing a bang-up job at making sure these goddamn things stay down once they get up. It’s not like the movies where a shot to the head does it. Its taking total dismemberment.”

“Oh, man!”

Officer Clapton continued, as if he were talking to himself. “We’ve managed to capture a few of them, and some scientists are down from New York. They’re trying to find a way to restrain them so they can be studied. The goddamn news media is having a field day with this. Meanwhile, people are panicking, downtown Lancaster is in chaos, and looky-loos from out of the county are flocking in to watch the freakshow.”

“What about my folks? Are they coming?”

“No. I told them I wanted them to stay home for their own safety.”

“Oh.” Tim frowned. He was hoping his parents would have been here by now to secure his release.

“I do have good news, though,” Officer Clapton said. For the first time there was a hint of promise in his features. “It looks like this spell is losing its power.”

“Really? How so?”

“It hasn’t spread beyond the county, for one thing.” Clapton sighed. “We’ve been maintaining contact with cemeteries and funeral homes throughout the county. Only a handful of them from the general vicinity of the initial breakout have reported this rising from the dead phenomenon. The furthest it’s traveled is maybe five miles outside the perimeter. At the rate it spread this morning, it should have gone well into York and Berks Counties and probably into Maryland by now, but it hasn’t. It’s like it just stopped and then started weakening. Hell, it almost seems like the spell itself is over. Like it’s lost its strength and has ended entirely.”

“Really?” Tim wondered how this was possible.

“Yeah. It’s made it a hell of a lot easier to kill the remaining zombies.”

“So the people that’ve been resurrected…even though the spell itself isn’t spreading, its still powerful enough to animate the dead?”

“That’s what it seems like. It’s like whatever remaining strength the spell has, its being used in animating the dead that were affected late last night and early this morning.

It’s lost all its strength in spreading, and it doesn’t seem to be affecting new people.”

“That would take other murders, right?” Tim mused aloud. “I mean…if the zombies were killing the living, they were spreading this spell, or this virus, or whatever it was.” He looked at Officer Clapton. “That would mean something was commanding them to spread itself. But if the zombies are being killed, that’s weakening the spell somewhat so…” Tim frowned. It didn’t make sense that the spell would peter out like that. In Back From the Dead, the only thing that could end the spell was the magician.

Tim wracked his brain trying to think of other scenes of black magic from various horror novels he’d read in an attempt at explaining to himself why the spell Gordon conjured could suddenly lose steam. He couldn’t think of anything.

“Anyway, we’re still telling everybody to stay inside as a precaution,” Officer Clapton continued. He looked at Tim and managed a smile. “It looks like we’re getting things under control. I can take you home if you’d like.”

“Really?” At the mention of going home, Tim completely forgot about figuring out why Gordon’s spell was ending.

“Yeah.” Officer Clapton rose to his feet. “It’s the least I could do. I feel bad about the last few days. What happened to you shouldn’t have happened, and I’m sorry if I came across as…well…as a hard-ass—”

“It’s okay,” Tim said.

“No, it’s not okay.” Officer Clapton shook his head. “I imagine things are going to be a lot different in the next few weeks, what with Tom Bradfield dead. He would have been a major thorn in your side. One of our detectives paid him a visit earlier this morning to try to talk to Scott, and Tom wouldn’t let them. Told them we had to refer all questions to his lawyer.”

“You think Tom Bradfield knew what was going on?”

“You want my opinion?”

“Yeah.”

“He knew something. One of the reports I heard was that somebody was trying to paint that guesthouse to cover up all the bloodstains that were found.”

Tim felt a sense of vindication. Proof that he was telling the truth! “No shit?”

“No shit, buddy.” Officer Clapton clapped Tim on the back. “Come on. Let’s get you home.”

And with that, Tim followed Officer Clapton out of the room. He couldn’t wait to get home.

* * *

Tim Gaines felt better the closer they got to home.

He’d never seen the streets of Lancaster city, much less the surrounding towns and suburbs, so crowded with police cars and military vehicles. It seemed like there was one military jeep or police car on every other intersection. Twice they passed parking lots that contained larger military vehicles designed to transport soldiers. Cops were directing traffic in some places, steering pedestrians and commuters away from certain areas.

Officer Clapton had to show his shield once on the drive to Spring Valley when they reached a checkpoint. Tim tried to pay attention to what was going on by listening to the police band in the car, but had a hard time deciphering all the jargon. It sounded like things were getting under control. Self-containment units had been dispatched to all corners of the affected area, and the National Guard had set up checkpoints at various locations heading in and out of the county. The last report of a dispatch (which Tim figured meant a mass extermination of zombies) was fifteen minutes ago, on the west side of Lititz. The primary problem now seemed to be the news media, which had descended on the towns of Spring Valley and Lititz in droves.

The view from the back seat behind the wire-mesh that separated him and Officer Clapton provided a good view of what was happening. Tim took it all in, feeling better about the situation, but still worried about Chelsea and his parents. He was also worried about George, Al, and their families. “Have you heard anything about George Ulrich and Al Romero?” Tim asked.

“I haven’t,” Officer Clapton said. “But if it’ll help put your mind at ease, most people in Spring Valley are fine. The only areas that suffered serious infection were the neighboring communities that bordered Zuck’s Woods. I think your friends live far enough outside that area.”

Tim nodded. True enough. Still…

Officer Clapton made a right turn down his street. The last police vehicle they’d passed was at the entrance of their development. Almost home.

As they drew up to the house, they passed a car that had been parked on the wrong side of the street, but Tim didn’t think anything of it. The people that lived across the street had friends that sometimes pulled into their side of the street the wrong way. He was surprised he didn’t see more haphazardly parked vehicles this morning. At least his folks were still home.

As they pulled up behind his parent’s vehicles, Officer Clapton’s cell phone rang.

Officer Clapton stopped the car and reached for his phone. “Go on up, I’ll be there in a minute.”

“Okay,” Tim said. He stepped out of the car and took a step toward the front door.

From behind him, Officer Clapton: “Mr. Sawyer! Good to talk to you!” Pause.

“Well, things seem to be getting—“

Tim tuned Officer Clapton out as he drew closer to the front door, which was wide open.

Something was wrong.

It was an instinctual feeling, the way you know a trip to the dentist to have a wisdom tooth pulled is going to be painful even though you’ve never had one done before. It was just a given. Tim felt something bad had happened and that something even worse was lying in wait for him beyond the front door to his home.

The smart thing to do would be to call out to Officer Clapton.

Tim rushed to the front porch, opened the screen door and burst through the entrance. As he did, the front door banged back and closed shut on its backward momentum. His mom’s voice came through, her voice clear, concise, and commanding.

“Lock the door, Timmy, don’t let them in!”

Tim reached behind him and automatically locked the front door. He was deathly afraid now.

He smelled blood.

Sweat.

Death.

Tim took a step into the darkened living room and almost tripped over the prone figure that lay before him. He prodded it with the toe of his sneaker. At first Tim didn’t think it could be a body. The way it was positioned, lying headfirst against the wall…it seemed out of joint. It was moving, that much was evident by the way whoever it was kept trying to raise itself up, but it wasn’t until Tim got a closer look that he realized two things. One, the person lying before him was headless, and two, it was Scott Bradfield.

“Oh shit,” Tim moaned. He took a step into the kitchen…

…into a charnel house.

The first thing he noticed was the chainsaw. It’s stark contrast against the rest of the kitchen leaped out at him, prominent in painting an accurate picture of what had occurred here. The chainsaw’s still blade was deep red. Great splashes of blood stained the walls, the cabinets, the refrigerator and stove, the floor, even the ceiling.

Sitting in the center of the kitchen was Scott Bradfield’s head. It was lying perfectly positioned on its neck stump, facing the living room. His eyes were open. They rolled up, zeroed in on Tim and his face turned into a grimace of hate. Scott opened his mouth and if Tim were in his right mind he would think Scott was trying to communicate with him.

But Tim Gaines wasn’t in his right mind.

His parents were lying on the floor near Scott’s head. His father leaning against the stove, his breath coming in rasping gasps, his mother on her back, legs splayed up against the dishwasher. Dad still clutched the large butcher knife he’d used to decapitate Scott. His chest and face bore large wounds that wept copious amounts of blood.

His mother looked at him, her eyes showing a faraway type of look. Her left arm was severed at the elbow. Her face was white. “Lock the door, Timmy. They’re on the loose. They’re on the loose and your father…your father…”

“Shhh, it’s okay, Mom,” Tim knelt down beside his mother. He felt the first biting sting of tears spring to his eyes.

A large chunk of flesh had been torn out of Mom’s throat. She was lying in a rapidly spreading pool of blood. It was a wonder she wasn’t dead already. She fixed Tim with her gaze. Tim could tell she was fighting a losing battle at staying conscious. “Tim, I feel…I feel…”

“I’m gonna get help, Mom.” Tim forced himself to his feet.

“Tim, he’s here…he’s right over there and your father…your father…he saved me…he…he was so brave, Timmy, he—”

“I know Mom, I know.” Tim kissed his mother’s forehead. He didn’t even want to think about how the battle with Scott had gone down, didn’t even want to know what it had taken to fight him off the way they obviously had. Tim forced himself to walk away from his mother. He headed to the front door, intending to open it up and call to Officer Clapton. He had to get help and he had to do it fast before—

There was a rap on the back door.

Tim stopped, turned around. Standing on the back deck, almost splayed against the sliding glass door, was Chelsea. She was looking in the house, her expression stoned, vacant. She raised her right hand and brought it against the glass door again, making a slipping, sliding sound…

…streaking the glass with brownish-red blood.

“Oh my God, Chelsea,” Tim whispered.

The front of her white T-shirt was stained a dark maroon. Tim could clearly see the massive wound on the side of her neck, as well as the teeth on the left side of her face from the flesh that had been stripped away from her cheek.

For a minute Tim was transported back to the night he’d fallen in love with Chelsea on their first date a week ago. The scent of the sweet summer night, the soft brush of her lips against his, the warmth of her body as they held each other in the front seat of her car.

The way she’d snuck back to his house that night, after his parents had gone to bed, and he was sitting up in the living room with the laptop and she’d tapped on the sliding glass door to get his attention.

Much like she was doing now.

Tim stood rooted to the spot. He was confused. He had to help his parents, had to help Chelsea, had to—

It was too late.

And as soon as he realized that simple fact, he accepted it. He couldn’t change it.

Couldn’t make things better by summoning Officer Clapton. What could he do? Give them mouth-to-mouth resuscitation? Stem the bleeding? They’d already pretty much bled out. They were dying, would be dead in minutes—

There was only one thing he could do.

Tim went to the living room and threw the deadbolt closed on the front door.

Then he stepped back into the kitchen to open the sliding glass door and let Chelsea in.

Chapter Twenty-Seven

Tim Gaines had lost all sense of time since barricading himself inside the house.

It seemed like only yesterday when Officer Clapton had driven him home from Brendan Hall.

From outside, an amplified voice: “Tim? Tim, it’s Officer Clapton. If you can hear me, please pick up the phone when it rings. I’m calling right now.”

A moment later the phone rang. Tim let it ring. What was the point in talking to Clapton now?

He didn’t have to hear what was going on outside to know there was a shitload of police vehicles in front of the house. Likewise, there were a lot of officers in position in the back of the house too, most of them far enough away that they wouldn’t pose a threat.

When they’d tried to storm the house yesterday by trying to break in through the back door, Tim had held them back by placing a knife to his throat and drawing enough blood that they’d backed off—he’d seen a reenactment of similar scene where a suicidal person had done the same thing and it kept the police away, for awhile at least. It worked for him, too. As a result, he’d had to spend most of his time in the kitchen, near the sliding glass door, so they’d have a good view of him and know he still meant business.

The phone stopped ringing. A moment later Officer Clapton’s amplified voice came back on. “Tim? I know you’re in there and that you can hear me. Please…let’s talk again. We can take care of this.”

The problem was, they couldn’t. Nobody could take care of it. Not the police, not the city officials, who were still scrambling at damage control over the clusterfuck they’d helped breed at the Bradfield estate. CNN had been very receptive to Tim’s phone call last night when he told them everything, including the events that had led up to the crimes perpetrated by Scott Bradfield and his friends. In the hours that had passed, they were reporting on three different segments of the story; the zombie epidemic, which was finished now except for one final location (his house); Scott Bradfield and Gordon Smith’s involvement with black magic, which had caused the rising of the dead; and the wilding sprees that had precipitated the whole mess. The fourth thing they were now reporting, thanks to Tim’s phone call, was Spring Valley’s indifference to Tim’s plight in the years leading up to all this, and their continued protection of Scott and his friends.

That was causing a shit-storm now. And it was about time.

Tim sighed. He had a feeling he wouldn’t be around for the aftermath of whatever repercussions resulted from the general ineptitude of the Spring Valley school officials who continually turned a blind eye away from the harassment Tim endured throughout his academic career. That was too bad. At least shit was happening now. No doubt people would be fired for what happened. Lawsuits would be filed. People would go to jail. If anything good came of it, Tim hoped that lessons were learned so that nothing like this ever happened again to another kid.

Tim thought about George Ulrich and Al Romero. He missed them. It hurt to think he’d never experience their friendship in the years to come due to this unfortunate set of circumstances. With the exception of his parents and Chelsea, his friendship with George and Al had been the best thing that had ever happened to him. They would no doubt suffer emotionally in the months and years to follow, but Tim was certain they would benefit in the legal aftermath. Doug Fenner would help them reap huge financial benefits through his legal representation.

Tim looked out the back door. The officers were still maintaining vigilance, waiting for further orders, or for Tim to finally break down and come outside peacefully.

No way was that happening.

CNN had been providing background noise throughout the day, feeding Tim with vital information on the latest statistics. One hundred and twenty-eight people in Spring Valley were confirmed dead. Over four hundred corpses had picked themselves up from various churchyards and cemeteries and lurched forth on a mission from whatever it was Gordon had conjured up. Several hundred people had been hospitalized for related injuries; car accidents caused by distracted motorists who’d never seen a zombie before; shock-induced strokes or heart attacks; various injuries caused from fleeing the walking dead. A handful of hospitalizations resulted from the brief spate of lawlessness that sprang up in Lancaster’s inner city, mostly from the youth.

Among the vital stats Tim Gaines learned was that Gordon Smith had been killed by a single shot to the chest by Chelsea’s father. He was later put out of his final misery by the forty-seventh battalion out of Fort Detrick when he was found walking down Main Street. It was only within the past few hours that Tim learned that Chelsea’s father had been killed, presumably by Gordon, and been put down a second time by military officials. Chelsea was listed as missing.

Tim glanced at Chelsea. It had taken all of the tie-downs they had in the family camping equipment to secure Chelsea to the living room table, which was constructed of solid oak and weighed a ton. He’d used the coil of rope that was in the camping kit to truss his parents up. They were now tied together, connected by their backs, facing apart from each other. The few times they’d tried to get up, they’d fallen on Mom’s left side.

With Mom’s left arm now gone, they couldn’t get up. The best they’d been able to do was maneuver themselves into a position that put his dad face-down on the kitchen floor. If Dad had been alive, he would have suffocated.

But they weren’t alive. And neither was Chelsea, for that matter.

And none of that mattered.

Tim stood in front of Chelsea. She looked up at him. Despite her present condition something still lived within her, something that was not entirely evil or corrupt.

He was convinced of it. She did not strain at her bonds in an attempt to break free and attack him. While his parents strained and pulled at their bonds, he believed they weren’t trying to attack him, either. The few times he’d stood in the kitchen and watched them, Mom had made noises that suggested she was crying. Dad, too, bore an expression of agony, like he was aware that he was caught in some kind of limbo between the living and dead, like he realized his body was dead but couldn’t quite understand why he wasn’t in total control of his faculties.

Did this mean their spirits, the part that made them so unique as human beings, had not entirely died?

Tim had knelt down by his parents and Chelsea a few times, always standing a safe five feet or so away in case they truly were dangerous. Neither of them made any attempt at aggression. Indeed, their expressions were more of longing, of love.

An outsider would no doubt look at this scene and immediately conclude that they weren’t dead at all. Just severely injured and emotionally traumatized.

The only thing that blew that theory out of the water was their smell.

Tim had been barricaded in the house with them for a day now. He’d made no attempt at turning on the air conditioning. Outside, it was a sweltering ninety-five degrees. With all the windows in the house closed, and the doors shut and the drapes pulled back to allow him to see outside, the conditions inside the house resembled a boxcar left out in the sun. Late last night they’d been stiff, had moved with great difficulty, but starting this morning they’d been more normal in their movements. Rigor mortis was probably over now. What followed rigor mortis was the next step: decomposition.

From outside, Officer Clapton’s amplified voice cut through the din. “Tim! It’s Officer Clapton again. Tim…please…come out. Let us handle your parents. Please…for your sake…for theirs…”

The problem was, he couldn’t let them handle his parents. He had to do it. But he couldn’t.

And he couldn’t let them touch Chelsea.

Tim stood over Chelsea, her image shimmering in his blurred vision brought on by tears. She looked up at him, and now there was something in her demeanor that was different. He sighed, wiped the tears from his eyes. He didn’t think she’d possessed the dead blank look of the other zombies; even his parents seemed to have an awareness about them. He’d tried telling himself that it was simple wish-fullfillment on his part. But it wasn’t. Scott Bradfield, who he studied at length from across the room and was still animated, possessed the look of the other zombies. Dead stare, vacant gaze, a simple-minded purpose. But his parents and Chelsea? While that dead stare and simple-minded purpose were there, Tim detected a bit of what made them human beneath the surface. It was this spirit that seemed to be at constant war inside them while their shell, their bodies, went through the process of decay.

“Tim, please, if you’re listening I’m going to make one more call to you. Please answer it.”

Tim knelt down closer to Chelsea as the phone began to ring.

Chelsea looked at him and Tim read the look in her eyes clearly now. Despite the dead stare something else swam to the surface.

Tim reached for her, his own eyes swimming with tears now. He couldn’t leave her. Not like this.

The phone continued to ring.

Behind him, his mother’s tortured voice rose in a heart-wrenching whine of loss.

“I can’t leave you,” he said to Chelsea, his voice choked up as he sobbed. “I can’t leave you here, I can’t let them—“

I can’t let them take you away from me.

Tim reached out, his hands drifting past and around Chelsea to the hooks that secured the tie-downs in place to keep her immobile. He was within hugging distance of her now, her stench enveloping him. The phone brayed endlessly as he worked at unfastening the tie-downs that held Chelsea to the dining room table.

As her bonds fell away Tim felt the dam break. The ringing phone wasn’t even registering now, nor was the police presence outside. Chelsea’s eyes remained on his as something like love passed through her features.

Her hand touched his arm, her fingers rubbing his skin. Tim reached out to her, his heart filling with such an intense love for her that he let a sob break loose. Nothing could keep them apart.

“Honey,” Chelsea croaked through dead lips.

And when he went into her embrace finally, all other sensations were eclipsed by the simple fact of enfolding himself completely with the woman he loved, even as the police finally stormed up the back deck and began the process of shattering the glass door to gain entry.

About The Author

J. F. Gonzalez is the author of fifteen previous novels of terror and dark suspense including Primitive, Bully, The Beloved, Survivor, and is co-author of the cult-classic Clickers, and the sequels Clickers II: The Next Wave and Clickers III: Dagon Rising (with Mark Williams and Brian Keene respectively). His short fiction is collected in four volumes, of which the latest, The Summoning and Other Eldritch Tales, is available now from Darkside Digital as an exclusive electronic title. Not content to rest on his laurels, he also works in other media including film, the technology sector, and other areas of publishing. He lives with his family in Pennsylvania and is currently working on his next novel.

Table of Contents

Prologue

Chapter One

Chapter Two

Chapter Three

Chapter Four

Chapter Five

Chapter Six

Chapter Seven

Chapter Eight

Chapter Nine

Chapter Ten

Chapter Eleven

Chapter Twelve

Chapter Thirteen

Chapter Fourteen

Chapter Fifteen

Chapter Sixteen

Chapter Seventeen

Chapter Eighteen

Chapter Nineteen

Chapter Twenty

Chapter Twenty-One

Chapter Twenty-Two

Chapter Twenty-Three

Chapter Twenty-Four

Chapter Twenty-Five

Chapter Twenty-Six

Chapter Twenty-Seven